US20180325992A1 - Modulation of axon degeneration - Google Patents

Modulation of axon degeneration Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20180325992A1
US20180325992A1 US15/908,024 US201815908024A US2018325992A1 US 20180325992 A1 US20180325992 A1 US 20180325992A1 US 201815908024 A US201815908024 A US 201815908024A US 2018325992 A1 US2018325992 A1 US 2018325992A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
antibody
neuron
protein
antibodies
degeneration
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US15/908,024
Inventor
Ryan J. Watts
Mark Chen
Joseph Wesley Lewcock
Christine Pozniak
Arundhati Sengupta-Ghosh
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Genentech Inc
Original Assignee
Genentech Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Genentech Inc filed Critical Genentech Inc
Priority to US15/908,024 priority Critical patent/US20180325992A1/en
Publication of US20180325992A1 publication Critical patent/US20180325992A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/04—Peptides having up to 20 amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/12—Cyclic peptides, e.g. bacitracins; Polymyxins; Gramicidins S, C; Tyrocidins A, B or C
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/395—Antibodies; Immunoglobulins; Immune serum, e.g. antilymphocytic serum
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/12—Ketones
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/16—Amides, e.g. hydroxamic acids
    • A61K31/165—Amides, e.g. hydroxamic acids having aromatic rings, e.g. colchicine, atenolol, progabide
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/275—Nitriles; Isonitriles
    • A61K31/277—Nitriles; Isonitriles having a ring, e.g. verapamil
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/335—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin
    • A61K31/35—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having six-membered rings with one oxygen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/335—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin
    • A61K31/35—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having six-membered rings with one oxygen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/352—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having six-membered rings with one oxygen as the only ring hetero atom condensed with carbocyclic rings, e.g. methantheline 
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/40—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/40—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
    • A61K31/4015—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil having oxo groups directly attached to the heterocyclic ring, e.g. piracetam, ethosuximide
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/41—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which being nitrogen, e.g. tetrazole
    • A61K31/415—1,2-Diazoles
    • A61K31/416—1,2-Diazoles condensed with carbocyclic ring systems, e.g. indazole
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/41—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which being nitrogen, e.g. tetrazole
    • A61K31/4164—1,3-Diazoles
    • A61K31/4184—1,3-Diazoles condensed with carbocyclic rings, e.g. benzimidazoles
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/41—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which being nitrogen, e.g. tetrazole
    • A61K31/425—Thiazoles
    • A61K31/426—1,3-Thiazoles
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/41—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which being nitrogen, e.g. tetrazole
    • A61K31/433—Thidiazoles
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/4427—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof containing further heterocyclic ring systems
    • A61K31/4439—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof containing further heterocyclic ring systems containing a five-membered ring with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. omeprazole
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/445—Non condensed piperidines, e.g. piperocaine
    • A61K31/45—Non condensed piperidines, e.g. piperocaine having oxo groups directly attached to the heterocyclic ring, e.g. cycloheximide
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/496—Non-condensed piperazines containing further heterocyclic rings, e.g. rifampin, thiothixene or sparfloxacin
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A61K31/506—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim not condensed and containing further heterocyclic rings
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A61K31/517—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim ortho- or peri-condensed with carbocyclic ring systems, e.g. quinazoline, perimidine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A61K31/519—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim ortho- or peri-condensed with heterocyclic rings
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A61K31/519—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim ortho- or peri-condensed with heterocyclic rings
    • A61K31/52—Purines, e.g. adenine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/535—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with at least one nitrogen and one oxygen as the ring hetero atoms, e.g. 1,2-oxazines
    • A61K31/5375—1,4-Oxazines, e.g. morpholine
    • A61K31/5377—1,4-Oxazines, e.g. morpholine not condensed and containing further heterocyclic rings, e.g. timolol
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/70—Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/7088—Compounds having three or more nucleosides or nucleotides
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/70—Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/7088—Compounds having three or more nucleosides or nucleotides
    • A61K31/7105—Natural ribonucleic acids, i.e. containing only riboses attached to adenine, guanine, cytosine or uracil and having 3'-5' phosphodiester links
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/70—Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/7088—Compounds having three or more nucleosides or nucleotides
    • A61K31/711—Natural deoxyribonucleic acids, i.e. containing only 2'-deoxyriboses attached to adenine, guanine, cytosine or thymine and having 3'-5' phosphodiester links
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/70—Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/7088—Compounds having three or more nucleosides or nucleotides
    • A61K31/713—Double-stranded nucleic acids or oligonucleotides
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K33/00—Medicinal preparations containing inorganic active ingredients
    • A61K33/14—Alkali metal chlorides; Alkaline earth metal chlorides
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/04—Peptides having up to 20 amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/05—Dipeptides
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/16—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/17—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • A61K38/18—Growth factors; Growth regulators
    • A61K38/185—Nerve growth factor [NGF]; Brain derived neurotrophic factor [BDNF]; Ciliary neurotrophic factor [CNTF]; Glial derived neurotrophic factor [GDNF]; Neurotrophins, e.g. NT-3
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/08—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for nausea, cinetosis or vertigo; Antiemetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/14—Prodigestives, e.g. acids, enzymes, appetite stimulants, antidyspeptics, tonics, antiflatulents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/12—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the kidneys
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02—Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A61P21/02—Muscle relaxants, e.g. for tetanus or cramps
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/02—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for peripheral neuropathies
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/04—Centrally acting analgesics, e.g. opioids
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/08—Antiepileptics; Anticonvulsants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A61P25/16—Anti-Parkinson drugs
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/18—Antipsychotics, i.e. neuroleptics; Drugs for mania or schizophrenia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/20—Hypnotics; Sedatives
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/22—Anxiolytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/24—Antidepressants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A61P27/06—Antiglaucoma agents or miotics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A61P31/18—Antivirals for RNA viruses for HIV
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/20—Antivirals for DNA viruses
    • A61P31/22—Antivirals for DNA viruses for herpes viruses
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A61P37/06—Immunosuppressants, e.g. drugs for graft rejection
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P39/00—General protective or antinoxious agents
    • A61P39/02—Antidotes
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • C07K16/18—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans
    • C07K16/22—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against growth factors ; against growth regulators
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • C07K16/40—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against enzymes
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09—Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/11—DNA or RNA fragments; Modified forms thereof; Non-coding nucleic acids having a biological activity
    • C12N15/113—Non-coding nucleic acids modulating the expression of genes, e.g. antisense oligonucleotides; Antisense DNA or RNA; Triplex- forming oligonucleotides; Catalytic nucleic acids, e.g. ribozymes; Nucleic acids used in co-suppression or gene silencing
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09—Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/11—DNA or RNA fragments; Modified forms thereof; Non-coding nucleic acids having a biological activity
    • C12N15/113—Non-coding nucleic acids modulating the expression of genes, e.g. antisense oligonucleotides; Antisense DNA or RNA; Triplex- forming oligonucleotides; Catalytic nucleic acids, e.g. ribozymes; Nucleic acids used in co-suppression or gene silencing
    • C12N15/1137—Non-coding nucleic acids modulating the expression of genes, e.g. antisense oligonucleotides; Antisense DNA or RNA; Triplex- forming oligonucleotides; Catalytic nucleic acids, e.g. ribozymes; Nucleic acids used in co-suppression or gene silencing against enzymes
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/5005—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells
    • G01N33/5008—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells for testing or evaluating the effect of chemical or biological compounds, e.g. drugs, cosmetics
    • G01N33/5044—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving human or animal cells for testing or evaluating the effect of chemical or biological compounds, e.g. drugs, cosmetics involving specific cell types
    • G01N33/5058—Neurological cells
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00—Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/70—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by effect upon binding to a cell or to an antigen
    • C07K2317/76—Antagonist effect on antigen, e.g. neutralization or inhibition of binding
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00—Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/10—Type of nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/14—Type of nucleic acid interfering N.A.
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2320/00—Applications; Uses
    • C12N2320/30—Special therapeutic applications

Definitions

  • This invention relates generally to treatment of neurological disorders and nervous system injuries.
  • the invention specifically concerns the use of modulators of particular target proteins and processes in methods to inhibit neuron and axon degeneration.
  • Neuron or axon degeneration plays a central role in the proper development of the nervous system and is a hallmark of many neurodegenerative diseases including, for example, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), Alzheimer's disease, and Parkinson's disease, as well as traumatic injury to the brain and spinal cord.
  • ALS amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
  • Alzheimer's disease Alzheimer's disease
  • Parkinson's disease traumatic injury to the brain and spinal cord.
  • the invention provides methods for inhibiting degeneration of a neuron or a portion thereof (e.g., the neuron cell body, an axon, or a dendrite).
  • the methods involve administering to the neuron or portion thereof an agent that modulates: (i) the activity or expression of a target protein in the neuron or portion thereof, or (ii) a process in the neuron or portion thereof.
  • proteins that can be targeted in the methods of the invention include dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase (DLK), glycogen synthase kinase 3 ⁇ (GSK3 ⁇ ), p38 mitogen-activated protein kinase (p38 MAPK), ⁇ -catenin, transcription factor 4 (TCF4), epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR), phosphoinositide 3-kinase (PI3K), cyclin-dependent kinase 5 (cdk5), adenylyl cyclase, c-Jun N-terminal kinase (JNK), BCL2-associated X protein (Bax), Ih channel, calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase (CaMKK), G-proteins, G-protein coupled receptors, transcription factor 4 (TCF4), or ⁇ -catenin, while examples of processes that can be targeted are transcription and protein synthesis.
  • DLK dual leucine zipper-bearing
  • the neuron or portion thereof can consist of or can be within a neuron selected from the group consisting of a cerebellar granule neuron, a dorsal root ganglion neuron, a cortical neuron, a sympathetic neuron, and a hippocampal neuron.
  • the agents can be, for example, inhibitors of the target protein or process. Further, the agents can be, for example, selected from the group consisting of antibodies, polypeptides, peptides, peptibodies, nucleic acid molecules, short interfering RNAs (siRNAs), polynucleotides, aptamers, small molecules, and polysaccharides. In the case of antibodies, the antibodies can be monoclonal antibodies, chimeric antibodies, humanized antibodies, human antibodies, or antibody fragments (e.g., an Fv, Fab, Fab′, or F(ab′) 2 fragment).
  • the agent can be, for example, selected from the group consisting of MG132, SB 415286, GSK3 ⁇ inhibitor I, GSK33 inhibitor VII, GSK3 ⁇ inhibitor VIII, GSK3 ⁇ inhibitor XII, Lithium Chloride, SB 202190, SB 239063, SB 239069, SB 203580, SB 203580 HCl, AG 556, AG 555, AG 494, PD168393, Tyrphostin B44, Tyrphostin B42 (AG 490), LY 294022, Anisomycin, Cycloheximide, Roscovitine, Forskolin, NKH 477, Actinomycin D, SP600125, Bax Channel Blocker, ZD7288, STO-609, bortezomid, disulfiram, pamapimod, gefitinib, erlotinib, lapatinib ditosylate, demeclocycline hydrochloride, gentamicin sulfate, n
  • the neuron or portion thereof can be present in a subject, such as a human subject.
  • the subject can, for example, have or be at risk of developing a disease or condition selected from the group consisting of (i) disorders of the nervous system, (ii) conditions of the nervous system that are secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system, (iii) injuries to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma, (iv) pain, (v) ocular-related neurodegeneration, (vi) memory loss, and (vii) psychiatric disorders.
  • a disease or condition selected from the group consisting of (i) disorders of the nervous system, (ii) conditions of the nervous system that are secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system, (iii) injuries to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma, (iv) pain, (v) ocular-related neurodegeneration, (vi) memory loss, and (vii) psychiatric disorders
  • disorders of the nervous system include amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), trigeminal neuralgia, glossopharyngeal neuralgia, Bell's Palsy, myasthenia gravis, muscular dystrophy, progressive muscular atrophy, primary lateral sclerosis (PLS), pseudobulbar palsy, progressive bulbar palsy, spinal muscular atrophy, inherited muscular atrophy, invertebrate disk syndromes, cervical spondylosis, plexus disorders, thoracic outlet destruction syndromes, peripheral neuropathies, prophyria, Alzheimer's disease, Huntington's disease, Parkinson's disease, Parkinson's-plus diseases, multiple system atrophy, progressive supranuclear palsy, corticobasal degeneration, dementia with Lewy bodies, frontotemporal dementia, demyelinating diseases, Guillain-Barré syndrome, multiple sclerosis, Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease, prion disease, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, Gerstmann-St
  • pain examples include chronic pain, fibromyalgia, spinal pain, carpel tunnel syndrome, pain from cancer, arthritis, sciatica, headaches, pain from surgery, muscle spasms, back pain, visceral pain, pain from injury, dental pain, neuralgia, such as neuogenic or neuropathic pain, nerve inflammation or damage, shingles, herniated disc, torn ligament, and diabetes.
  • Examples of conditions of the nervous system that are secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system include peripheral neuropathy or neuralgia caused by diabetes, cancer, AIDS, hepatitis, kidney dysfunction, Colorado tick fever, diphtheria, HIV infection, leprosy, lyme disease, polyarteritis nodosa, rheumatoid arthritis, sarcoidosis, Sjogren syndrome, syphilis, systemic lupus erythematosus, and amyloidosis.
  • injuries to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma include nerve damage caused by exposure to toxic compounds, heavy metals, industrial solvents, drugs, chemotherapeutic agents, dapsone, HIV medications, cholesterol lowering drugs, heart or blood pressure medications, and metronidazole. Additional examples include burn, wound, surgery, accidents, ischemia, prolonged exposure to cold temperature, stroke, intracranial hemorrhage, and cerebral hemorrhage.
  • psychiatric disorders include schizophrenia, delusional disorder, schizoaffective disorder, schizopheniform, shared psychotic disorder, psychosis, paranoid personality disorder, schizoid personality disorder, borderline personality disorder, anti-social personality disorder, narcissistic personality disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder, delirium, dementia, mood disorders, bipolar disorder, depression, stress disorder, panic disorder, agoraphobia, social phobia, post-traumatic stress disorder, anxiety disorder, and impulse control disorders.
  • ocular-related neurodegeneration examples include glaucoma, lattice dystrophy, retinitis pigmentosa, age-related macular degeneration (AMD), photoreceptor degeneration associated with wet or dry AMD, other retinal degeneration, optic nerve drusen, optic neuropathy, and optic neuritis.
  • AMD age-related macular degeneration
  • AMD photoreceptor degeneration associated with wet or dry AMD
  • optic nerve drusen optic neuropathy
  • optic neuritis examples include glaucoma, lattice dystrophy, retinitis pigmentosa, age-related macular degeneration (AMD), photoreceptor degeneration associated with wet or dry AMD, other retinal degeneration, optic nerve drusen, optic neuropathy, and optic neuritis.
  • glaucoma examples include primary glaucoma, low-tension glaucoma, primary angle-closure glaucoma, acute angle-closure glaucoma, chronic angle-closure glaucoma, intermittent angle-closure glaucoma, chronic open-angle closure glaucoma, pigmentary glaucoma, exfoliation glaucoma, developmental glaucoma, secondary glaucoma, phacogenic glaucoma, glaucoma secondary to intraocular hemorrhage, traumatic glaucoma, neovascular glaucoma, drug-induced glaucoma, toxic glaucoma, and glaucoma associated with intraocular tumors, retinal deatchments, severe chemical burns of the eye, and iris atrophy.
  • Contacting of the neuron or portion thereof with the agent can involve administering to a subject a pharmaceutical composition including the agent.
  • the administering can be carried out by, for example, intravenous infusion; injection by intravenous, intraperitoneal, intracerebral, intramuscular, intraocular, intraarterial or intralesional routes; or topical or ocular application.
  • the methods of the invention can include administering to a subject one or more additional pharmaceutical agents.
  • the neuron or portion thereof treated according to the methods of the invention is ex vivo or in vitro (e.g., a nerve graft or nerve transplant).
  • the invention also includes methods of identifying agents for use in inhibiting degeneration of a neuron or a portion thereof. These methods involve contacting a neuron or portion thereof with a candidate agent in an assay of axon or neuron degeneration (e.g., anti-nerve growth factor (NGF) antibodies, serum deprivation/KCl reduction, and/or rotenone treatment). Detection of reduced degeneration of the neuron or portion thereof in the presence of the candidate agent, relative to a control, indicates the identification of an agent for use in inhibiting degeneration of a neuron or portion thereof.
  • axon or neuron degeneration e.g., anti-nerve growth factor (NGF) antibodies, serum deprivation/KCl reduction, and/or rotenone treatment.
  • the candidate agent can be, for example, selected from the group consisting of antibodies, polypeptides, peptides, peptibodies, nucleic acid molecules, short interfering RNAs (siRNAs), polynucleotides, aptamers, small molecules, and polysaccharides.
  • siRNAs short interfering RNAs
  • the invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions and kits that contain one or more agent that can be used to inhibit degeneration of a neuron or a portion thereof, as described herein.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions and kits can include, for example, one or more agent selected from the group consisting of MG132, SB 415286, GSK3 ⁇ inhibitor I, GSK3f3 inhibitor VII, GSK3 ⁇ inhibitor VIII, GSK3 ⁇ inhibitor XII, Lithium Chloride, SB 202190, SB 239063, SB 239069, SB 203580, SB 203580 HCl, AG 556, AG 555, AG 494, PD168393, Tyrphostin B44, Tyrphostin B42 (AG 490), LY 294022, Anisomycin, Cycloheximide, Roscovitine, Forskolin, NKH 477, Actinomycin D, SP600125, Bax Channel Blocker, ZD7288, STO-609, bortezomid, disulfiram, pamapimod, gefit
  • the agent may be a DLK signaling inhibitor (e.g., a siRNA molecule targeting DLK comprising, e.g., the sequence of, desirably, GCACTGAATTGGACAACTCTT (SEQ ID NO: 1), GAGTTGTCCAATTCAGTGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 2), GGACATCGCCTCCGCTGATTT (SEQ ID NO: 3), or ATCAGCGGAGGCGATGTCCTT (SEQ ID NO: 4), or GCAAGACCCGTCACCGAAATT (SEQ ID NO: 5), TTTCGGTGACGGGTCTTGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 6), GCGGTGTCCTGGTCTACTATT (SEQ ID NO: 7), or TAGTAGACCAGGACACCGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 8); an antibody, such as, antibody 317, antibody 318, antibody 319, antibody 320, antibody 321, antibody 322, an siRNA molecule targeting the JNK1 sequence of TTGGATGA
  • a DLK signaling inhibitor e.g.
  • the administering of an agent results in at least a 10% decrease (e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease) in one or more (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10) symptoms of a disorder of the nervous system; condition of the nervous system that is secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system; injury to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma; pain; ocular-related neurodegeneration; memory loss; or psychiatric disorder.
  • a 10% decrease e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease
  • one or more e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10
  • Non-limiting examples of such symptoms include tremors, slowness of movement, ataxia, loss of balance, depression, decreased cognitive function, short-term memory loss, long-term memory loss, confusion, changes in personality, language difficulties, loss of sensory perception, sensitivity to touch, numbness in extremities, muscle weakness, muscle paralysis, muscle cramps, muscle spasms, significant changes in eating habits, excessive fear or worry, insomnia, delusions, hallucinations, fatigue, back pain, chest pain, digestive problems, headache, rapid heart rate, dizziness, blurred vision, shadows or missing areas of vision, metamorphopsia, impairment in color vision, decreased recovery of visual function after exposure to bright light, and loss in visual contrast sensitivity.
  • the administering results in at least a 10% decrease (e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease) in the likelihood of developing a disorder of the nervous system; condition of the nervous system that is secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system; injury to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma; pain; ocular-related neurodegeneration; memory loss; or psychiatric disorder, compared to a control population of subjects that are not administered said agent.
  • a 10% decrease e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease
  • a 10% decrease e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%
  • the invention also provides methods for activating degeneration of a neuron or portion thereof. These methods involve administering to a neuron or portion thereof an agent that modulates: (i) the activity of a target protein in the neuron or portion thereof, or (ii) a process in the neuron or portion thereof.
  • the target protein can be, for example, selected from the group consisting of dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase (DLK), glycogen synthase kinase 3 ⁇ (GSK3 ⁇ ), p38 mitogen-activated protein kinase (p38 MAPK), epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR), phosphoinositide 3-kinase (PI3K), cyclin-dependent kinase 5 (cdk5), adenylyl cyclase, c-Jun N-terminal kinase (JNK), BCL2-associated X protein (Bax), Ih channel, calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase (CaMKK), a G-protein, a G-protein coupled receptor, transcription factor 4 (TCF4), or ⁇ -catenin, while the process can be, for example, transcription or protein synthesis.
  • DLK dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase
  • the agent can be, for example, an activator of the target protein or process (as is the case for the targets listed above, with the exception of adenylyl cyclase).
  • the modulation of a target protein may be an increase in the activity or expression of GSK3 ⁇ , a decrease in the activity or expression of ⁇ -catenin, and/or a loss in the activity or expression of TCF4.
  • the invention also provides purified antibodies that specifically bind to the phosphorylated form of DLK (e.g., antibody 318, antibody 319, antibody 320, antibody 321, or antibody 322) and inhibitory nucleic acids (e.g., siRNA) that comprise the sequence of, desirably, GCACTGAATTGGACAACTCTT (SEQ ID NO: 1), GAGTTGTCCAATTCAGTGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 2), GGACATCGCCTC CGCTGATTT (SEQ ID NO: 3), or ATCAGCGGAGGCGATGTCCTT (SEQ ID NO: 4), or GCAAGACCCGTCACCGAAATT (SEQ ID NO: 5), TTTCGGTGACGGGTC TTGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 6), GCGGTGTCCTGGTCTACTATT (SEQ ID NO: 7), or TAGTAGACCAGGACACCGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 8) that mediate a decrease in the expression of DLK.
  • siRNA inhibitory nucleic acids
  • FIG. 1 shows that treatment of neurons for 20 hours with anti-NGF antibodies results in axon degeneration.
  • the two images in the top row show neurons visualized with Tuj1 (neuron specific ⁇ -tubulin) antibodies, with and without 20 hours of treatment with anti-NGF antibodies.
  • the two images in the bottom row show neurons visualized with actin antibodies incubated with or without (control) 50 ⁇ g/ml anti-NGF antibodies.
  • FIG. 2 shows that varicosities form in neurons cultured with anti-NGF antibodies for 1, 3, 6, 9, 12, or 16 hours.
  • FIG. 3 shows that axons cultured with anti-NGF antibodies for 16 hours lack elongated mitochondria and show accumulation of mitochondria in varicosities.
  • FIG. 4 shows that, in axons cultured with anti-NGF antibodies for 0 to 48 hours, the microtubule network is not disassembled before the actin or neurofilament networks.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates Wallerian degeneration, which takes place in axons severed from neuron cell bodies (top panel; Raff et al., Science 296(5569):868-871, 2002), and shows that there is a significant delay in axon degeneration after lesion in Wallerian Degeneration Slow (WldS) mutants, as compared to controls (bottom panel; Araki et al., Science 305(5686):1010-1013, 2004).
  • WldS Wallerian Degeneration Slow
  • FIGS. 6A-6D show that a proteasome inhibitor and a GSK inhibitor prevent axon degeneration in an anti-NGF antibody-based NGF withdrawal assay.
  • FIGS. 7A-7D show that a p38 MAPK inhibitor and an adenylyl cyclase activator prevent axon degeneration in an anti-NGF antibody-based NGF withdrawal assay.
  • FIGS. 8A-8D show that a transcription inhibitor and an EGFR kinase inhibitor prevent axon degeneration in an anti-NGF antibody-based NGF withdrawal assay.
  • FIGS. 9A-9D show that a JNK inhibitor and Bax Channel Blocker prevent axon degeneration in an anti-NGF antibody-based NGF withdrawal assay.
  • FIGS. 10A-10D show that an 111 channel blocker and a CAMKK inhibitor prevent axon degeneration in an anti-NGF antibody-based NGF withdrawal assay.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a Campenot chamber, in which somal (cell body) and axonal environments are separated.
  • FIG. 13 shows that axon degeneration is localized and proceeds without apoptosis in Campenot chamber studies in which NGF withdrawal took place in the axon-containing chamber. Degeneration is visualized by tubulin immunofluorescence.
  • FIG. 14 shows that there are no signs of degeneration in the cell body compartment in the Campenot chamber-based assay illustrated in FIG. 13 .
  • FIG. 15 shows that cell bodies (left panels), but not axons (right panels), in the presence of 30 ⁇ M SB415 (GSK inhibitor; GSKi) or 15 ⁇ M Act D (transcription inhibitor; TXNi) were protected from local degeneration.
  • SB415 GSK inhibitor; GSKi
  • Act D transcription inhibitor
  • FIG. 16 shows that axons (right panels), but not cell bodies (left panels), exposed to anti-NGF antibodies in the presence of 10 ⁇ M AG555 (EGFR inhibitor; EGFRi) or 30 ⁇ M SB239 (p38 inhibitor; p38i) were protected from local degeneration.
  • 10 ⁇ M AG555 EGFR inhibitor; EGFRi
  • 30 ⁇ M SB239 p38 inhibitor; p38i
  • FIG. 17 is a graph showing quantification of axon degeneration in Campenot chambers in which anti-NGF antibodies were added to the axonal environment in the presence or absence (DMSO) of 15 ⁇ M actinomycin D (ActD), 30 ⁇ M SB415286 (SB415), 10 ⁇ M AG555, or 30 ⁇ M SB239063 (SB239) in the axonal (Axon) or the somal environment (Cell).
  • ActD actinomycin D
  • SB415286 SB415286
  • 10 ⁇ M AG555 10 ⁇ M AG555
  • SB239063 SB239
  • FIG. 18 is a model based on data from the screens described herein.
  • FIG. 19 shows that cell bodies appear smaller when NGF is removed from the axon compartment in a Campenot chamber.
  • FIG. 20 shows that many neurons deprived of NGF in the axon compartment have increased cleavage of caspase-3 and show nuclear condensation. (Neuron health may be affected by the membrane stain DiI.)
  • FIG. 23 shows that a large number of axons with varicosities, as well as fragmented axons, were observed when the cell body inhibitors (30 ⁇ M SB415 (GSKi) and 15 ⁇ M Act D (TXNi)) were added to the cell body compartment.
  • FIG. 24 shows that there may be more functional mitochondria, but still no elongated mitochondria, in NGF-deprived neurons treated with GSK, EGFR, and p38 inhibitors.
  • FIG. 25 shows that the GSK inhibitor SB415 can delay axon degeneration after lesion.
  • FIG. 26 shows that, after global NGF withdrawal, 10 ⁇ M or 25 ⁇ M GSK inhibitor blocks axon degeneration, but does not block cell death.
  • FIG. 27 shows that EGFR expression is increased in a section of SOD1 mouse (Tg) spinal cord stained with anti-EGFR antibodies (right panel), as compared to a non-transgenic control (NTG; left panel).
  • FIG. 28 shows that EGFR is normally expressed in neurons (motor neurons) and that the level of phosphorylated EGFR (pEGFR) is increased in ALS SOD1 mouse model (SOD1-Tg) compared to a non-transgenic control (Non-Tg).
  • FIG. 29 shows that the number of axons is decreased in the ALS SOD1 mouse model (SOD1-Tg) as compared to a non-transgenic control (Non-Tg), and that the phosphorylated EGFR (pEGFR) in the ALS SOD1 model partially co-localizes with axons.
  • FIG. 30 shows that the small molecule inhibitors of JNK (5 ⁇ M SP600125), CaMKK (5 ⁇ M STO-609), EGFR (1 ⁇ M or 10 ⁇ M AG555), p38 (5 ⁇ M SB239063), and GSK (10 ⁇ M SB415286) protect cerebellar granule neurons from serum deprivation/KCl reduction.
  • FIG. 31 shows that the small molecule inhibitors of EGFR, GSK, CaMKK, JNK, and p38 protect hippocampal neurons against 10 ⁇ M rotenone.
  • FIG. 32 shows that the small molecule inhibitors of EGFR, GSK, CaMKK, JNK, and p38 protect cortical neurons against 10 ⁇ M rotenone.
  • FIG. 33 shows that ErbB receptorsare detected on axons in dorsal root ganglion neurons by immunocytochemistry using antibodies specific for EGFR (top left panel), Her2 (top right panel), Her3 (bottom left panel), and Her4 (bottom right panel).
  • FIG. 34 shows that EGFR is expressed in axons of dorsal root ganglion neurons using immunocytochemistry.
  • FIG. 35 shows that 100 ⁇ g/mL EGF does not induce axon degeneration when added to dorsal root ganglion neurons and that addition of 100 ⁇ g/mL EGF induces phosphorylation of ERK in the treated neurons.
  • FIG. 36 shows that the EGFR ectodomain (50 ⁇ g/mL) does not block axon degeneration induced by NGF withdrawal in dorsal root ganglion neurons.
  • FIG. 37 shows that 3.4 ⁇ M, 11.1 ⁇ M, 33.3 ⁇ M, and 100 ⁇ M Tarceva® (erlotinib) blocks degeneration in dorsal spinal cord explants.
  • FIG. 38 shows that dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase (DLK) acts upstream from JNK in axon degeneration.
  • DLK dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase
  • FIG. 39 shows that siRNA knockdown of DLK signaling delays local axon degeneration.
  • FIGS. 40A and 40B depict the results of experiments assessing the impact of DLK knockdown on NGF withdrawal-induced sympathetic neuron degeneration using phase contrast microscopy to visualize neurons.
  • FIG. 41 shows that knockdown of DLK expression using DLK siRNA (DLK) protects sympathetic neurons from camptothecin- and vincristine-induced apoptosis compared to neurons treated with a control siRNA (NT).
  • DLK DLK siRNA
  • FIG. 42 shows that transfection of sympathetic neurons with a plasmid encoding kinase-dead DLK (KD) protects the neurons from NGF withdrawal-induced apoptosis compared to neurons transfected with a plasmid encoding wild type DLK (DLK).
  • KD kinase-dead DLK
  • FIGS. 43A-43D show the results of experiments assessing the binding specificities of the anti-pDLK antibodies described in Example 15A.
  • FIG. 43A shows Western blot analyses of the binding of each of the anti-pDLK antibodies described herein to DLK, DLK in the presence of a dominant negative DLK, and control kinase MLK3.
  • FIG. 43B shows immunofluorescent microscopic images of the binding of anti-pDLK antibodies 318 and 319 to cultured 293T cells transformed with DLK (upper two images) or control kinase MLK3 (lower two images).
  • FIGS. 43C and 43D show Western blots using JNK and phospho-JNK antibodies.
  • FIGS. 44A and 44B show binding of anti-pDLK antibodies (antibody 318) to spinal cord sections in wild type and SOD1 mutant mice at end stage of disease ( FIG. 43A ) and at the onset of symptoms ( FIG. 44B ).
  • FIG. 44C depicts Western blot analyses of pDLK, pJNK, and pcJUN levels in human Alzheimer's disease patient cortical samples.
  • FIGS. 45A and 45B depict the results of experiments assessing the impact of DLK silencing on phosphorylation of JNK in response to NGF withdrawal stress in sympathetic neurons and dorsal root ganglion neurons; and vincristine-induced stress in cortical neurons, as described in Example 15C and Example 14B.
  • FIG. 46 shows the protective effect of JNK inhibitors on DRG explants subjected to NGF withdrawal stress, as described in Example 15C.
  • FIG. 47 depicts the results of experiments assessing the impact of silencing JNK1, JNK2, JNK3, individually, and JNK2 and JNK3 together in DRG neurons on axon degeneration observed upon NGF withdrawal stress, as described in Example 15C.
  • FIG. 48A shows the affect of DLK siRNA and control siRNA on the survival of cortical neurons.
  • FIG. 48B shows the affect of DLK siRNA and control siRNA on the survival of sympathetic neurons.
  • FIG. 49 is a set of immunomicrographs showing the ability of an inhibitor of G-coupled protein receptors (SCH 202676; 10 ⁇ M or 100 ⁇ M) to prevent NGF withdrawal-induced degeneration in DRGs.
  • SCH 202676 G-coupled protein receptors
  • FIG. 50 is a set of immunomicrographs showing the ability of SCH 202676 (0.1 ⁇ M or 1 ⁇ M) to prevent NGF withdrawal-induced degeneration in DRGs.
  • FIG. 51 is a set of immunomicrographs showing the ability of 0.01 ⁇ g/mL, 0.1 ⁇ g/mL, or 1 ⁇ g/mL pertussis toxin (an inhibitor of G-protein signaling) to prevent NGF withdrawal-induced degeneration in DRGs.
  • FIG. 52 is a set of immunomicrographs of rat hippocampal neurons showing the effect of expression of active mutant GSK (GSK3S9A), wild type TCF4, and mutant inactive TCF4 on degeneration.
  • target is used herein to refer to proteins and processes that, when modulated by agents impacting their activities, inhibit or decrease axon degeneration. Most of the targets described herein, when contacted with an agent that inhibits their activity, inhibit or decrease axon degeneration, but the targets of the present invention also include proteins and processes that, when activated, inhibit or decrease axon degeneration.
  • Exemplary targets of the invention are as follows: dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase (DLK), glycogen synthase kinase 3 ⁇ (GSK3 ⁇ ), p38 mitogen-activated protein kinase (p38 MAPK), epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR), phosphoinositide 3 kinase (PI3K), cyclin-dependent kinase 5 (Cdk5), adenylyl cyclase, c-Jun N-terminal kinase (JNK), BCL2-associated X protein (Bax), Ih channel, calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase (CaMKK), a G-protein, a G-protein coupled receptor, transcription factor 4 (TCF4), ⁇ -catenin, transcription, and protein synthesis.
  • DLK dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase
  • GSK3 ⁇ glycogen synthase kinase
  • targets include native, human sequences and homologues of these sequences from monkeys, mice, rats, and other non-human mammals, including all naturally occurring variants, such as alternatively spliced and allelic variants and isoforms, as well as soluble forms thereof.
  • Exemplary, non-limiting sequence references are also provided in Table 1. Additional sequences, including sequences of various target isoforms, variants, homologues, and fragments may also be considered as targets, according to the present invention.
  • isolated when used to describe the various proteins disclosed herein, means a protein that has been identified and separated and/or recovered from a component of its natural environment. Contaminant components of its natural environment are materials that may interfere with uses (e.g., uses in therapy or antibody production) for the protein, and may include enzymes, hormones, and other proteinaceous or non-proteinaceous solutes.
  • the protein will be purified (i) to a degree sufficient to obtain at least 15 residues of N-terminal or internal amino acid sequence by use of a spinning cup sequenator, and/or (ii) to homogeneity by SDS-PAGE under non-reducing or reducing conditions using Coomassie blue or silver stain, and/or (iii) to homogeneity by mass spectroscopic or peptide mapping techniques.
  • Isolated protein includes protein in situ within recombinant cells, as at least one component of the natural environment of the protein in question will not be present. Ordinarily, however, isolated protein will be prepared by at least one purification step.
  • Isolated target proteins as described herein (or fragments thereof) can be used to make antibodies as described herein against the target proteins.
  • an “isolated” nucleic acid molecule is a nucleic acid molecule that is identified and separated from at least one contaminant nucleic acid molecule with which it is ordinarily associated in the natural source of the nucleic acid in question.
  • An isolated nucleic acid molecule is other than in the form or setting in which it is found in nature. Isolated nucleic acid molecules therefore are distinguished from the nucleic acid molecules as they exist in natural cells.
  • an isolated nucleic acid molecule includes nucleic acid molecules contained in cells that ordinarily express such nucleic acid molecule where, for example, the nucleic acid molecule is in a chromosomal location different from that of natural cells.
  • An example of an isolated nucleic acid molecule is one lacking 5′ and/or 3′ flanking sequences with which it is contiguous in a natural setting.
  • the terms “antagonist” and “inhibitor” refer to agents capable of blocking, neutralizing, inhibiting, abrogating, reducing and/or interfering with one or more of the activities of targets and/or reducing the expression of one or more target proteins (or the expression of nucleic acids encoding one or more target proteins) as described herein. They include, for example, antibodies, polypeptides, peptides, nucleic acid molecules, short interfering RNAs (siRNAs) and other inhibitory RNAs, small molecules (e.g., small inorganic molecules), polysaccharides, polynucleotides, aptamers, and peptibodies.
  • siRNAs short interfering RNAs
  • inhibitory RNAs small molecules (e.g., small inorganic molecules), polysaccharides, polynucleotides, aptamers, and peptibodies.
  • Antagonists or inhibitors of particular targets as described herein i.e., targets other than adenylyl cyclase
  • axon degeneration e.g., by at least 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease compared to a control that is untreated with the inhibitor), as described herein.
  • An inhibitor may decrease the activity and/or expression of a target protein by at least 10% (e.g., by at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, or even 100% decrease) as compared to the expression and/or activity of the target protein that is untreated with the inhibitor.
  • a “DLK signaling inhibitor” is an agent capable of decreasing the activity (e.g., kinase activity) or the expression of a DLK protein (or a nucleic acid encoding a DLK protein) and/or deceasing the activity and/or expression of one or more proteins involved in a DLK signaling pathway (e.g., JNK1, JNK2, JNK3, cJun (e.g., cJun-63 and cJun-73), MKK4, and MKK7).
  • DLK signaling inhibitors include siRNA molecules that decrease the expression of a nucleic acid encoding DLK (e.g., desirably, a sequence of GCACTGAATTGGACAACTCTT (SEQ ID NO: 1), GAGTTGTCCAATTCAGTGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 2), GGACATCGCCTCCGCTGA TTT (SEQ ID NO: 3), or ATCAGCGGAGGCGATGTCCTT (SEQ ID NO: 4), or GCAAGACCCGTCACCGAAATT (SEQ ID NO: 5), TTTCGGTGACGGG TCTTGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 6), GCGGTGTCCTGGTCTACTATT (SEQ ID NO: 7), or TAGTAGACCAGGACACCGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 8)), JNK1 (e.g., a sequence targeting the JNK1 sequence of TTGGATGAAGCCATTAGACTA (SEQ ID NO: 9)), JNK2 (e.g., a sequence targeting the JNK2 sequence of TT
  • DLK inhibitors include antibodies that bind to a DLK protein (e.g., antibodies that recognize unphosphorylated or phosphorylated DLK, such as the 317, 318, 319, 320, 321, and 322 antibodies described herein), JNK1, JNK2, JNK3, cJun (e.g., cJun-63 and cJun-73), MKK4, and/or MKK7; inhibitors of JNK activity (e.g., SC-202673, SY-CC-401, SP600125, JNKV inhibitor, JNKVIII inhibitor, AS601245, and XG-102, as well as Catalog Nos.
  • a DLK protein e.g., antibodies that recognize unphosphorylated or phosphorylated DLK, such as the 317, 318, 319, 320, 321, and 322 antibodies described herein
  • JNK1, JNK2, JNK3, cJun e.g., cJun-63 and cJun-73
  • MKK4
  • inhibitors of MKK4 activity e.g., myricetin and the inhibitors described in WO 04/058764
  • inhibitors of MKK7 activity e.g., inhibitors described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,195,894 and WO 04/002532.
  • a DLK inhibitor may also be a dominant negative form or kinase-dead form of DLK protein (or a nucleic acid encoding a dominant negative form or a kinase-dead form of DLK protein), such as T278A DLK, S281A DLK, S152A DLK, and the leucine zipper domain of DLK.
  • GSK3 ⁇ inhibitor refers to an agent capable of decreasing the activity and/or expression of GSK3 ⁇ (or a nucleic acid encoding GSK3 ⁇ ) and/or decreasing the activity and/or the expression of one or more proteins (or a nucleic acid encoding the one or more proteins) that activate GSK3 ⁇ or the expression or activity of one or more substrates of GSK3 ⁇ .
  • GSK3 ⁇ inhibitors include SB415286, GSK3 ⁇ inhibitor I, GSK3 ⁇ inhibitor VII, GSK3 ⁇ inhibitor VIII, GSK3 ⁇ inhibitor XII, and lithium chloride.
  • G-protein inhibitor refers to an agent capable of decreasing the activity and/or expression of one or more G-proteins or G-protein coupled receptors (GPCRs) (or the expression of one or more nucleic acids encoding a G-protein or a GPCR), and/or decreasing the activity and/or expression of one or more proteins downstream of a G-protein or a GPCR.
  • GPCRs G-protein coupled receptors
  • Non-limiting examples of a G-protein inhibitor include siRNA molecules that decrease the level of expression of a nucleic acid encoding a G-protein or a GPCR, an antibody or peptibody that binds to a G-protein or GPCR, or a small molecule or peptide that inhibits the activity of a G-protein or GPCR (e.g., SCH202676 and pertussis toxin).
  • EGFR pathway inhibitor refers to an agent capable of decreasing the activity and/or expression of EGFR protein (or a nucleic acid encoding EGFR) and/or decreasing the activity and/or the expression of one or more proteins that function downstream of EGFR in the cell (e.g., p38 MAPK, CAMKK, and JNK).
  • Non-limiting examples of EGFR pathway inhibitors include inhibitors of EGFR (e.g., erlotinib, tyrphostin B44, tyrphostin B42/AG 490, AG555, AG494, and PD168393), inhibitors of p38 MAPK (e.g., SB203580, SB239063, SB202190, and SB239069), inhibitors of CAMKK (e.g., STO-609), and inhibitors of JNK (e.g., SP600125).
  • EGFR e.g., erlotinib, tyrphostin B44, tyrphostin B42/AG 490, AG555, AG494, and PD168393
  • inhibitors of p38 MAPK e.g., SB203580, SB239063, SB202190, and SB239069
  • inhibitors of CAMKK e.g., STO-609
  • JNK e.g., SP600
  • EGFR pathway inhibitors include antibodies and peptibodies that bind to EGFR, p38 MAPK, CAMKK, and/or JNK; and siRNA molecules that decrease the expression of one or more nucleic acids that encode a protein that functions downstream of EGFR in the cell (e.g., EGFR, p38 MAPK, CAMKK, and/or JNK).
  • a CAMK ⁇ inhibitor refers to an agent capable of decreasing the activity and/or expression of CAMK ⁇ protein (or a nucleic acid encoding CAMK ⁇ ) and/or decreasing the activity and/or expression of one or more proteins that function downstream of CAMK ⁇ in the cell.
  • Non-limiting examples of CAMK ⁇ inhibitors include antibodies and peptibodies that specifically bind to CAMK ⁇ , and siRNA molecules that decrease the expression of one or more nucleic acids that encode CAMK ⁇ or a protein that functions downstream of CAMK ⁇ .
  • a cdk5 inhibitor refers to an agent capable of decreasing the activity and/or expression of cdk5 protein (or a nucleic acid encoding cdk5) and/or decreasing the activity and/or expression of one or more proteins that function downstream of cdk5 in the cell.
  • Non-limiting examples of cdk5 inhibitors include antibodies and peptibodies that specifically bind to cdk5, and siRNA molecules that decrease the expression of one or more nucleic acids that encode cdk5 or a protein that functions downstream of cdk5.
  • TCF4 inhibitor refers to an agent capable of decreasing the activity and/or expression of TCF4 protein (or a nucleic acid encoding TCF4) and/or decreasing the activity and/or expression of a gene regulated by TCF4 protein.
  • TCF4 inhibitors include antibodies and peptibodies that specifically bind to TCF4 or a protein encoded by a gene regulated by TCF4, and siRNA molecules that decrease the expression of one or more nucleic acids that encode TCF4 or decrease the expression of an mRNA encoded by a gene regulated by TCF4.
  • a ⁇ -catenin inhibitor refers to an agent capable of decreasing the activity and/or expression of ⁇ -catenin protein (or a nucleic acid encoding ⁇ -catenin) and/or decreasing the activity and/or expression of a gene regulated by ⁇ -catenin protein.
  • Non-limiting examples of ⁇ -catenin inhibitors include antibodies and peptibodies that specifically bind to ⁇ -catenin or a protein encoded by a gene regulated by ⁇ -catenin, and siRNA molecules that decrease the expression of one or more nucleic acids that encode ⁇ -catenin or decrease the expression of an mRNA encoded by a gene regulated by ⁇ -catenin.
  • An additional example of an inhibitor is an “adenyl cyclase inhibitor.”
  • An adenyl cyclase inhibitor refers to an agent capable of decreasing the activity and/or expression of adenyl cyclase protein (or a nucleic acid encoding adenyl cyclase) and/or decreasing the activity and/or expression of one or more proteins that function downstream of adenyl cyclase in the cell.
  • Non-limiting examples of adenyl cyclase inhibitors include antibodies and peptibodies that specifically bind to adenyl cyclase, and siRNA molecules that decrease the expression of one or more nucleic acids that encode adenyl cyclase or a protein that functions downstream of adenyl cyclase.
  • Additional examples of adenyl cyclase inhibitors include small molecules that inhibit the activity of adenyl cyclase (e.g., forksolin and NKH 477).
  • agonist or “activator” as used herein refer to agents capable of increasing or activating one or more of the activities of targets as described herein, and include, for example, antibodies, polypeptides, peptides, nucleic acid molecules, short interfering RNAs (siRNAs) or other inhibitory RNAs, small molecules (e.g., small inorganic molecules), polysaccharides, polynucleotides, aptamers, and peptibodies.
  • Agonists or activators of adenylyl cyclase as described herein generally inhibit or decrease axon degeneration, while agonists or activators of the other particular targets described herein can be considered to activate axon degeneration.
  • antibody herein is used in the broadest sense understood in the art and specifically covers, for example, intact antibodies, monoclonal antibodies, polyclonal antibodies, monospecific antibodies, multispecific antibodies (e.g., bispecific antibodies) formed from at least two intact antibodies, antibody fragments, provided that they exhibit the desired biological activity, and intrabodies.
  • monoclonal antibody refers to an antibody obtained from a population of substantially homogeneous antibodies, i.e., the individual antibodies comprising the population are identical except for possible naturally occurring mutations that may be present in minor amounts. Monoclonal antibodies are highly specific, being directed against a single antigenic site or epitope. Furthermore, in contrast to polyclonal antibody preparations, which include different antibodies directed against different determinants (epitopes), each monoclonal antibody is directed against a single determinant on an antigen. In addition to their specificity, monoclonal antibodies are advantageous in that they may be synthesized so that they are uncontaminated by other antibodies.
  • the modifier “monoclonal” indicates the character of the antibody as being obtained from a substantially homogeneous population of antibodies, and is not to be construed as requiring production of the antibody by any particular method.
  • the monoclonal antibodies to be used in accordance with the present invention may be made by the hybridoma method first described by Kohler et al., Nature, 256:495 (1975), or may be made by recombinant DNA methods (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567).
  • the “monoclonal antibodies” may also be isolated from phage antibody libraries using, for example, the techniques described in Clackson et al., Nature 352:624-628, 1991, and Marks et al., J. Mol. Biol. 222:581-597, 1991.
  • Antibodies specifically include “chimeric” antibodies in which a portion of the heavy and/or light chain is identical with or homologous to corresponding sequences in antibodies derived from a particular species or belonging to a particular antibody class or subclass, while the remainder of the chain(s) is identical with or homologous to corresponding sequences in antibodies derived from another species or belonging to another antibody class or subclass, as well as fragments of such antibodies, provided that they exhibit the desired biological activity (U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567; and Morrison et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 81:6851-6855, 1984).
  • Chimeric antibodies of interest herein include primatized antibodies comprising variable domain antigen-binding sequences derived from a non-human primate (e.g., Old World Monkey, Ape, etc.) and human constant region sequences.
  • Antibody fragments comprise a portion of an intact antibody, such as the antigen-binding or variable region thereof.
  • antibody fragments include Fab, Fab′, F(ab′) 2 , and Fv fragments; diabodies; linear antibodies; and single-chain antibody molecules.
  • multispecific antibody is used in the broadest sense and specifically covers an antibody comprising a heavy chain variable domain (V H ) and a light chain variable domain (V L ), where the V H V L unit has polyepitopic specificity (i.e., is capable of binding to more than one different epitope on one or more biological molecules).
  • Multispecific antibodies include, but are not limited to, full length antibodies, antibodies having two or more V L and V H domains, antibody fragments such as Fab, Fv, dsFv, scFv, diabodies, bispecific diabodies and triabodies, antibody fragments that have been linked covalently or non-covalently.
  • Polyepitopic specificity refers to the ability to specifically bind to two or more different epitopes on the same or different target(s).
  • an “intact” antibody is one that comprises an antigen-binding variable region as well as a light chain constant domain (CO and heavy chain constant domains, C H 1, C H 2, and C H 3.
  • the constant domains may be native sequence constant domains (e.g., human native sequence constant domains) or amino acid sequence variants thereof.
  • the intact antibody has one or more effector functions.
  • “Humanized” forms of non-human (e.g., rodent) antibodies are chimeric antibodies that contain minimal sequence derived from non-human immunoglobulin.
  • humanized antibodies are human immunoglobulins (recipient antibody) in which residues from a hypervariable region of the recipient are replaced by residues from a hypervariable region of a non-human species (donor antibody) such as mouse, rat, rabbit, or nonhuman primate having the desired specificity and affinity.
  • donor antibody such as mouse, rat, rabbit, or nonhuman primate having the desired specificity and affinity.
  • framework region (FR) residues of the human immunoglobulin are replaced by corresponding non-human residues.
  • humanized antibodies may comprise residues that are not found in the recipient antibody or in the donor antibody. These modifications may be made to further refine antibody performance.
  • the humanized antibody will comprise substantially all of at least one, and typically two, variable domains (Fab, Fab′, F(ab′) 2 , Fabc, Fv), in which all or substantially all of the hypervariable loops correspond to those of a non-human immunoglobulin and all or substantially all of the FRs are those of a human immunoglobulin sequence.
  • the humanized antibody optionally also will comprise at least a portion of an immunoglobulin constant region (Fc), typically that of a human immunoglobulin.
  • Fc immunoglobulin constant region
  • hypervariable region when used herein refers to the regions of an antibody variable domain that are hypervariable in sequence and/or form structurally defined loops.
  • the hypervariable region comprises amino acid residues from a “complementarity determining region” or “CDR” (i.e., residues 24-34, 50-56, and 89-97 in the light chain variable domain and 31-35, 50-65, and 95-102 in the heavy chain variable domain; Kabat et al., Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest, 5th Ed.
  • variable domain residues are numbered according to Kabat et al., supra, as discussed in more detail below. “Framework” or “FR” residues are those variable domain residues other than the residues in the hypervariable regions as herein defined.
  • a “parent antibody” or “wild-type” antibody is an antibody comprising an amino acid sequence that lacks one or more amino acid sequence alterations compared to an antibody variant as herein disclosed.
  • the parent antibody generally has at least one hypervariable region that differs in amino acid sequence from the amino acid sequence of the corresponding hypervariable region of an antibody variant.
  • the parent polypeptide may comprise a native sequence (i.e., a naturally occurring) antibody (including a naturally occurring allelic variant), or an antibody with pre-existing amino acid sequence modifications (such as insertions, deletions, and/or other alterations) of a naturally occurring sequence.
  • the terms “wild type,” “WT,” “wt,” and “parent” or “parental” antibody may be used interchangeably.
  • antibody variant refers to an antibody that has an amino acid sequence that differs from the amino acid sequence of a parent antibody.
  • the antibody variant comprises a heavy chain variable domain or a light chain variable domain having an amino acid sequence that is not found in nature. Such variants necessarily have less than 100% sequence identity or similarity with the parent antibody.
  • the antibody variant will have an amino acid sequence from about 75% to less than 100% amino acid sequence identity or similarity with the amino acid sequence of either the heavy or light chain variable domain of the parent antibody, for example, about 80% to less than 100%, from about 85% to less than 100%, from about 90% to less than 100%, or from about 95% to less than 100%.
  • the antibody variant is generally one that comprises one or more amino acid alterations in or adjacent to one or more hypervariable regions thereof.
  • amino acid alteration refers to a change in the amino acid sequence of a predetermined amino acid sequence. Exemplary alterations include insertions, substitutions, and deletions.
  • amino acid substitution refers to the replacement of an existing amino acid residue in a predetermined amino acid sequence with another, different amino acid residue.
  • a “replacement” amino acid residue refers to an amino acid residue that replaces or substitutes another amino acid residue in an amino acid sequence.
  • the replacement residue may be a naturally occurring or non-naturally occurring amino acid residue.
  • amino acid insertion refers to the introduction of one or more amino acid residues into a predetermined amino acid sequence.
  • the amino acid insertion may comprise a “peptide insertion” in which case a peptide comprising two or more amino acid residues joined by peptide bond(s) is introduced into the predetermined amino acid sequence.
  • the inserted peptide may be generated by random mutagenesis such that it has an amino acid sequence that does not exist in nature.
  • an amino acid alteration “adjacent a hypervariable region” refers to the introduction or substitution of one or more amino acid residues at the N-terminal and/or C-terminal end of a hypervariable region, such that at least one of the inserted or replacement amino acid residue(s) forms a peptide bond with the N-terminal or C-terminal amino acid residue of the hypervariable region in question.
  • a “naturally occurring amino acid residue” is one encoded by the genetic code, generally selected from the group consisting of: alanine (Ala); arginine (Arg); asparagine (Asn); aspartic acid (Asp); cysteine (Cys); glutamine (Gln); glutamic acid (Glu); glycine (Gly); histidine (His); isoleucine (Ile): leucine (Leu); lysine (Lys); methionine (Met); phenylalanine (Phe); proline (Pro); serine (Ser); threonine (Thr); tryptophan (Trp); tyrosine (Tyr); and valine (Val).
  • non-naturally occurring amino acid residue is an amino acid residue other than those naturally occurring amino acid residues listed above, which is able to covalently bind adjacent amino acid residue(s) in a polypeptide chain.
  • non-naturally occurring amino acid residues include norleucine, ornithine, norvaline, homoserine, and other amino acid residue analogues such as those described in Ellman et al., Meth. Enzym. 202:301-336, 1991.
  • the procedures of Noren et al., Science 244:182, 1989, and Ellman et al., supra can be used. Briefly, these procedures involve chemically activating a suppressor tRNA with a non-naturally occurring amino acid residue followed by in vitro transcription and translation of the RNA.
  • the candidate sequence is aligned with any immunoglobulin sequence or any consensus sequence in Kabat. Alignment may be done by hand or by computer using commonly accepted computer programs, such as the Align 2 program. Alignment may be facilitated by using some amino acid residues that are common to most Fab sequences.
  • the light and heavy chains each typically have two cysteines that have the same residue numbers; in V L domain the two cysteines are typically at residue numbers 23 and 88, and in the V H domain the two cysteine residues are typically at numbers 22 and 92.
  • Framework residues generally, but not always, have approximately the same number of residues, however the CDRs will vary in size.
  • an antibody with a “high-affinity” is an antibody having a K D , or dissociation constant, in the nanomolar (nM) range or better.
  • a K D in the “nanomolar range or better” may be denoted by X nM, where X is a number less than about 10.
  • filamentous phage refers to a viral particle capable of displaying a heterogenous polypeptide on its surface and includes, without limitation, f1, fd, Pf1, and M13.
  • the filamentous phage may contain a selectable marker such as tetracycline (e.g., “fd-tet”).
  • fd-tet tetracycline
  • Various filamentous phage display systems are well known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., Zacher et al., Gene 9:127-140, 1980, Smith et al., Science 228:1315-1317, 1985; and Parmley et al., Gene 73:305-318, 1988).
  • panning is used to refer to the multiple rounds of a screening process that is used in the identification and isolation of phages carrying compounds, such as antibodies, with high affinity and specificity to a target.
  • siRNA short-interfering RNA
  • siRNAs are mediators of RNA interference, the process by which double-stranded RNA silences homologous genes.
  • siRNAs typically are comprised of two single-stranded RNAs of about 15-25 nucleotides in length that form a duplex, which may include single-stranded overhang(s). Processing of the double-stranded RNA by an enzymatic complex, for example, polymerases, results in cleavage of the double-stranded RNA to produce siRNAs.
  • RNA interference RNA interference
  • siRNAs RNA interference
  • a base pairing region is selected to avoid chance complementarity to an unrelated mRNA.
  • RNAi silencing complexes have been identified in the art, such as, for example, by Fire et al., Nature 391:806-811, 1998, and McManus et al., Nat. Rev. Genet. 3(10):737-747, 2002.
  • RNAi interfering RNA
  • disorder in general refers to any condition that would benefit from treatment with the agents or inhibitors of the present invention, including any disease or disorder that can be treated by effective amounts of inhibitors of the targets described herein (or activators, in the case of adenylyl cyclase).
  • disorders to be treated herein include those listed in section E of the present application, below.
  • treating refers to curative therapy, prophylactic therapy, and preventative therapy.
  • Consecutive treatment or administration refers to treatment on at least a daily basis without interruption in treatment by one or more days. Intermittent treatment or administration, or treatment or administration in an intermittent fashion, refers to treatment that is not consecutive, but rather cyclic in nature. Treatment according to the methods of the invention can result in complete relief or cure from a disease or condition, or partial amelioration of one or more symptoms of the disease or condition, and can be temporary or permanent.
  • preventing axon degeneration includes (i) the ability to inhibit or prevent axon or neuron degeneration in patients newly diagnosed as having a neurodegenerative disease or at risk of developing a new neurodegenerative disease and (ii) the ability to inhibit or prevent further axon or neuron degeneration in patients who are already suffering from, or have symptoms of, a neurodegenerative disease.
  • Preventing axon or neuron degeneration includes decreasing or inhibiting axon or neuron degeneration, which may be characterized by complete or partial inhibition of neuron or axon degeneration. This can be assessed, for example, by analysis of neurological function.
  • preventing neuron degeneration and “inhibiting neuron degeneration” include such inhibition with respect to the entire neuron or a portion thereof, such as the neuron cell body, axons, and dendrites.
  • the administration of one or more agent as described herein may result in at least a 10% decrease (e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, or even 100% decrease) in one or more (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9) symptoms of a disorder of the nervous system; a condition of the nervous system that is secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system; an injury to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma, pain; an ocular-related neurodegeneration; memory loss; or a psychiatric disorder (e.g., tremors, slowness of movement, ataxia, loss of balance, depression, decreased cognitive function, short-term memory loss, long-term memory loss, confusion, changes in personality, language difficulties, loss of sensory perception, sensitivity to touch, numbness in extremities, muscle weakness, muscle paralysis, muscle cramps, muscle
  • the administration of one or more agent as described herein may result in at least a 10% decrease (e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease) in the number of neurons (or neuron bodies, axons, or dendrites thereof) that degenerate in a neuron population or in a subject compared to the number of neurons (or neuron bodies, axons, or dendrites thereof) that degenerate in neuron population or in a subject that is not administered the one or more of the agents described herein.
  • a 10% decrease e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease
  • the number of neurons or neuron bodies, axons, or dendrites thereof
  • the administration of one or more agent as described herein may result in at least a 10% decrease (e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease) in the likelihood of developing a disorder of the nervous system; a condition of the nervous system that is secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system; an injury to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma, pain; an ocular-related neurodegeneration; memory loss; or a psychiatric disorder in a subject or a subject population compared to a control subject or population not treated with the one or more agent described herein.
  • a 10% decrease e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease
  • administering refers to contacting a neuron or portion thereof with an inhibitor as described herein. This includes administration of the inhibitor to a subject in which the neuron or portion thereof is present, as well as introducing the inhibitor into a medium in which a neuron or portion thereof is cultured.
  • neuron denotes nervous system cells that include a central cell body or soma, and two types of extensions or projections: dendrites, by which, in general, the majority of neuronal signals are conveyed to the cell body, and axons, by which, in general, the majority of neuronal signals are conveyed from the cell body to effector cells, such as target neurons or muscle.
  • Neurons can convey information from tissues and organs into the central nervous system (afferent or sensory neurons) and transmit signals from the central nervous systems to effector cells (efferent or motor neurons).
  • Other neurons designated interneurons, connect neurons within the central nervous system (the brain and spinal column).
  • Certain specific examples of neuron types that may be subject to treatment according to the invention include cerebellar granule neurons, dorsal root ganglion neurons, and cortical neurons.
  • mammal refers to any animal classified as a mammal, including humans, higher non-human primates, rodents, and domestic and farm animals, such as cows, horses, dogs, and cats. In one embodiment of the invention, the mammal is a human.
  • Administration “in combination with” one or more further therapeutic agents includes simultaneous (concurrent) and consecutive administration, in any order.
  • an “effective amount” is an amount sufficient to effect beneficial or desired therapeutic (including preventative) results.
  • An effective amount can be administered in one or more administrations.
  • progeny As used herein, the expressions “cell,” “cell line,” and “cell culture” are used interchangeably and all such designations include progeny. Thus, the words “transformants” and “transformed cells” include the primary subject cell and cultures derived therefrom without regard for the number of transfers. It is also understood that all progeny may not be precisely identical in DNA content, due to deliberate or inadvertent mutations. The term “progeny” refers to any and all offspring of every generation subsequent to an originally transformed cell or cell line. Mutant progeny that have the same function or biological activity as screened for in the originally transformed cell are included.
  • a “small molecule” is defined herein to have a molecular weight below about 1000 Daltons, for example, below about 500 Daltons. Small molecules may be organic or inorganic, and may be isolated from, for example, compound libraries or natural sources, or may be obtained by derivatization of known compounds.
  • “Aptamers” are nucleic acid molecules that form tertiary structures that specifically bind to a target molecule, such as the targets described herein. The generation and therapeutic use of aptamers are well established in the art (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,475,096). Aptamers used in the invention can include modified nucleotides (e.g., nucleic acid analogs or derivatives) that are stable from degradation in vivo. At a minimum, the nucleic acid molecules are designed to be sufficiently stable in vivo, for a sufficient length of time, to allow therapeutic action to take place prior to degradation and/or elimination.
  • modified nucleotides e.g., nucleic acid analogs or derivatives
  • nucleotide analogs can be selected from the group consisting of phosphorothioate, boranophosphate, methyl-phosphonate, and 2′-O-methyl analogs, and analogs thereof.
  • the analog can be 2′-deoxy-2′-fluoro-RNA (2′-F-RNA).
  • “Peptibodies” are peptide sequences linked to an amino acid sequence encoding a fragment or portion of an immunoglobulin molecule.
  • the peptide sequences may be derived from randomized sequences selected by any method for specific binding, including but not limited to, phage display technology.
  • the selected polypeptide may be linked to an amino acid sequence encoding the Fc portion of an irnmunoglobulin.
  • Peptibodies that specifically bind to and modulate the targets described herein, leading to inhibition of neuron degeneration, are also useful in the methods of the invention.
  • salt is used herein to refer to those salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, Berge et al. describe pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharm. Sci. 66:1-19, 1977.
  • the salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds of the invention or separately by reacting the free base group with a suitable organic acid.
  • Representative acid addition salts include acetate, adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphersulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, hemisulfate, heptonate, hexanoate, hydrobromide, hydrochloride, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate, pe
  • alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium and the like, as well as nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations, including, but not limited to ammonium, tetramethylammonium, tetraethylammonium, methylamine, dimethylamine, trimethylamine, triethylamine, ethylamine and the like.
  • the invention is based in part on the discovery that certain modulators of the target proteins and activities listed in Table 1 in section A, above (dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase (DLK), glycogen synthase kinase 3 ⁇ (GSK3 ⁇ ), p38 mitogen-activated protein kinase (p38 MAPK), epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR), phosphoinositide 3 kinase (PI3K), cyclin-dependent kinase 5 (Cdk5), adenylyl cyclase, c-Jun N-terminal kinase (JNK), BCL2-associated X protein (Bax), Ih channel, calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase (CaMKK), a G-protein, a G-protein coupled receptor, transcription factor 4 (TCF4), ⁇ -catenin, transcription, and protein synthesis) are effective inhibitors of neuron (such as axon) de
  • the modulators function as inhibitors of the target proteins and activities, with the exception of the modulator of adenylyl cyclase, which is an activator.
  • the inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration are referred to as “inhibitors” herein, regardless of their effects on their respective targets, as they are inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration. They are also referred to herein as “agents” that modulate the activity of a target protein or activity in the neuron or axon, leading to inhibition of neuron or axon degeneration.
  • the invention includes methods of inhibiting neuron or axon degeneration by use of inhibitors as described herein.
  • the methods can be carried out in vivo, such as in the treatment of neurological disorders or injuries to the nervous system.
  • the methods can also be carried out in vitro or ex vivo, such as in laboratory studies of neuron function and in the treatment of nerve grafts or transplants. These methods are described further below, after a description of methods for identifying and testing inhibitors used in the invention.
  • Inhibitors that can be used in the invention include those listed in Table 2 (section C, below), which have been shown in assays described herein to prevent neuron or axon degeneration, as well as additional, known inhibitors of the targets described herein (see, e.g., Table 3). Additional inhibitors for use in the invention can be identified using standard screening methods specific for each target, as summarized below. These assays can also be used to confirm the activities of derivatives of compounds found to have a desired activity, which are designed according to standard medicinal chemistry approaches.
  • an inhibitor or activator, in the case of adenylyl cyclase
  • the inhibitors can be tested in models of neuron or axon degeneration, as described herein, as well as in appropriate animal model systems.
  • Assays for confirming that an inhibitor of the targets described herein also inhibits neuron or axon degeneration, as well as for identifying additional inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration, are described in detail in the Examples, below, and are briefly summarized as follows. These assays include (i) anti-Nerve Growth Factor (anti-NGF) antibody assays, (ii) serum deprivation/potassium chloride (KCl) reduction assays, (iii) rotenone degeneration assays, and (iv) vincristine degeneration assays. Additional assays for assessing neuron or axon degeneration that are known in the art can also be used in the invention.
  • anti-NGF anti-Nerve Growth Factor
  • KCl serum deprivation/potassium chloride
  • rotenone degeneration assays rotenone degeneration assays
  • vincristine degeneration assays Additional assays for assessing neuron or axon degeneration
  • NGF is a small, secreted protein involved in differentiation and survival of target neurons. Treatment of cultured neurons with NGF results in proliferation of axons, while treating such neurons with anti-NGF antibodies results in axon degeneration. Treatment of neurons with anti-NGF antibodies also leads to several different morphological changes that are detectable by microscopy, and which can be monitored to observe the effects of candidate inhibitors. These changes, which are described further in Example 1 and illustrated in, for example, FIGS. 1-4 , include varicosity formation, loss of elongated mitochondria, accumulation of mitochondria in varicosities, cytoskeletal disassembly, and axon fragmentation. Agents that are found to counter any of the morphological changes induced by anti-NGF antibodies can be considered as candidate inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration, which may, if desired, be tested in additional systems, such as those described herein.
  • the serum deprivation/KCl reduction assay is based on the use of cultures of cerebellar granule neurons (CGN) isolated from mouse (e.g., P7 mouse) brains.
  • CGN cerebellar granule neurons
  • the neurons are cultured in a medium including KCl and then are switched to medium containing less KCl (Basal Medium Eagles including 5 mM KCl), which induces neuron degeneration.
  • Agents that are found to block or reduce neuron degeneration upon KCl withdrawal which can be detected by, for example, analysis of images of fixed neurons stained with a neuronal marker (e.g., anti-class III beta-tubulin) can be considered as candidate inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration, which may, if desired, be tested in additional systems, such as those described herein.
  • a neuronal marker e.g., anti-class III beta-tubulin
  • Another model of neuron or axon degeneration involves contact of cultured neurons with rotenone (2R,6aS,12aS)-1,2,6,6a,12,12a-hexahydro-2-isopropenyl-8,9-dimethoxychromeno[3,4-b] furo(2,3-h)chromen-6-one), which is a pesticide and insecticide that naturally occurs in the roots and stems of several plants, interferes with mitochondrial electron transport, and causes Parkinson's disease-like symptoms when injected into rats.
  • rotenone (2R,6aS,12aS)-1,2,6,6a,12,12a-hexahydro-2-isopropenyl-8,9-dimethoxychromeno[3,4-b] furo(2,3-h)chromen-6-one
  • Agents that are found to block or reduce degeneration of neurons cultured in the presence of rotenone which can be detected by, for example, analysis of images of fixed neurons stained with, e.g., an antibody against neuron specific beta III tubulin, can be considered as candidate inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration, which may, if desired, be tested in additional systems, such as those described herein.
  • An additional model of neuron or axon degeneration involves contact of cultured neurons with vincristine, an alkaloid that binds to tubulin dimers and prevents assemble of microtubule structures.
  • Agenst that are found to block or reduce degeneration of neurons cultured in the presence of vincristine, which can be detected by, for example, analysis of images of fixed neurons stained with, e.g., an antibody against neuron specific beta III tubulin, can be considered as candidate inhibitbors of neuron or axon degeneration, which may, if desired, be tested in additional systems, such as those described herein.
  • the invention also employs assays directed at detecting inhibitors of the targets listed in Table 1, for which the read-out is, for example, target binding or target activity.
  • the invention includes the use of screening assays for inhibitors of the targets listed in Table 1, which may be designed to identify compounds that bind or complex with the targets, or otherwise interfere with their activities.
  • the screening assays include assays amenable to high-throughput screening of chemical libraries, making them suitable for identifying small molecule drug candidates.
  • binding assays and activity assays are used.
  • the assays can be performed in a variety of formats, including, without limitation, kinase assays, biochemical screening assays, immunoassays, and cell-based assays, as determined to be appropriate, based on the subject target.
  • the interaction is binding, and the complex formed can be isolated or detected in the reaction mixture.
  • either the target polypeptide or the drug candidate is immobilized on a solid phase, e.g., on a microtiter plate, by covalent or non-covalent attachments.
  • Non-covalent attachment generally is accomplished by coating the solid surface with a solution of the polypeptide and drying.
  • an immobilized antibody e.g., a monoclonal antibody, specific for the target polypeptide to be immobilized can be used to anchor it to a solid surface.
  • the assay is performed by adding the non-immobilized component, which may be labeled by a detectable label, to the immobilized component, e.g., the coated surface containing the anchored component.
  • the non-reacted components are removed, e.g., by washing, and complexes anchored on the solid surface are detected.
  • the detection of label immobilized on the surface indicates that complexing occurred.
  • complexing can be detected, for example, by using a labeled antibody specifically binding the immobilized complex.
  • the interaction of the target with the respective polypeptide can be assayed by methods well known for detecting protein-protein interactions.
  • assays include traditional approaches, such as, e.g., cross-linking, co-immunoprecipitation, and co-purification through gradients or chromatographic columns.
  • protein-protein interactions can be monitored by using a yeast-based genetic system described by Fields and co-workers (Fields et al., Nature (London) 340:245-246, 1989; Chien et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.
  • yeast GAL4 consist of two physically discrete modular domains, one acting as the DNA-binding domain, and the other one functioning as the transcription-activation domain.
  • the yeast expression system described in the foregoing publications (generally referred to as the “two-hybrid system”) takes advantage of this property, and employs two hybrid proteins, one in which the target protein is fused to the DNA-binding domain of GAL4, and another, in which candidate activating proteins are fused to the activation domain.
  • GAL1-lacZ reporter gene under control of a GAL4-activated promoter depends on reconstitution of GAL4 activity via protein-protein interaction. Colonies containing interacting polypeptides are detected with a chromogenic substrate for ⁇ -galactosidase.
  • a complete kit (MATCHMAKERTM) for identifying protein-protein interactions between two specific proteins using the two-hybrid technique is commercially available from Clontech. This system can also be extended to map protein domains involved in specific protein interactions as well as to pinpoint amino acid residues that are crucial for these interactions.
  • a reaction mixture is prepared containing the target and the intra- or extracellular component under conditions and for a time allowing for the interaction of the two products.
  • a candidate compound to inhibit the interaction of the target, the reaction is run in the absence and in the presence of the test compound.
  • a placebo may be added to a third reaction mixture, to serve as a positive control.
  • Assays for measuring the impact of a candidate inhibitor on the activity of a protein kinase are known in the art, and include direct phosphorylation assays, typically interpreted via radio-labeled phosphate, phosphorylation-specific antibodies to a substrate, and cell-based assays that measure the downstream consequence of kinase activity, e.g., activation of a reporter gene. Both of these major strategies, in addition to alternative assays based on fluorescence polarization, may be used in small-scale or high-throughput format to identify, validate, or characterize an inhibitor (see, for example, Favata et al., J. Biol. Chem. 273:18623-18632, 1998; Parker et al., J.
  • screening assays specifically discussed herein are for the purpose of illustration only.
  • a variety of other assays, which can be selected depending on the particular target and type of antagonist candidates screened e.g., antibodies, polypeptides, peptides, non-peptide small organic molecules, nucleic acid molecules, etc.
  • antagonist candidates screened e.g., antibodies, polypeptides, peptides, non-peptide small organic molecules, nucleic acid molecules, etc.
  • the assays described herein may be used to screen libraries of compounds including, without limitation, chemical libraries, natural product libraries (e.g., collections of microorganisms, animals, plants, etc.), and combinatorial libraries comprised of random peptides, oligonucleotides, or small organic molecules.
  • the assays herein are used to screen antibody libraries including, without limitation, na ⁇ ve human, recombinant, synthetic, and semi-synthetic antibody libraries.
  • the antibody library can, for example, be a phage display library, including monovalent libraries, displaying on average one single-chain antibody or antibody fragment per phage particle, and multi-valent libraries, displaying, on average, two or more antibodies or antibody fragments per viral particle.
  • the antibody libraries to be screened in accordance with the present invention are not limited to phage display libraries.
  • Other display techniques include, for example, ribosome or mRNA display (Mattheakis et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 91:9022-9026, 1994; Hanes et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 94:4937-4942, 1997), microbial cell display, such as bacterial display (Georgiou et al., Nature Biotech. 15:29-34, 1997), or yeast cell display (Kieke et al., Protein Eng.
  • results obtained in the primary binding/interaction assays herein can be confirmed in in vitro and/or in vivo assays of axon degeneration.
  • in vitro and/or in vivo assays of axon degeneration may be used as primary assays to identify inhibitors and antagonists as described herein.
  • In vivo assays for use in the invention include animal models of various neurodegenerative diseases, such as animal models of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, and multiple sclerosis (e.g., experimental autoimmune encephalitis (EAE) in mice). In addition, spinal cord and traumatic brain injury models can be used.
  • ALS amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
  • AD Alzheimer's disease
  • Parkinson's disease e.g., experimental autoimmune encephalitis (EAE) in mice
  • EAE experimental autoimmune encephalitis
  • Non-limiting examples of in vivo assays that can be used in characterizing inhibitors for use in the invention are described as follows.
  • ALS amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
  • SOD1 superoxide dismutase 1
  • Animal models that simulate the pathogenic, histological, biochemical, and clinical features of Parkinson's disease, which can be used in characterizing inhibitors for use in the methods of the present invention include the reserpine (rabbit; Carlsson et al., Nature 180:1200, 1957); methamphetamine (rodent and non-human primates; Seiden et al., Drug Alcohol Depend 1:215-219, 1975); 6-OHDA (rat; Perese et al., Brain Res. 494:285-293, 1989); MPTP (mouse and non-human primates; Langston et al., Ann. Neurol. 46:598-605, 1999); paraquat/maneb (mouse; Brooks et al., Brain Res.
  • reserpine rabbit; Carlsson et al., Nature 180:1200, 1957
  • methamphetamine rodent and non-human primates; Seiden et al., Drug Alcohol Depend 1:215-219, 1975
  • mice including mice, flies, fish, and worms, have been used to study the pathogenic mechanisms behind Alzheimer's disease.
  • mice transgenic for ⁇ -amyloid develop memory impairment consistent with Alzheimer's disease (Gotz et al., Mol. Psychiatry 9:664-683, 2004).
  • Models such as these may be used in characterizing the inhibitors.
  • the compounds listed in Table 2, below were identified as inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration. These compounds, as well as other agents (see, e.g., Table 3) that inhibit (or activate, in the case of adenylyl cyclase) the targets and processes listed in Table 2, can be used in methods of inhibiting neuron or axon degeneration, according to the invention.
  • 658404 (CAS: 133550-34-2) AG 494 (Tocris Cat. No. 0619) (CAS: 133550-35-3) PD168393 (Calbiochem Cat. No. 513033) Tyrphostin B44 (+ and ⁇ isomers) (Calbiochem Cat. No. 658402) (CAS: 133550-32-0) AG 490 Tyrphostin B42 (Calbiochem. Cat. No. 658401) (CAS: 133550-30-8) PI3K LY294002 (Calbiochem. Cat. No.
  • Tyverb TM methylsulfonylethylamino)methyl]- 7(9): 1183 (2007) 2-furyl] quinazolin-4-amine Adenylyl Demeclocycline 2-(amino-hydroxy-methylidene)-7- CAS: 127-33-3 cyclase hydrochloride chloro-4-dimethylamino- Roitman et al., Human (Declomycin TM/ 6,10,11,12a-tetrahydroxy- Psychopharmacololgy: Declostatin TM/ 4,4a,5,5a,6,12a-hexahydro- Clinical and Experimental Ledermycin TM) tetracene-1,3,12-trione 13(2): 121-125 (1998) Protein Gentamicin sulfate 2-[4,6-diamino-3-[3-amino-6-(1- CAS: 1405-41-0 Synthesis (Garamycin TM) methylaminoethyl) tetrahydropyran
  • Neo-Rx TM L-idopyranosyl)- ⁇ -D- USA 95(17): 9791 (1998) ribofuranosyl]oxy ⁇ -3- hydroxycyclohexyl 2,6-diamino- 2,6-dideoxy- ⁇ -D-glucopyranoside Paromomycin (2R,3S,4R,5R,6S)-5-amino-6- CAS: 1263-89-4 sulfate [(1R,2S,3S,4R,6S)- VanLoock et al., J. (Humatin TM) 4,6-diamino-2-[(2S,3R,4R,5R)-4- Molecular Biol.
  • Antibodies identified by the binding and activity assays of the present invention can be produced by methods known in the art, including techniques of recombinant DNA technology.
  • Soluble antigens or fragments thereof, optionally conjugated to other molecules, can be used as immunogens for generating antibodies.
  • transmembrane molecules such as receptors
  • fragments of these e.g., the extracellular domain of a receptor
  • cells expressing the transmembrane molecule can be used as the immunogen.
  • Such cells can be derived from a natural source (e.g., cancer cell lines) or may be cells that have been transformed by recombinant techniques to express the transmembrane molecule.
  • Exemplary sequences of targets of the invention are referred to in Table 1, and can be used in the preparation of antigens for making antibodies for use in the invention.
  • Other antigens and forms thereof useful for preparing antibodies will be apparent to those in the art.
  • Polyclonal antibodies are typically raised in animals by multiple subcutaneous (sc) or intraperitoneal (ip) injections of the relevant antigen and an adjuvant. It may be useful to conjugate the relevant antigen to a protein that is immunogenic in the species to be immunized, e.g., keyhole limpet hemocyanin, serum albumin, bovine thyroglobulin, or soybean trypsin inhibitor using a bifunctional or derivatizing agent, for example, maleimidobenzoyl sulfosuccinimide ester (conjugation through cysteine residues), N-hydroxysuccinimide (through lysine residues), glutaraldehyde, succinic anhydride, SOCl 2 , or R 1 N ⁇ C ⁇ NR, where R and R 1 are different alkyl groups.
  • a protein that is immunogenic in the species to be immunized e.g., keyhole limpet hemocyanin, serum albumin, bovine thyrog
  • Animals are immunized against the antigen, immunogenic conjugates, or derivatives by combining, e.g., 100 ⁇ g or 5 ⁇ g of the protein or conjugate (for rabbits or mice, respectively) with 3 volumes of Freund's complete adjuvant and injecting the solution intradermally at multiple sites.
  • the animals are boosted with 1 ⁇ 5 to 1/10 of the original amount of peptide or conjugate in Freund's complete adjuvant by subcutaneous injection at multiple sites.
  • Seven to 14 days later the animals are bled and serum is assayed for antibody titer. Animals are boosted until the titer plateaus.
  • the animal can be boosted with a conjugate of the same antigen, but conjugated to a different protein and/or through a different cross-linking reagent.
  • Conjugates also can be made in recombinant cell culture as protein fusions.
  • aggregating agents such as alum are suitably used to enhance the immune response.
  • Monoclonal antibodies may be made using the hybridoma method first described by Kohler et al., Nature 256:495, 1975, or may be made by recombinant DNA methods (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567).
  • a mouse or other appropriate host animal such as a hamster or macaque monkey, is immunized as hereinabove described to elicit lymphocytes that produce or are capable of producing antibodies that will specifically bind to the protein used for immunization.
  • lymphocytes may be immunized in vitro.
  • Lymphocytes then are fused with myeloma cells using a suitable fusing agent, such as polyethylene glycol, to form a hybridoma cell (Goding, Monoclonal Antibodies: Principles and Practice, pp. 59-103, Academic Press, 1986).
  • a suitable fusing agent such as polyethylene glycol
  • the hybridoma cells thus prepared are seeded and grown in a suitable culture medium that can contain one or more substances that inhibit the growth or survival of the unfused, parental myeloma cells.
  • a suitable culture medium that can contain one or more substances that inhibit the growth or survival of the unfused, parental myeloma cells.
  • the culture medium for the hybridomas typically will include hypoxanthine, aminopterin, and thymidine (HAT medium), which substances prevent the growth of HGPRT-deficient cells.
  • Exemplary myeloma cells are those that fuse efficiently, support stable high-level production of antibody by the selected antibody-producing cells, and are sensitive to a medium such as HAT medium.
  • particular myeloma cell lines that may be considered for use are murine myeloma lines, such as those derived from MOPC-21 and MPC-11 mouse tumors available from the Salk Institute Cell Distribution Center, San Diego, Calif., USA, and SP-2 or X63-Ag8-653 cells available from the American Type Culture Collection, Manassas, Va., USA.
  • Human myeloma and mouse-human heteromyeloma cell lines also have been described for the production of human monoclonal antibodies (Kozbor, J. Immunol. 133:3001, 1984; Brodeur et al., Monoclonal Antibody Production Techniques and Applications, pp. 51-63, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, 1987).
  • Culture medium in which hybridoma cells are growing is assayed for production of monoclonal antibodies directed against the antigen.
  • the binding specificity of monoclonal antibodies produced by hybridoma cells can be determined by immunoprecipitation or by an in vitro binding assay, such as radioimmunoassay (RIA) or enzyme-linked immunoabsorbent assay (ELISA).
  • RIA radioimmunoassay
  • ELISA enzyme-linked immunoabsorbent assay
  • hybridoma cells After hybridoma cells are identified that produce antibodies of the desired specificity, affinity, and/or activity, clones may be subcloned by limiting dilution procedures and grown by standard methods (Goding, Monoclonal Antibodies: Principles and Practice, pp. 59-103, Academic Press, 1986). Suitable culture media for this purpose include, for example, D-MEM or RPMI-1640 medium.
  • the hybridoma cells may be grown in vivo as ascites tumors in an animal.
  • the monoclonal antibodies secreted by the subclones are suitably separated from the culture medium, ascites fluid, or serum by conventional immunoglobulin purification procedures such as, for example, protein A-Sepharose, hydroxylapatite chromatography, gel electrophoresis, dialysis, or affinity chromatography.
  • DNA encoding the monoclonal antibodies is readily isolated and sequenced using conventional procedures (e.g., by using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding the heavy and light chains of the monoclonal antibodies).
  • the hybridoma cells serve as a source of such DNA.
  • the DNA may be placed into expression vectors, which are then transfected into host cells such as E. coli cells, simian COS cells, Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells, or myeloma cells that do not otherwise produce immunoglobulin protein, to obtain the synthesis of monoclonal antibodies in the recombinant host cells. Recombinant production of antibodies will be described in more detail below.
  • antibodies or antibody fragments can be isolated from antibody phage libraries generated using the techniques described, for example, in McCafferty et al., Nature 348:552-554, 1990.
  • the DNA also may be modified, for example, by substituting the coding sequence for human heavy- and light-chain constant domains in place of the homologous murine sequences (U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567; Morrison et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 81:6851, 1984), or by covalently joining to the immunoglobulin coding sequence all or part of the coding sequence for a non-immunoglobulin polypeptide.
  • non-immunoglobulin polypeptides are substituted for the constant domains of an antibody, or they are substituted for the variable domains of one antigen-combining site of an antibody to create a chimeric bivalent antibody comprising one antigen-combining site having specificity for an antigen and another antigen-combining site having specificity for a different antigen.
  • a humanized antibody has one or more amino acid residues introduced into it from a source that is non-human. These non-human amino acid residues are often referred to as “import” residues, which are typically taken from an “import” variable domain. Humanization can be essentially performed following the method of Winter and co-workers (Jones et al., Nature 321:522-525, 1986; Riechmann et al., Nature 332:323-327, 1988; Verhoeyen et al., Science 239:1534-1536, 1988), by substituting rodent CDRs or CDR sequences for the corresponding sequences of a human antibody. Accordingly, such “humanized” antibodies are chimeric antibodies (U.S. Pat. No.
  • humanized antibodies are typically human antibodies in which some CDR residues and possibly some FR residues are substituted by residues from analogous sites in rodent antibodies.
  • variable domains both light and heavy
  • sequence of the variable domain of a rodent antibody is screened against the entire library of known human variable-domain sequences.
  • the human sequence that is closest to that of the rodent is then accepted as the human framework (FR) for the humanized antibody (Sims et al., J. Immunol. 151:2296, 1993; Chothia et al., J. Mol. Biol. 196:901, 1987).
  • Another method uses a particular framework derived from the consensus sequence of all human antibodies of a particular subgroup of light or heavy chains.
  • the same framework may be used for several different humanized antibodies (Carter et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 89:4285, 1992; Presta et al., J. Immnol. 151:2623, 1993).
  • humanized antibodies are prepared by a process of analysis of the parental sequences and various conceptual humanized products using three-dimensional models of the parental and humanized sequences.
  • Three-dimensional immunoglobulin models are commonly available and are familiar to those skilled in the art.
  • Computer programs are available that illustrate and display probable three-dimensional conformational structures of selected candidate immunoglobulin sequences. Inspection of these displays permits analysis of the likely role of the residues in the functioning of the candidate immunoglobulin sequence, i.e., the analysis of residues that influence the ability of the candidate immunoglobulin to bind its antigen.
  • FR residues can be selected and combined from the recipient and import sequences so that the desired antibody characteristic, such as increased affinity for the target antigen(s), is achieved.
  • the CDR residues are directly and most substantially involved in influencing antigen binding.
  • transgenic animals e.g., mice
  • transgenic animals e.g., mice
  • J H antibody heavy-chain joining region
  • Human antibodies can also be derived from phage-display libraries (Hoogenboom et al., J. Mol. Biol. 227:381, 1991; Marks et al., J. Mol. Biol. 222:581-597, 1991; Vaughan et al., Nature Biotech. 14:309, 1996). Generation of human antibodies from antibody phage display libraries is further described below.
  • antibody fragments Traditionally, these fragments were derived via proteolytic digestion of intact antibodies (see, e.g., Morimoto et al., J. Biochem. Biophys. Meth. 24:107-117, 1992 and Brennan et al., Science 229:81, 1985). However, these fragments can now be produced directly by recombinant host cells. For example, the antibody fragments can be isolated from the antibody phage libraries discussed above. Alternatively, Fab′-SH fragments can be directly recovered from E. coli and chemically coupled to form F(ab′) 2 fragments (Carter et al., Bio/Technology 10:163-167, 1992).
  • the F(ab′) 2 is formed using the leucine zipper GCN4 to promote assembly of the F(ab′) 2 molecule.
  • F(ab′) 2 fragments can be isolated directly from recombinant host cell culture. Other techniques for the production of antibody fragments will be apparent to the skilled practitioner.
  • the antibody of choice is a single chain Fv fragment (scFv) (see WO 93/16185).
  • Multispecific antibodies have binding specificities for at least two different epitopes, where the epitopes are usually from different antigens. While such molecules normally will only bind two different epitopes (i.e., bispecific antibodies, BsAbs), antibodies with additional specificities such as trispecific antibodies are encompassed by this expression when used herein.
  • bispecific antibodies are known in the art. Traditional production of full-length bispecific antibodies is based on the coexpression of two immunoglobulin heavy chain-light chain pairs, where the two chains have different specificities (Millstein et al., Nature 305:537-539, 1983). Because of the random assortment of immunoglobulin heavy and light chains, these hybridomas (quadromas) produce a potential mixture of 10 different antibody molecules, of which only one has the correct bispecific structure. Purification of the correct molecule, which is usually done by affinity chromatography steps, is rather cumbersome, and the product yields are low. Similar procedures are disclosed in WO 93/08829, and in Traunecker et al., EMBO J. 10:3655-3659, 1991.
  • antibody variable domains with the desired binding specificities are fused to immunoglobulin constant domain sequences.
  • the fusion can be with an immunoglobulin heavy chain constant domain, comprising at least part of the hinge, CH2, and CH3 regions.
  • the first heavy-chain constant region (CH1) containing the site necessary for light chain binding can be present in at least one of the fusions.
  • DNAs encoding the immunoglobulin heavy chain fusions and, if desired, the immunoglobulin light chain are inserted into separate expression vectors, and are co-transfected into a suitable host organism.
  • the bispecific antibodies are composed of a hybrid immunoglobulin heavy chain with a first binding specificity in one arm, and a hybrid immunoglobulin heavy chain-light chain pair (providing a second binding specificity) in the other arm. It was found that this asymmetric structure facilitates the separation of the desired bispecific compound from unwanted immunoglobulin chain combinations, as the presence of an immunoglobulin light chain in only one half of the bispecific molecule provides for a facile way of separation. This approach is disclosed in WO 94/04690. For further details of generating bispecific antibodies see, for example, Suresh et al., Methods Enzymol. 121:210, 1986.
  • the interface between a pair of antibody molecules can be engineered to maximize the percentage of heterodimers that are recovered from recombinant cell culture.
  • the interface may comprise at least a part of the CH3 domain of an antibody constant domain.
  • one or more small amino acid side chains from the interface of the first antibody molecule are replaced with larger side chains (e.g., tyrosine or tryptophan).
  • Compensatory “cavities” of identical or similar size to the large side chain(s) are created on the interface of the second antibody molecule by replacing large amino acid side chains with smaller ones (e.g., alanine or threonine). This provides a mechanism for increasing the yield of the heterodimer over other unwanted end-products such as homodimers.
  • Bispecific antibodies include cross-linked or “heteroconjugate” antibodies.
  • one of the antibodies in the heteroconjugate can be coupled to avidin, the other to biotin.
  • Such antibodies have, for example, been proposed to target immune system cells to unwanted cells (U.S. Pat. No. 4,676,980), and for treatment of HIV infection (WO 91/00360 and WO 92/200373).
  • Heteroconjugate antibodies may be made using any convenient cross-linking methods. Suitable cross-linking agents are well known in the art and are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,676,980, along with a number of cross-linking techniques.
  • bispecific antibodies can be prepared using chemical linkage.
  • Brennan et al., Science 229:81, 1985 describe a procedure in which intact antibodies are proteolytically cleaved to generate F(ab′) 2 fragments. These fragments are reduced in the presence of the dithiol complexing agent sodium arsenite to stabilize vicinal dithiols and prevent intermolecular disulfide formation.
  • the Fab′ fragments generated are then converted to thionitrobenzoate (TNB) derivatives.
  • One of the Fab′-TNB derivatives is then reconverted to the Fab′-thiol by reduction with mercaptoethylamine and is mixed with an equimolar amount of the other Fab′-TNB derivative to form the bispecific antibody.
  • the bispecific antibodies produced can be used as agents for the selective immobilization of enzymes.
  • Fab′-SH fragments can also be directly recovered from E. coli , and can be chemically coupled to form bispecific antibodies.
  • Shalaby et al., J. Exp. Med. 175:217-225, 1992 describe the production of a fully humanized bispecific antibody F(ab′) 2 molecule.
  • Each Fab′ fragment was separately secreted from E. coli and subjected to directed chemical coupling in vitro to form the bispecific antibody.
  • bispecific antibodies have been produced using leucine zippers (Kostelny et al., J. Immunol. 148(5):1547-1553, 1992).
  • the leucine zipper peptides from the Fos and Jun proteins were linked to the Fab′ portions of two different antibodies by gene fusion.
  • the antibody homodimers were reduced at the hinge region to form monomers and then re-oxidized to form the antibody heterodimers. This method can also be utilized for the production of antibody homodimers.
  • the “diabody” technology described by Hollinger et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.
  • the fragments comprise a heavy-chain variable domain (VH) connected to a light-chain variable domain (VL) by a linker that is too short to allow pairing between the two domains on the same chain. Accordingly, the VH and VL domains of one fragment are forced to pair with the complementary VL and VH domains of another fragment, thereby forming two antigen-binding sites.
  • VH heavy-chain variable domain
  • VL light-chain variable domain
  • Another strategy for making bispecific antibody fragments by the use of single-chain Fv (sFv) dimers has also been reported (see Gruber et al., J. Immunol. 152:5368, 1994).
  • Antibodies with more than two valencies are contemplated.
  • trispecific antibodies can be prepared (Tuft et al., J. Immunol. 147:60, 1991).
  • an antibody used in the invention may be desirable to modify an antibody used in the invention with respect to effector function, so as to enhance the effectiveness of the antibody.
  • cysteine residue(s) may be introduced in the Fc region, thereby allowing interchain disulfide bond formation in this region.
  • the homodimeric antibody thus generated may have improved internalization capability and/or increased complement-mediated cell killing and antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity (ADCC; see Caron et al., J. Exp. Med. 176:1191-1195, 1992 and Shopes, J. Immunol. 148:2918-2922, 1992).
  • Homodimeric antibodies with enhanced anti-tumor activity may also be prepared using heterobifunctional cross-linkers as described in Wolff et al., Cancer Research 53:2560-2565, 1993.
  • an antibody can be engineered which has dual Fc regions and may thereby have enhanced complement lysis and ADCC capabilities (see Stevenson et al., Anti - Cancer Drug Design 3:219-230, 1989).
  • an antibody fragment rather than an intact antibody, to increase blood brain barrier penetration, for example.
  • the salvage receptor binding epitope can constitute a region in which any one or more amino acid residues from one or two loops of an Fc domain are transferred to an analogous position of the antibody fragment.
  • three or more residues from one or two loops of the Fc domain are transferred, while in a further example, the epitope is taken from the CH2 domain of the Fc region (e.g., of an IgG) and transferred to the CH1, CH3, or V H region, or more than one such region, of the antibody.
  • the epitope is taken from the CH2 domain of the Fc region and transferred to the CL region or VL region, or both, of the antibody fragment.
  • Covalent modifications of antibodies are included within the scope of this invention. They may be made by chemical synthesis or by enzymatic or chemical cleavage of the antibody, if applicable. Other types of covalent modifications of the antibody are introduced into the molecule by reacting targeted amino acid residues of the antibody with an organic derivatizing agent that is capable of reacting with selected side chains or the N- or C-terminal residues. Examples of covalent modifications are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,534,615, which is specifically incorporated herein by reference.
  • One example of a type of covalent modification of the antibody comprises linking the antibody to one of a variety of nonproteinaceous polymers, e.g., polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, or polyoxyalkylenes, in the manner set forth in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,640,835; 4,496,689; 4,301,144; 4,670,417; 4,791,192; or 4,179,337.
  • nonproteinaceous polymers e.g., polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, or polyoxyalkylenes
  • the invention may employ a method for generating and selecting novel antibodies using a phage display approach.
  • the approach involves generation of synthetic antibody phage libraries based on single framework template, design of sufficient diversities within variable domains, display of polypeptides having the diversified variable domains, selection of candidate antibodies with high affinity to target the antigen, and isolation of the selected antibodies.
  • phage display methods can be found, for example, WO 03/102157, the entire disclosure of which is expressly incorporated herein by reference.
  • the antibody libraries used in the invention can be generated by mutating the solvent accessible and/or highly diverse positions in at least one CDR of an antibody variable domain. Some or all of the CDRs can be mutated using the methods provided herein.
  • diverse antibody libraries can be generated by mutating positions in CDRH1, CDRH2, and CDRH3 to form a single library, or by mutating positions in CDRL3 and CDRH3 to form a single library, or by mutating positions in CDRL3 and CDRH1, CDRH2, and CDRH3 to form a single library.
  • a library of antibody variable domains can be generated, for example, having mutations in the solvent accessible and/or highly diverse positions of CDRH1, CDRH2, and CDRH3.
  • Another library can be generated having mutations in CDRL1, CDRL2, and CDRL3.
  • These libraries can also be used in conjunction with each other to generate binders of desired affinities. For example, after one or more rounds of selection of heavy chain libraries for binding to a target antigen, a light chain library can be replaced into the population of heavy chain binders for further rounds of selection to increase the affinity of the binders.
  • a library can be created by substitution of original amino acids with variant amino acids in the CDRH3 region of the variable region of the heavy chain sequence.
  • the resulting library can contain a plurality of antibody sequences, in which the sequence diversity is primarily in the CDRH3 region of the heavy chain sequence.
  • the library is created in the context of the humanized antibody 4D5 sequence, or the sequence of the framework amino acids of the humanized antibody 4D5 sequence.
  • the library can be created by substitution of at least residues 95-100a of the heavy chain with amino acids encoded by the DVK codon set, wherein the DVK codon set is used to encode a set of variant amino acids for every one of these positions.
  • An example of an oligonucleotide set that is useful for creating these substitutions comprises the sequence (DVK) 7 .
  • a library is created by substitution of residues 95-100a with amino acids encoded by both DVK and NNK codon sets.
  • an oligonucleotide set that is useful for creating these substitutions comprises the sequence (DVK) 6 (NNK).
  • a library is created by substitution of at least residues 95-100a with amino acids encoded by both DVK and NNK codon sets.
  • An example of an oligonucleotide set that is useful for creating these substitutions comprises the sequence (DVK) 5 (NNK).
  • Another example of an oligonucleotide set that is useful for creating these substitutions comprises the sequence (NNK) 6 .
  • suitable oligonucleotide sequences can be determined by one skilled in the art according to the criteria described herein.
  • CDRH3 designs are utilized to isolate high affinity binders and to isolate binders for a variety of epitopes.
  • the range of lengths of CDRH3 generated in this library is 11 to 13 amino acids, although lengths different from this can also be generated.
  • H3 diversity can be expanded by using NNK, DVK, and NVK codon sets, as well as more limited diversity at N and/or C-terminal.
  • CDRH1 and CDRH2 Diversity can also be generated in CDRH1 and CDRH2.
  • the designs of CDR-H1 and H2 diversities follow the strategy of targeting to mimic natural antibodies repertoire as described with modification that focus the diversity more closely matched to the natural diversity than previous design.
  • multiple libraries can be constructed separately with different lengths of H3 and then combined to select for binders to target antigens.
  • the multiple libraries can be pooled and sorted using solid support selection and solution-sorting methods as described previously and herein below. Multiple sorting strategies may be employed. For example, one variation involves sorting on target bound to a solid, followed by sorting for a tag that may be present on the fusion polypeptide (e.g., anti-gD tag) and followed by another sort on target bound to solid.
  • the libraries can be sorted first on target bound to a solid surface, the eluted binders are then sorted using solution phase binding with decreasing concentrations of target antigen. Utilizing combinations of different sorting methods provides for minimization of selection of only highly expressed sequences and provides for selection of a number of different high affinity clones.
  • High affinity binders for the target antigen can be isolated from the libraries. Limiting diversity in the H1/H2 region decreases degeneracy about 10 4 to 10 5 fold and allowing more H3 diversity provides for more high affinity binders. Utilizing libraries with different types of diversity in CDRH3 (e.g., utilizing DVK or NVT) provides for isolation of binders that may bind to different epitopes of a target antigen.
  • CDRL1 amino acid position 28 is encoded by RDT; amino acid position 29 is encoded by RKT; amino acid position 30 is encoded by RVW; amino acid position 31 is encoded by ANW; amino acid position 32 is encoded by THT; optionally, amino acid position 33 is encoded by CTG; in CDRL2: amino acid position 50 is encoded by KBG; amino acid position 53 is encoded by AVC; and optionally, amino acid position 55 is encoded by GMA; in CDRL3: amino acid position 91 is encoded by TMT or SRT or both; amino acid position 92 is encoded by DMC; amino acid position 93 is encoded by RVT; amino acid position 94 is encoded by NHT; and amino acid position 96 is encoded by TWT or YKG or both.
  • a library or libraries with diversity in CDRH1, CDRH2, and CDRH3 regions is generated.
  • diversity in CDRH3 is generated using a variety of lengths of H3 regions and using primarily codon sets XYZ and NNK or NNS.
  • Libraries can be formed using individual oligonucleotides and pooled or oligonucleotides can be pooled to form a subset of libraries.
  • the libraries of this embodiment can be sorted against target bound to solid. Clones isolated from multiple sorts can be screened for specificity and affinity using ELISA assays. For specificity, the clones can be screened against the desired target antigens as well as other nontarget antigens.
  • binders to the target antigen can then be screened for affinity in solution binding competition ELISA assay or spot competition assay.
  • High affinity binders can be isolated from the library utilizing XYZ codon sets prepared as described above. These binders can be readily produced as antibodies or antigen binding fragments in high yield in cell culture.
  • High affinity binders isolated from the libraries of these embodiments are readily produced in bacterial and eukaryotic cell culture in high yield.
  • the vectors can be designed to readily remove sequences such as gD tags, viral coat protein component sequence, and/or to add in constant region sequences to provide for production of full length antibodies or antigen binding fragments in high yield.
  • a library with mutations in CDRH3 can be combined with a library containing variant versions of other CDRs, for example CDRL1, CDRL2, CDRL3, CDRH1, and/or CDRH2.
  • a CDRH3 library is combined with a CDRL3 library created in the context of the humanized 4D5 antibody sequence with variant amino acids at positions 28, 29, 30, 31, and/or 32 using predetermined codon sets.
  • a library with mutations to the CDRH3 can be combined with a library comprising variant CDRH1 and/or CDRH2 heavy chain variable domains.
  • the CDRH1 library is created with the humanized antibody 4D5 sequence with variant amino acids at positions 28, 30, 31, 32, and 33.
  • a CDRH2 library may be created with the sequence of humanized antibody 4D5 with variant amino acids at positions 50, 52, 53, 54, 56, and 58 using the predetermined codon sets.
  • the antibodies generated from phage libraries can be further modified to generate antibody mutants with improved physical, chemical, and/or biological properties over the parent antibody.
  • the assay used is a biological activity assay
  • the antibody mutant can have a biological activity in the assay of choice that is at least about 10 fold better, at least about 20 fold better, at least about 50 fold better, and sometimes at least about 100 fold or 200 fold better, than the biological activity of the parent antibody in that assay.
  • an anti-target antibody mutant may have a binding affinity for the target that is at least about 10 fold stronger, at least about 20 fold stronger, at least about 50 fold stronger, and sometimes at least about 100 fold or 200 fold stronger, than the binding affinity of the parent antibody.
  • one or more amino acid alterations are introduced in one or more of the hypervariable regions of the parent antibody.
  • one or more alterations e.g., substitutions
  • framework region residues may be introduced in the parent antibody where these result in an improvement in the binding affinity of the antibody mutant for the antigen from the second mammalian species.
  • framework region residues to modify include those that non-covalently bind antigen directly (Amit et al., Science 233:747-753, 1986); interact with/affect the conformation of a CDR (Chothia et al., J. Mol. Biol.
  • modification of one or more of such framework region residues results in an enhancement of the binding affinity of the antibody for the antigen from the second mammalian species. For example, from about one to about five framework residues may be altered in this embodiment of the invention. Sometimes, this may be sufficient to yield an antibody mutant suitable for use in preclinical trials, even where none of the hypervariable region residues have been altered. Normally, however, the antibody mutant will comprise additional hypervariable region alteration(s).
  • hypervariable region residues that are altered may be changed randomly, especially where the starting binding affinity of the parent antibody is such that such randomly produced antibody mutants can be readily screened.
  • hypervariable region residue(s) are replaced by alanine or polyalanine residue(s) to affect the interaction of the amino acids with the antigen from the second mammalian species.
  • Those hypervariable region residue(s) demonstrating functional sensitivity to the substitutions then are refined by introducing further or other mutations at or for the sites of substitution.
  • the site for introducing an amino acid sequence variation is predetermined, the nature of the mutation per se need not be predetermined.
  • the ala-mutants produced this way are screened for their biological activity as described herein.
  • hydrophobic norleucine, met, ala, val, leu, ile
  • Non-conservative substitutions will entail exchanging a member of one of these classes for another class.
  • the sites selected for modification are affinity matured using phage display (see above).
  • Nucleic acid molecules encoding amino acid sequence mutants are prepared by a variety of methods known in the art. These methods include, but are not limited to, oligonucleotide-mediated (or site-directed) mutagenesis (see, e.g., Kunkel, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:488 (1985)), PCR mutagenesis, and cassette mutagenesis of an earlier prepared mutant or a non-mutant version of the parent antibody.
  • the antibody mutant will only have a single hypervariable region residue substituted. In other embodiments, two or more of the hypervariable region residues of the parent antibody will have been substituted, e.g., from about two to about ten hypervariable region substitutions.
  • the antibody mutant with improved biological properties will have an amino acid sequence having at least 75% amino acid sequence identity or similarity with the amino acid sequence of either the heavy or light chain variable domain of the parent antibody, for example, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95% sequence identity or similarity.
  • Identity or similarity with respect to this sequence is defined herein as the percentage of amino acid residues in the candidate sequence that are identical (i.e., same residue) or similar (i.e., amino acid residue from the same group based on common side-chain properties, see above) with the parent antibody residues, after aligning the sequences and introducing gaps, if necessary, to achieve the maximum percent sequence identity. None of N-terminal, C-terminal, or internal extensions, deletions, or insertions into the antibody sequence outside of the variable domain shall be construed as affecting sequence identity or similarity.
  • the biological activity of that molecule relative to the parent antibody is determined. As noted above, this may involve determining the binding affinity and/or other biological activities of the antibody.
  • a panel of antibody mutants is prepared and screened for binding affinity for the antigen or a fragment thereof.
  • One or more of the antibody mutants selected from this initial screen are optionally subjected to one or more further biological activity assays to confirm that the antibody mutant(s) with enhanced binding affinity are indeed useful, e.g., for preclinical studies.
  • the antibody mutant(s) so selected may be subjected to further modifications, oftentimes depending on the intended use of the antibody. Such modifications may involve further alteration of the amino acid sequence, fusion to heterologous polypeptide(s) and/or covalent modifications such as those elaborated below. With respect to amino acid sequence alterations, exemplary modifications are elaborated above. For example, any cysteine residue not involved in maintaining the proper conformation of the antibody mutant also may be substituted, generally with serine, to improve the oxidative stability of the molecule and prevent aberrant cross linking. Conversely, cysteine bond(s) may be added to the antibody to improve its stability (particularly where the antibody is an antibody fragment such as an Fv fragment). Another type of amino acid mutant has an altered glycosylation pattern.
  • glycosylation sites may be achieved by deleting one or more carbohydrate moieties found in the antibody, and/or adding one or more glycosylation sites that are not present in the antibody.
  • Glycosylation of antibodies is typically either N-linked or O-linked.
  • N-linked refers to the attachment of the carbohydrate moiety to the side chain of an asparagine residue.
  • the tripeptide sequences asparagine-X-serine and asparagine-X-threonine, where X is any amino acid except proline, are the recognition sequences for enzymatic attachment of the carbohydrate moiety to the asparagine side chain.
  • the presence of either of these tripeptide sequences in a polypeptide creates a potential glycosylation site.
  • O-linked glycosylation refers to the attachment of one of the sugars N-aceylgalactosamine, galactose, or xylose to a hydroxyamino acid, most commonly serine or threonine, although 5-hydroxyproline or 5-hydroxylysine may also be used.
  • Addition of glycosylation sites to the antibody is conveniently accomplished by altering the amino acid sequence such that it contains one or more of the above-described tripeptide sequences (for N-linked glycosylation sites). The alteration may also be made by the addition of, or substitution by, one or more serine or threonine residues to the sequence of the original antibody (for 0-linked glycosylation sites).
  • a nucleic acid encoding the antibody is isolated and inserted into a replicable vector for further cloning (amplification of the DNA) or for expression.
  • DNA encoding the monoclonal antibody is readily isolated and sequenced using conventional procedures (e.g., by using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding the heavy and light chains of the antibody).
  • Many vectors are available.
  • the vector components generally include, but are not limited to, one or more of the following: a signal sequence, an origin of replication, one or more marker genes, an enhancer element, a promoter, and a transcription termination sequence (e.g., as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,534,615, which is specifically incorporated herein by reference).
  • Suitable host cells for cloning or expressing the DNA in the vectors herein are the prokaryote, yeast, or higher eukaryote cells described above.
  • Suitable prokaryotes for this purpose include eubacteria, such as Gram-negative or Gram-positive organisms, for example, Enterobacteriaceae such as Escherichia , e.g., E. coli, Enterobacter, Erwinia, Klebsiella, Proteus, Salmonella , e.g., Salmonella typhimurium, Serrafia , e.g., Serratia marcescans , and Shigella , as well as Bacilli such as B. subtilis and B.
  • Enterobacteriaceae such as Escherichia , e.g., E. coli, Enterobacter, Erwinia, Klebsiella, Proteus
  • Salmonella e.g., Salmonella typhimurium
  • E. coli cloning host is E. coli 294 (ATCC 31,446), although other strains such as E. coli B, E. coli X 1776 (ATCC 31,537), and E. coli W3110 (ATCC 27,325) are suitable. These examples are illustrative rather than limiting.
  • eukaryotic microbes such as filamentous fungi or yeast are suitable cloning or expression hosts for antibody-encoding vectors.
  • Saccharomyces cerevisiae or common baker's yeast, is the most commonly used among lower eukaryotic host microorganisms.
  • a number of other genera, species, and strains are commonly available and useful herein, such as Schizosaccharomyces pombe; Kluyveromyces hosts such as, e.g., K. lactis, K. fragilis (ATCC 12,424), K. bulgaricus (ATCC 16,045), K. wickeramii (ATCC 24,178), K.
  • waltii ATCC 56,500
  • K. drosophilarum ATCC 36,906
  • K. thermotolerans K. marxianus
  • yarrowia EP 402,226
  • Pichia pastoris EP 183,070
  • Candida Trichoderma reesia
  • Neurospora crassa Schwanniomyces such as Schwanniomyces occidentalis
  • filamentous fungi such as, e.g., Neurospora, Penicillium, Tolypocladium , and Aspergillus hosts such as A. nidulans and A. niger.
  • Suitable host cells for the expression of glycosylated antibody are derived from multicellular organisms.
  • invertebrate cells include plant and insect cells.
  • Numerous baculoviral strains and variants and corresponding permissive insect host cells from hosts such as Spodoptera frugiperda (caterpillar), Aedes aegypti (mosquito), Aedes albopictus (mosquito), Drosophila melanogaster (fruitfly), and Bombyx mori have been identified.
  • a variety of viral strains for transfection are publicly available, e.g., the L-1 variant of Autographa californica NPV and the Bm-5 strain of Bombyx mori NPV, and such viruses may be used as the virus herein according to the present invention, particularly for transfection of Spodoptera frugiperda cells.
  • Plant cell cultures of cotton, corn, potato, soybean, petunia, tomato, and tobacco can also be utilized as hosts.
  • vertebrate cells have been greatest in vertebrate cells, and propagation of vertebrate cells in culture (tissue culture) has become a routine procedure.
  • useful mammalian host cell lines are monkey kidney CV1 line transformed by SV40 (COS-7, ATCC CRL 1651); human embryonic kidney line (293 or 293 cells subloned for growth in suspension culture, Graham et al., J. Gen. Virol. 36:59 (1977)); baby hamster kidney cells (BHK, ATCC CCL 10); Chinese hamster ovary cells/ ⁇ DHFR (CHO, Urlaub et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 77:4216, 1980); mouse sertoli cells (TM4, Mather, Biol. Reprod.
  • monkey kidney cells (CV1 ATCC CCL 70); African green monkey kidney cells (VERO-76, ATCC CRL-1587); human cervical carcinoma cells (HELA, ATCC CCL 2); canine kidney cells (MDCK, ATCC CCL 34); buffalo rat liver cells (BRL 3A, ATCC CRL 1442); human lung cells (W138, ATCC CCL 75); human liver cells (Hep G2, HB 8065); mouse mammary tumor (MMT 060562, ATCC CCL51); TRI cells (Mather et al., Annals N.Y. Acad. Sci. 383:44-68, 1982); MRC 5 cells; FS4 cells; and a human hepatoma line (Hep G2).
  • Host cells are transformed with the above-described expression or cloning vectors for antibody production and cultured in conventional nutrient media modified as appropriate for inducing promoters, selecting transformants, or amplifying the genes encoding the desired sequences.
  • the host cells used to produce antibodies for use in the invention may be cultured in a variety of media.
  • Commercially available media such as Ham's F10 (Sigma), Minimal Essential Medium (MEM, Sigma), RPMI-1640 (Sigma), and Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium (DMEM, Sigma) are suitable for culturing the host cells.
  • any of these media may be supplemented as necessary with hormones and/or other growth factors (such as insulin, transferrin, or epidermal growth factor), salts (such as sodium chloride, calcium, magnesium, and phosphate), buffers (such as HEPES), nucleotides (such as adenosine and thymidine), antibiotics (such as GENTAMYCINTM), trace elements (defined as inorganic compounds usually present at final concentrations in the micromolar range), and glucose or an equivalent energy source. Any other necessary supplements may also be included at appropriate concentrations that would be known to those skilled in the art.
  • the culture conditions such as temperature, pH, and the like, are those previously used with the host cell selected for expression, and will be apparent to the ordinarily skilled artisan.
  • the antibody can be produced intracellularly, in the periplasmic space, or directly secreted into the medium. If the antibody is produced intracellularly, as a first step, the particulate debris, either host cells or lysed cells, is removed, for example, by centrifugation or ultrafiltration. Where the antibody is secreted into the medium, supernatants from such expression systems are generally first concentrated using a commercially available protein concentration filter, for example, an Amicon or Millipore Pellicon ultrafiltration unit. A protease inhibitor such as PMSF may be included in any of the foregoing steps to inhibit proteolysis and antibiotics may be included to prevent the growth of adventitious contaminants.
  • a protease inhibitor such as PMSF may be included in any of the foregoing steps to inhibit proteolysis and antibiotics may be included to prevent the growth of adventitious contaminants.
  • the antibody composition prepared from the cells can be purified using, for example, hydroxylapatite chromatography, gel electrophoresis, dialysis, and affinity chromatography.
  • the suitability of protein A as an affinity ligand depends on the species and isotype of any immunoglobulin Fc domain that is present in the antibody.
  • Protein A can be used to purify antibodies that are based on human ⁇ 1, ⁇ 2, or ⁇ 4 heavy chains (Lindmark et al., J. Immunol. Meth. 62:1-13, 1983). Protein G is recommended for all mouse isotypes and for human ⁇ 3 (Guss et al., EMBO J. 5:1567-1575, 1986).
  • the matrix to which the affinity ligand is attached is most often agarose, but other matrices are available. Mechanically stable matrices such as controlled pore glass or poly(styrenedivinyl)benzene allow for faster flow rates and shorter processing times than can be achieved with agarose. Where the antibody comprises a CH3 domain, the Bakerbond ABXTM resin (J. T. Baker, Phillipsburg, N.J.) is useful for purification.
  • Inhibitors of the targets described herein can be used in methods for inhibiting neuron or axon degeneration.
  • the inhibitors are, therefore, useful in the therapy of, for example, (i) disorders of the nervous system (e.g., neurodegenerative diseases), (ii) conditions of the nervous system that are secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system, (iii) injuries to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma, (iv) pain, (v) ocular-related neurodegeneration, (vi) memory loss, and (vii) psychiatric disorders.
  • disorders of the nervous system e.g., neurodegenerative diseases
  • conditions of the nervous system that are secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system e.g., a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system
  • injuries to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma e.g., pain, (v) ocular-related neuro
  • neurodegenerative diseases and conditions that can be prevented or treated according to the invention include amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), trigeminal neuralgia, glossopharyngeal neuralgia, Bell's Palsy, myasthenia gravis, muscular dystrophy, progressive muscular atrophy, primary lateral sclerosis (PLS), pseudobulbar palsy, progressive bulbar palsy, spinal muscular atrophy, progressive bulbar palsy, inherited muscular atrophy, invertebrate disk syndromes (e.g., herniated, ruptured, and prolapsed disk syndromes), cervical spondylosis, plexus disorders, thoracic outlet destruction syndromes, peripheral neuropathies, prophyria, mild cognitive impairment, Alzheimer's disease, Huntington's disease, Parkinson's disease, Parkinson's-plus diseases (e.g., multiple system atrophy, progressive supranuclear palsy, and corticobasal degeneration), dementia with Lewy bodies, frontotemporal dementia, demyelina,
  • the methods of the invention can also be used in the prevention and treatment of ocular-related neurodegeneration and related diseases and conditions, such as glaucoma, lattice dystrophy, retinitis pigmentosa, age-related macular degeneration (AMD), photoreceptor degeneration associated with wet or dry AMD, other retinal degeneration, optic nerve drusen, optic neuropathy, and optic neuritis.
  • ocular-related neurodegeneration and related diseases and conditions such as glaucoma, lattice dystrophy, retinitis pigmentosa, age-related macular degeneration (AMD), photoreceptor degeneration associated with wet or dry AMD, other retinal degeneration, optic nerve drusen, optic neuropathy, and optic neuritis.
  • Non-limiting examples of different types of glaucoma that can be prevented or treated according to the invention include primary glaucoma (also known as primary open-angle glaucoma, chronic open-angle glaucoma, chronic simple glaucoma, and glaucoma simplex), low-tension glaucoma, primary angle-closure glaucoma (also known as primary closed-angle glaucoma, narrow-angle glaucoma, pupil-block glaucoma, and acute congestive glaucoma), acute angle-closure glaucoma, chronic angle-closure glaucoma, intermittent angle-closure glaucoma, chronic open-angle closure glaucoma, pigmentary glaucoma, exfoliation glaucoma (also known as pseudoexfoliative glaucoma or glaucoma capsulare), developmental glaucoma (e.g., primary congenital glaucoma and infantile glaucoma), secondary glaucoma (e
  • Examples of types of pain that can be treated according to the methods of the invention include those associated with the following conditions: chronic pain, fibromyalgia, spinal pain, carpel tunnel syndrome, pain from cancer, arthritis, sciatica, headaches, pain from surgery, muscle spasms, back pain, visceral pain, pain from injury, dental pain, neuralgia, such as neuogenic or neuropathic pain, nerve inflammation or damage, shingles, herniated disc, torn ligament, and diabetes.
  • Certain diseases and conditions having primary effects outside of the nervous system can lead to damage to the nervous system, which can be treated according to the methods of the present invention.
  • Examples of such conditions include peripheral neuropathy and neuralgia caused by, for example, diabetes, cancer, AIDS, hepatitis, kidney dysfunction, Colorado tick fever, diphtheria, HIV infection, leprosy, lyme disease, polyarteritis nodosa, rheumatoid arthritis, sarcoidosis, Sjogren syndrome, syphilis, systemic lupus erythematosus, and amyloidosis.
  • the methods of the invention can be used in the treatment of nerve damage, such as peripheral neuropathy, which is caused by exposure to toxic compounds, including heavy metals (e.g., lead, arsenic, and mercury) and industrial solvents, as well as drugs including chemotherapeutic agents (e.g., vincristine and cisplatin), dapsone, HIV medications (e.g., Zidovudine, Didanosine, Stavudine, Zalcitabine, Ritonavir, and Amprenavir), cholesterol lowering drugs (e.g., Lovastatin, Indapamid, and Gemfibrozil), heart or blood pressure medications (e.g., Amiodarone, Hydralazine, Perhexiline), and Metronidazole.
  • chemotherapeutic agents e.g., vincristine and cisplatin
  • dapsone e.g., HIV medications (e.g., Zidovudine, Didanosine, Stavudin
  • the methods of the invention can also be used to treat injury to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma.
  • the methods can be used in the treatment of peripheral nerve damage caused by physical injury (associated with, e.g., burns, wounds, surgery, and accidents), ischemia, prolonged exposure to cold temperature (e.g., frost-bite), as well as damage to the central nervous system due to, e.g., stroke or intracranial hemorrhage (such as cerebral hemorrhage).
  • the methods of the invention can be used in the prevention or treatment of memory loss such as, for example, age-related memory loss.
  • Types of memory that can be affected by loss, and thus treated according to the invention include episodic memory, semantic memory, short-term memory, and long-term memory.
  • Examples of diseases and conditions associated with memory loss, which can be treated according to the present invention include mild cognitive impairment, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, chemotherapy, stress, stroke, and traumatic brain injury (e.g., concussion).
  • the methods of the invention can also be used in the treatment of psychiatric disorders including, for example, schizophrenia, delusional disorder, schizoaffective disorder, schizopheniform, shared psychotic disorder, psychosis, paranoid personality disorder, schizoid personality disorder, borderline personality disorder, anti-social personality disorder, narcissistic personality disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder, delirium, dementia, mood disorders, bipolar disorder, depression, stress disorder, panic disorder, agoraphobia, social phobia, post-traumatic stress disorder, anxiety disorder, and impulse control disorders (e.g., kleptomania, pathological gambling, pyromania, and trichotillomania).
  • psychiatric disorders including, for example, schizophrenia, delusional disorder, schizoaffective disorder, schizopheniform, shared psychotic disorder, psychosis, paranoid personality disorder, schizoid personality disorder, borderline personality disorder, anti-social personality disorder, narcissistic personality disorder, obses
  • the methods of the invention can be used to treat nerves ex vivo, which may be helpful in the context of nerve grafts or nerve transplants.
  • the inhibitors described herein can be useful as components of culture media for use in culturing nerve cells in vitro.
  • Therapeutic formulations of the inhibitors described herein are prepared for storage by mixing the inhibitor (such as small molecule or an antibody) having the desired degree of purity with optional physiologically acceptable carriers, excipients, or stabilizers (see, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (18 th edition), ed. A. Gennaro, 1990, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa.), in the form of lyophilized cake or aqueous solutions.
  • the inhibitor such as small molecule or an antibody having the desired degree of purity
  • optional physiologically acceptable carriers, excipients, or stabilizers see, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (18 th edition), ed. A. Gennaro, 1990, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa.
  • Acceptable carriers, excipients, or stabilizers are nontoxic to recipients at the dosages and concentrations employed, and can include buffers such as phosphate, citrate, and other organic acids; antioxidants including ascorbic acid, BHA, and BHT; low molecular weight (less than about 10 residues) polypeptides; proteins, such as serum albumin, gelatin or immunoglobulins; hydrophilic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone, amino acids such as glycine, glutamine, asparagine, arginine, or lysine; monosaccharides, disaccharides, and other carbohydrates including glucose, mannose, or dextrins; chelating agents such as EDTA; sugar alcohols such as mannitol or sorbitol; salt-forming counter-ions such as sodium; and/or nonionic surfactants such as Tween, Pluronics, or PEG.
  • buffers such as phosphate, citrate, and other organic acids
  • antioxidants including ascorbic
  • Inhibitors to be used for in vivo administration must be sterile, which can be achieved by filtration through sterile filtration membranes, prior to or following lyophilization and reconstitution.
  • Therapeutic compositions may be placed into a container having a sterile access port, for example, an intravenous solution bag or vial having a stopper pierceable by a hypodermic injection needle.
  • inhibitors can be optionally combined with or administered in concert with each other or other agents known to be useful in the treatment of the relevant disease or condition.
  • inhibitors can be administered in combination with Riluzole (Rilutek), minocycline, insulin-like growth factor 1 (IGF-1), and/or methylcobalamin.
  • inhibitors in the treatment of Parkinson's disease, can be administered with L-dopa, dopamine agonists (e.g., bromocriptine, pergolide, pramipexole, ropinirole, cabergoline, apomorphine, and lisuride), dopa decarboxylase inhibitors (e.g., levodopa, benserazide, and carbidopa), and/or MAO-B inhibitors (e.g., selegiline and rasagiline).
  • dopamine agonists e.g., bromocriptine, pergolide, pramipexole, ropinirole, cabergoline, apomorphine, and lisuride
  • dopa decarboxylase inhibitors e.g., levodopa, benserazide, and carbidopa
  • MAO-B inhibitors e.g., selegiline and rasagiline
  • inhibitors in the treatment of Alzheimer's disease, can be administered with acetylcholinesterase inhibitors (e.g., donepezil, galantamine, and rivastigmine) and/or NMDA receptor antagonists (e.g., memantine).
  • acetylcholinesterase inhibitors e.g., donepezil, galantamine, and rivastigmine
  • NMDA receptor antagonists e.g., memantine
  • the combination therapies can involve concurrent or sequential administration, by the same or different routes, as determined to be appropriate by those of skill in the art.
  • the invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions and kits including combinations as described herein.
  • the invention includes combinations of agents that (i) inhibit degeneration of the neuron cell body, and (ii) inhibit axon degeneration.
  • agents that (i) inhibit degeneration of the neuron cell body, and (ii) inhibit axon degeneration.
  • inhibitors of GSK and transcription were found to prevent degeneration of neuron cell bodies, while inhibitors of EGFR and p38 MAPK prevent degeneration of axons.
  • the invention includes combinations of inhibitors of GSK and EGFR (and/or p38 MAPK), combinations of transcription inhibitors and EGFR (and/or p38 MAPK), and further combinations of inhibitors of dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase (DLK), glycogen synthase kinase 3 ⁇ (GSK3 ⁇ ), p38 MAPK, EGFF, phosphoinositide 3-kinase (PI3K), cyclin-dependent kinase 5 (cdk5), adenylyl cyclase, c-Jun N-terminal kinase (JNK), BCL2-associated X protein (Bax), In channel, calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase (CaMKK), a G-protein, a G-protein coupled receptor, transcription factor 4 (TCF4), and ⁇ -catenin.
  • the inhibitors used in these combinations can be any of those described herein, or other inhibitors of these targets
  • the route of administration of the inhibitors is selected in accordance with known methods, e.g., injection or infusion by intravenous, intraperitoneal, intracerebral, intramuscular, intraocular, intraarterial or intralesional routes, topical administration, or by sustained release systems as described below.
  • the compounds can be administered continuously by infusion into the fluid reservoirs of the CNS, although bolus injection may be acceptable.
  • the inhibitors can be administered into the ventricles of the brain or otherwise introduced into the CNS or spinal fluid. Administration can be performed by use of an indwelling catheter and a continuous administration means such as a pump, or it can be administered by implantation, e.g., intracerebral implantation of a sustained-release vehicle. More specifically, the inhibitors can be injected through chronically implanted cannulas or chronically infused with the help of osmotic minipumps. Subcutaneous pumps are available that deliver proteins through a small tubing to the cerebral ventricles.
  • Highly sophisticated pumps can be refilled through the skin and their delivery rate can be set without surgical intervention.
  • suitable administration protocols and delivery systems involving a subcutaneous pump device or continuous intracerebroventricular infusion through a totally implanted drug delivery system are those used for the administration of dopamine, dopamine agonists, and cholinergic agonists to Alzheimer's disease patients and animal models for Parkinson's disease, as described by Harbaugh, J. Neural Transm. Suppl. 24:271, 1987; and DeYebenes et al., Mov. Disord. 2:143, 1987.
  • sustained release preparations include semipermeable polymer matrices in the form of shaped articles, e.g., films or microcapsules.
  • Sustained release matrices include polyesters, hydrogels, polylactides (U.S. Pat. No. 3,773,919; EP 58,481), copolymers of L-glutamic acid and gamma ethyl-L-glutamate (Sidman et al., Biopolymers 22:547, 1983), poly (2-hydroxyethyl-methacrylate) (Langer et al., J. Biomed. Mater. Res. 15:167, 1981 ; Langer, Chem. Tech.
  • Sustained release compositions also include liposomally entrapped compounds, which can be prepared by methods known per se (Epstein et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 82:3688, 1985; Hwang et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 77:4030, 1980; U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,485,045 and 4,544,545; and EP 102,324A).
  • the liposomes are of the small (about 200-800 Angstroms) unilamelar type in which the lipid content is greater than about 30 mol % cholesterol, the selected proportion being adjusted for the optimal therapy.
  • an effective amount of an active compound to be employed therapeutically will depend, for example, upon the therapeutic objectives, the route of administration, and the condition of the patient. Accordingly, it will be necessary for the therapist to titer the dosage and modify the route of administration as required to obtain the optimal therapeutic effect.
  • a typical daily dosage might range from, for example, about 1 ⁇ g/kg to up to 100 mg/kg or more (e.g., about 1 ⁇ g/kg to 1 mg/kg, about 1 ⁇ g/kg to about 5 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg to 10 mg/kg, about 5 mg/kg to about 200 mg/kg, about 50 mg/kg to about 150 mg/mg, about 100 mg/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 100 mg/kg to about 400 mg/kg, and about 200 mg/kg to about 400 mg/kg), depending on the factors mentioned above.
  • the clinician will administer an active inhibitor until a dosage is reached that results in improvement in or, optimally, elimination of, one or more symptoms of the treated disease or condition.
  • One or more agent provided herein may be administered together or at different times (e.g., one agent is administered prior to the administration of a second agent).
  • One or more agent may be administered to a subject using different techniques (e.g., one agent may be administered orally, while a second agent is administered via intramuscular injection or intranasally).
  • One or more agent may be administered such that the one or more agent has a pharmacologic effect in a subject at the same time.
  • one or more agent may be administered, such that the pharmacological activity of the first administered agent is expired prior the administration of one or more secondarily administered agents (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 secondarily administered agents).
  • Antibodies of the invention can be administered by any suitable means, including parenteral, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intrapulmonary, intranasal, and, if desired for local treatment, intralesional administration.
  • Parenteral infusions include intramuscular, intravenous, intraarterial, intraperitoneal, and subcutaneous administration.
  • antibodies can be administered by pulse infusion, particularly with declining doses of the antibody. Dosing can be by any suitable route, e.g., by injections, such as intravenous or subcutaneous injections, depending in part on whether the administration is brief or chronic.
  • an antibody of the invention can be expressed intracellularly as an intrabody.
  • intrabody refers to an antibody or antigen-binding portion thereof that is expressed intracellularly and that is capable of selectively binding to a target molecule, as described in Marasco, Gene Therapy 4:11-15, 1997; Kontermann, Methods 34:163-170, 2004; U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,004,940 and 6,329,173; U.S.
  • Intracellular expression of an intrabody is effected by introducing a nucleic acid encoding the desired antibody or antigen-binding portion thereof (lacking the wild-type leader sequence and secretory signals normally associated with the gene encoding that antibody or antigen-binding fragment) into a target cell.
  • Any standard method of introducing nucleic acids into a cell may be used, including, but not limited to, microinjection, ballistic injection, electroporation, calcium phosphate precipitation, liposomes, and transfection with retroviral, adenoviral, adeno-associated viral and vaccinia vectors carrying the nucleic acid of interest.
  • Antibodies can possess certain characteristics that enhance delivery of antibodies into cells, or can be modified to possess such characteristics. Techniques for achieving this are known in the art. For example, cationization of an antibody is known to facilitate its uptake into cells (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,703,019). Lipofections or liposomes can also be used to deliver the antibody into cells. Where antibody fragments are used, the smallest inhibitory fragment that specifically binds to the binding domain of the target protein is generally advantageous. For example, based upon the variable-region sequences of an antibody, peptide molecules can be designed that retain the ability to bind the target protein sequence.
  • Such peptides can be synthesized chemically and/or produced by recombinant DNA technology (see, e.g., Marasco et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 90:7889-7893, 1993).
  • modulator polypeptides into target cells can be enhanced by methods known in the art.
  • certain sequences such as those derived from HIV Tat or the Antennapedia homeodomain protein are able to direct efficient uptake of heterologous proteins across cell membranes (see, e.g., Chen et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 96:4325-4329, 1999).
  • certain embodiments of the invention provide for the antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof to traverse the blood-brain barrier.
  • Certain neurodegenerative diseases are associated with an increase in permeability of the blood-brain barrier, such that the antibody or antigen-binding fragment can be readily introduced to the brain.
  • the blood-brain barrier remains intact, several art-known approaches exist for transporting molecules across it, including, but not limited to, physical methods, lipid-based methods, and receptor and channel-based methods.
  • Circumvention methods include, but are not limited to, direct injection into the brain (see, e.g., Papanastassiou et al., Gene Therapy 9:398-406, 2002), interstitial infusion/convection-enhanced delivery (see, e.g., Bobo et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 91:2076-2080, 1994), and implanting a delivery device in the brain (see, e.g., Gill et al., Nature Med.
  • Methods of creating openings in the barrier include, but are not limited to, ultrasound (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Publication No. 2002/0038086), osmotic pressure (e.g., by administration of hypertonic mannitol (Neuwelt, E. A., Implication of the Blood-Brain Barrier and its Manipulation, Volumes 1 and 2, Plenum Press, N.Y., 1989)), permeabilization by, e.g., bradykinin or permeabilizer A-7 (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • Lipid-based methods of transporting the antibody or antigen-binding fragment across the blood-brain barrier include, but are not limited to, encapsulating the antibody or antigen-binding fragment in liposomes that are coupled to antibody binding fragments that bind to receptors on the vascular endothelium of the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2002/0025313), and coating the antibody or antigen-binding fragment in low-density lipoprotein particles (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0204354) or apolipoprotein E (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0131692).
  • Receptor and channel-based methods of transporting the antibody or antigen-binding fragment across the blood-brain barrier include, but are not limited to, using glucocorticoid blockers to increase permeability of the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos. 2002/0065259, 2003/0162695, and 2005/0124533); activating potassium channels (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2005/0089473), inhibiting ABC drug transporters (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No.
  • Antibody compositions used in the methods of the invention are formulated, dosed, and administered in a fashion consistent with good medical practice. Factors for consideration in this context include the particular disorder being treated, the particular mammal being treated, the clinical condition of the individual patient, the cause of the disorder, the site of delivery of the agent, the method of administration, the scheduling of administration, and other factors known to medical practitioners.
  • the antibody need not be, but is optionally formulated with one or more agent currently used to prevent or treat the disorder in question.
  • the effective amount of such other agents depends on the amount of antibodies of the invention present in the formulation, the type of disorder or treatment, and other factors discussed above. These are generally used in the same dosages and with administration routes as described herein, or about from 1 to 99% of the dosages described herein, or in any dosage and by any route that is empirically/clinically determined to be appropriate.
  • an antibody when used alone or in combination with other agents, will depend on the type of disease to be treated, the type of antibody, the severity and course of the disease, whether the antibody is administered for preventive or therapeutic purposes, previous therapy, the patient's clinical history and response to the antibody, and the discretion of the attending physician.
  • the antibody is suitably administered to the patient at one time or over a series of treatments.
  • about 1 ⁇ g/kg to 15 mg/kg (e.g., 0.1 mg/kg-10 mg/kg) of antibody can be an initial candidate dosage for administration to the patient, whether, for example, by one or more separate administrations, or by continuous infusion.
  • One typical daily dosage might range from about 1 ⁇ g/kg to 100 mg/kg or more, depending on the factors mentioned above. For repeated administrations over several days or longer, depending on the condition, the treatment would generally be sustained until a desired suppression of disease symptoms occurs.
  • One exemplary dosage of the antibody would be in the range from about 0.05 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg.
  • one or more doses of about 0.5 mg/kg, 2.0 mg/kg, 4.0 mg/kg, or 10 mg/kg (or any combination thereof) may be administered to the patient.
  • Such doses may be administered intermittently, e.g., every week or every three weeks (e.g., such that the patient receives from about two to about twenty, or, e.g., about six doses of the antibody).
  • An initial higher loading dose, followed by one or more lower doses may be administered.
  • An exemplary dosing regimen comprises administering an initial loading dose of about 4 mg/kg, followed by a weekly maintenance dose of about 2 mg/kg of the antibody.
  • other dosage regimens may be useful. The progress of this therapy is easily monitored by conventional techniques and assays.
  • the invention also includes methods for activating or increasing neuron or axon degeneration. This may be accomplished by use of an activator or agonist of one or more of the targets listed in Table 2, above (with the exception of adenylyl cyclase, with respect to which an inhibitor can be used to activate neuron or axon degeneration).
  • DLK dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase
  • GSK3 ⁇ glycogen synthase kinase 3 ⁇
  • p38 MAPK p38 mitogen-activated protein kinase
  • EGFR epidermal growth factor receptor
  • PI3K phosphoinositide 3-kinase
  • Cdk5 cyclin-dependent kinase 5
  • JNK c-Jun N-terminal kinase
  • Bax BCL2-associated X protein
  • Ih channel calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase
  • CaMKK calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase
  • Such agonists may be identified or characterized in assays of axon degeneration, as described herein.
  • a candidate agonist can be present in medium in which neurons are cultured, in the presence of nerve growth factor, and assessed for its effect on degeneration.
  • Agonists of neuron or axon degeneration can be used in the prevention and treatment of diseases or conditions including epilepsy and autism, as well as any disease or condition that may be characterized by the failure of a natural process of axon pruning and degeneration.
  • the agonists may be formulated and administered to subjects in need of such treatment using methods such as those described in section E, above.
  • an article of manufacture containing materials useful for the treatment or prevention of the disorders and conditions described above.
  • the article of manufacture includes a container and a label or package insert on or associated with the container.
  • Suitable containers include, for example, bottles, vials, syringes, etc.
  • the containers may be formed from a variety of materials such as glass or plastic.
  • the container holds a composition that is by itself or when combined with another composition effective for treating or preventing the condition and may have a sterile access port (for example the container may be an intravenous solution bag or a vial having a stopper pierceable by a hypodermic injection needle).
  • At least one active agent in the composition is an inhibitor of the invention.
  • the label or package insert indicates that the composition is used for treating the condition of choice.
  • the article of manufacture may include (a) a first container with a composition contained therein, wherein the composition includes an inhibitor of the invention; and (b) a second container with a composition contained therein, wherein the composition includes a further therapeutic agent.
  • the article of manufacture in this embodiment of the invention may further include a package insert indicating that the compositions can be used to treat a particular condition.
  • the article of manufacture may further include a second (or third) container including a pharmaceutically-acceptable buffer, such as bacteriostatic water for injection (BWFI), phosphate-buffered saline, Ringer's solution and dextrose solution. It may further include other materials desirable from a commercial and user standpoint, including other buffers, diluents, filters, needles, and syringes.
  • BWFI bacteriostatic water for injection
  • phosphate-buffered saline such as bacteriostatic water for injection (
  • neuron or axon degeneration is a common feature of many neurodegenerative diseases and also occurs as a result of injury or trauma to the nervous system.
  • the mechanisms that regulate this active process are just beginning to be understood. Based on studies employing different models of neuron or axon degeneration, it appears that different mechanisms may be involved in this process, depending upon the nature of the disorder or injury.
  • a library of small molecule compounds targeting known signaling pathways in models of neuron or axon degeneration were screened. Multiple signaling pathways were identified as being necessary for neuron or axon degeneration.
  • FIG. 1 Treatment of cultured nerves with NGF results in proliferation of axons, while treating such nerves with anti-NGF antibodies results in axon degeneration ( FIG. 1 ).
  • Treatment of neurons with anti-NGF antibodies leads to several different morphological changes that are detectable by microscopy. For example, varicosities formed in nerves cultured with anti-NGF antibodies before axon fragmentation and, in some cases, appeared to burst ( FIG. 2 ).
  • axons cultured with anti-NGF antibodies lacked elongated mitochondria and showed accumulation of mitochondria in varicosities, suggesting that axon transport is blocked. A significant number of mitochondria were still active within hours of axon fragmentation ( FIG. 3 ).
  • a further example relates to cytoskeletal disassembly. After axotomy, the mictrotubule network disassembles prior to the actin and neurofilament networks. In contrast, in the NGF withdrawal model, the microtubule network was not disassembled before the actin or neurofilament network ( FIG. 4 ).
  • Wallerian degeneration Another model of axon degeneration is Wallerian degeneration, which is induced by the occurrence of a lesion in the axon that separates it from the cell body ( FIG. 5 ) (see, e.g., Raff et al., Science 296(5569):868-871, 2002).
  • Wld S Wallerian Degeneration Slow
  • axon degeneration was significantly delayed, as compared to wild type controls ( FIG. 5 ; Araki et al., Science 305(5686):1010-1013, 2004).
  • the effect of the Wld S mutant is evidence of the existence of an axonal self-destruction mechanism, which is weakened in the Wld S mutant.
  • Wld S protected axons after NGF withdrawal, but did not prevent apoptosis.
  • Example 1 The anti-NGF antibody model described above in Example 1 was used in a screen for inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration. A library of more than 400 small molecules (Tocris Bioscience) was tested to see which, if any, modulate degeneration observed in the presence of anti-NGF antibodies.
  • Mouse E13.5 embryos were dissected and placed into L15 medium (Invitrogen).
  • the spinal cord was dissected out from the embryos with DRGs attached.
  • the spinal cords with DRGs attached were placed into L15 medium+5% goat serum (Gibco) on ice.
  • the DRGs were removed using a tungsten needle and the remaining spinal cord was disposed of.
  • Eight well slides were filled with N3-F12 solution (23 ml Ham's F12, 1 ml N3 supplement, and 1 ml 1 M glucose) to which was added 25 ng/ml NGF (Roche).
  • N3 supplement stock was made by combining the following: 10 ml Pen/Strep (100 ⁇ , Gibco), 10 ml glutamine (200 mM, Gibco), 10 ml MEM vitamins (100 ⁇ , Gibco), 10 ml N3 concentrate (100 ⁇ , see above), for a total volume of 40 ml.
  • the mixture was filter sterilized using a 0.22 ⁇ m filter, and 1-2 ml aliquots were stored at ⁇ 20° C.).
  • the DRGs were sectioned into halves, and placed in the center of each well of an 8-chamber slide (BD Biocoat PDL/Laminin coated glass, Becton Dickinson). The DRGs were permitted to attach to the slide at room temperature for 5-10 minutes, followed by an overnight incubation at 37° C. Inhibitors of choice were added at a concentration of 100 ⁇ M (top row) or 10 ⁇ M (bottom row) 1 hour before adding anti-NGF antibodies. The anti-NGF antibodies were added to the right half of the slide (4 wells) at a concentration of 25 ⁇ g/ml.
  • the slides were fixed with 30% sucrose/8% paraformaldehyde (PFA) by adding 250 ⁇ l of the fix solution directly to the 250 ⁇ l of culture medium.
  • PFA paraformaldehyde
  • the following ingredients were added to a 600 ml beaker including a stir bar: 250 ml 16% PFA (cat#15710-S, Electron Microscopy Sciences), 50 ml 10 ⁇ PBS pH 7.4, and 150 g sucrose.
  • the solution was mixed under low heat until dissolved, and then 6-8 drops of 1 M NaOH were added to bring the pH to 7.4.
  • the volume was then brought to 500 ml with water in a graduated cylinder.
  • the solution was mixed well, placed in aliquots, and frozen.) The slides were fixed for 30 minutes, followed by washing once with PBS. All cells were labeled with an actin stain (Alexa-568 conjugated phalloidin; 1:40; Invitrogen), a membrane dye (DiO; 1:200; Invitrogen), and a DNA stain (Hoechst 33258; 1:10,000; Invitrogen) in 0.1% Triton and 1% goat serum for 2 hours at room temperature. The stain solution was removed and the slides were washed 1 ⁇ with PBS, and coverslipped with 130 ⁇ l of mounting medium (Fluoromount G; Electron Microscopy Sciences) and 24 ⁇ 60 mm no. 1 coverslips (VWR).
  • actin stain Alexa-568 conjugated phalloidin; 1:40; Invitrogen
  • a membrane dye DiO; 1:200; Invitrogen
  • Hoechst 33258 1:10,000; Invitrogen
  • FIGS. 6-10 show the results of these studies for a proteasome inhibitor and a GSK inhibitor ( FIG. 6 ), a p38 MAPK inhibitor and an adenylyl cyclase activator ( FIG. 7 ), a transcription inhibitor and an EGFR kinase inhibitor ( FIG. 8 ), a JNK inhibitor and a Bax channel blocker ( FIG. 9 ), and an Ih channel blocker and a CaMKK inhibitor ( FIG. 10 ). Examples of specific compounds found to protect against neurodegeneration, and corresponding targets, are shown in Table 5, which is similar to Table 2, above, except that it further includes a column with comments concerning observations made with respect to some of the compounds.
  • N3/F12 (+25 ng/ml NGF) medium Ham's F12 (23 ml), N3 supplement (1 ml), glucose (1 ml of 1 M glucose stock), 25 ng/ml Nerve Growth Factor 2.5 S, mouse (Roche 11362348001) in Ham's F12 (stock: 50 ⁇ g/ml ⁇ 80° C.), filter-sterilized prior to use).
  • the experiments also employed BD Biocoat PDL/Laminin coated glass 8 well chamber slides (BD 354688), and 24 ⁇ 60 mm No. 1 coverslips (VWR 48393 106).
  • Embryos were dissected in L15 medium (the dissection tools were soaked in 70% isopropanol, and dishes were set up on ice: 10 cm dishes (4 embryos per dish) and one 6 cm dish for spinal cords). E13.5 spinal cords were extracted into DMEM+10% FBS.>128 DRGs were detached from the spinal cord and sectioned into halves with a tungsten needle. 8 well slides were filled with 250 ⁇ l N3/F12 (25 ng/ml NGF). Sectioned DRGs ( ⁇ 4 per well) were placed in a 5 ⁇ l volume. Attachment was allowed for ⁇ 10 minutes at room temperature, and then the DRGs were incubated at 37° C. overnight. The following conditions were used to test the inhibitors.
  • 25 ⁇ g/ml anti-NGF antibody was added at 22 hours.
  • the inhibitors used in these studies are listed in Table 6.
  • Campenot chambers were used to further analyze compounds identified as inhibiting axon degeneration in Example 2. Campenot chambers allow the separation of somal and axonal environments, and permit the induction of localized degeneration (see FIG. 12 and, e.g., Zweifel et al., Nat. Rev. Neurosci. 6(8):615-625, 2005). In such chambers, axon degeneration is localized and proceeds without apoptosis ( FIGS. 13 and 14 ).
  • Teflon dividers (Tyler Research) were cleaned by washing in water and wiping them clean of any residual grease. Dividers were then soaked in Nochromix (Godax Laboratories)/sulfuric acid overnight, rinsed five times in distilled and autoclaved water (SQ water), boiled for 30 minutes, and then air-dried before use.
  • Nochromix Godax Laboratories
  • SQL water distilled and autoclaved water
  • Mouse laminin (5 ⁇ g/ml in sterile filtered water; Invitrogen) was added to PDL coated 35 mm dishes (BD Biosciences) and they were incubated for 1 hour at 37° C., followed by two rinses in SQ water. The dishes were vacuum-dried and then air-dried in a laminar flow hood for 15 minutes. Prepared dishes were then scored with a pin rake (Tyler Research).
  • NBM+MC solution containing NGF Fifty microliters of NBM+MC solution containing NGF was applied across the resulting score tracks (The solution was made as follows: 1750 mg of methycellulose was combined with 480 ml of Neurobasal (Invitrogen), to which was added 4.5 ml penicillin/streptomycin, 7.5 ml L-glutamine, 10 ml B-27 serum-free supplement (Invitrogen); the solution was mixed for one hour at room temperature, overnight at 4° C., and one further hour at room temperature; the solution was then filter sterilized, and 50 ng/ml NGF (Roche) was added prior to use). High vacuum grease (VWR) was added to each Teflon divider under a dissection scope.
  • VWR High vacuum grease
  • the laminin coated PDL dishes were inverted and dropped onto the Teflon divider, with additional pressure added by use of a toothpick in the non-track-containing regions. Dishes were incubated for 1 hour at 37° C. Five hundred microliters of NBM+MC (50 ng/ml NGF) solution was added to each of the side compartments, and a grease barrier was added in front of the center cell slot.
  • NBM+MC 50 ng/ml NGF
  • Free E13.5 spinal cords were dissected from mouse embryos and placed into NBM+MC (25 ng/ml NGF) solution. DRGs were detached from the spinal cord with a tungsten needle. An NBM+MC-lubricated P200 pipette was used to move DRGs into a 1.5 ml tube. DRGs were pelleted with a tabletop centrifuge for 30 seconds. The supernate was discarded and 0.05% Trypsin/EDTA (cold) was added. The pellet was resolubilized with a pipette and incubated at 37° C. for 15 minutes with constant agitation (650 RPM). The sample was again centrifuged and the supernate discarded.
  • NBM+MC 25 ng/ml NGF
  • the pellet was resuspended in warm NBM+MC (50 ng/ml NGF) solution and triturated with a flamed glass pipette 20 times, followed by trituration with a fire-bored glass pipette another 20 times.
  • the samples were again centrifuged and the resulting pellets were resuspended in 0.5 ml NBM+MC (50 ng/ml NGF) solution.
  • the cells were diluted to a final concentration of 2.5 ⁇ 10 6 cells/ml.
  • the cell suspensions were loaded into a 1 ml syringe with a 22 gauge needle.
  • the center slot of the Campenot divider was filled using the syringe (to a volume of at least 50 ⁇ l).
  • the Campenot chamber was incubated overnight at 37° C.
  • 2.5 ml NGF+MC (50 ng/ml NGF) solution was added to the center compartment and the grease gate was removed.
  • the outer medium was replaced after three days with 2.5 ml NBM+MC medium (with 25 ng/ml NGF). After five days in culture, one distal compartment was washed three times with warmed NBM+MC (no NGF) solution. After the third wash, 500 ⁇ l NBM+MC (no NGF) solution was added to the axon compartment in combination with either 0.5% DMSO or an inhibitor.
  • the cell body compartment was replaced with 2.5 ml NBM+MC medium (with 25 ng/ml NGF) containing either 0.5% DMSO or inhibitor.
  • the secondary antibody Alexa 488 goat anti-mouse antibody (Invitrogen) was added at a final dilution of 1:200 in 2% BSA in PBS and incubated for one hour at room temperature.
  • the dish was washed twice with PBS, and a 22 ⁇ 22 mm coverslip (VWR) was added with 350 ⁇ l of fluoromount G (Electron Microscopy Sciences).
  • the neurons were visualized by use of a fluorescence microscope.
  • E13.5 DRGs were isolated and grown for 5 days in a Campenot chamber.
  • Fifty ⁇ g/ml anti-NGF was added to the experimental axon compartment, with an inhibitor added either to the axon compartment (together with the NGF antibody), or the cell body compartment, and the axons were allowed to degenerate for 28 hours.
  • Another axon compartment was maintained in NGF as a control.
  • FIGS. 15 and 16 when cell bodies were exposed to SB415 (GSKi) or Act D (transcription inhibitor), or when axons were exposed to AG555 (EGFRi) or SB239 (p38i), axons deprived of NGF did not degenerate.
  • SB415 GSKi
  • Act D transcription inhibitor
  • AG555 EGFRi
  • SB239 p38i
  • FIG. 18 A model based on data from the screens described above is shown in FIG. 18 .
  • Preliminary studies showed that cell bodies appeared smaller when NGF was removed from the axon compartment ( FIG. 19 ), and that many of the neurons locally deprived of NGF were cleaved caspase-3-positive and showed nuclear condensation ( FIG. 20 ). Further studies show that GSK3 ( FIG. 21 ) and JNK ( FIG. 22 ) activities peak 6 hours after NGF withdrawal.
  • ALS Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis
  • ALS Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
  • SOD Superoxide Dismutase
  • a rabbit monoclonal anti-phosphorylated EGFR primary antibody (Novus Biologicals) was diluted 1:500 in 1% BSA and 0.3% Triton X100 in PBS and incubated with the slides overnight at 4° C. The slides were washed four times in PBS-T for 10 minutes per wash.
  • a biotinylated goat anti-rabbit secondary antibody (Vector Labs) was diluted 1:300 in 1% BSA and 0.3% Triton X100 in PBS and incubated with the slides for 30 minutes-1 hour. The slides were washed four times in PBS-T for 5 minutes per wash. Washed slides were incubated in Avidin-biotin complex solution (Vector Laboratories) for 30 minutes at room temperature.
  • the slides were washed four times in PBS-T for 5 minutes per wash. The slides were then incubated with a peroxidase substrate (Diaminobenzidine (DAB); Sigma) until the desired intensity developed. The slides were rinsed in water, coverslipped, and viewed.
  • DAB dioxidase substrate
  • FIGS. 27 and 28 which show sections of spinal cord stained with EGFR antibodies, phosphorylated EGFR levels were increased in the SOD mice, as compared to the control mice. This observation shows that EGFR kinase inhibition may be beneficial in the treatment of ALS in vivo.
  • Samples were washed after primary antibody incubation 4 ⁇ 10 minutes in PBSTx (0.1%) at room temperature. Secondary antibodies were applied (Molecular Probes, Alexa conjugated; Donkey anti-Mouse Alexa-488; diluted 1:500 in 1% BSA, 0.3% Tx in PBS) and samples were incubated for 2 hours at room temperature. Samples were washed after secondary antibody incubation 2 ⁇ 10 minutes in PBSTx, and 2 ⁇ 10 minutes PBS. Optionally, nuclear counterstaining was carried out during the second wash by application of DAPI at 1:10,000 in PBS. Mounting was carried out with Vectashield mounting medium (Vector Labs).
  • FIG. 29 shows pEGFR remaining in axons in the SOD ALS model.
  • axon number decreases in SOD1-tg spinal cord, and pEGFR partially co-localizes with axons in SOD1-tg animals.
  • axons are lost in SOD1 transgenic mice as compared to non-transgenic controls, and many of the remaining exons are immunoreactive for pEGFR.
  • CGNs cerebellar granule neurons
  • Basal Medium Eagles including 29 mM KCl and 10% FBS
  • cells were switched to “deprivation” medium (Basal Medium Eagles including 5 mM KCl), alone or in combination with various small molecule inhibitors as shown in Table 8.
  • the neurons were fixed with 4% paraformaldehyde and stained with a neuronal marker (anti-class III ⁇ -Tubulin, Covance).
  • Image acquisition was performed using the ImageXpress automated imaging system (Molecular Devices). The plate set-up used is summarized in Table 8.
  • the kinase inhibitors were found to be effective at protecting the CGNs from degeneration, similar to the findings in Examples 2 and 3 for DRGs.
  • Kinase inhibitors (inhibitors of GSK3, JNK, EGFR, p38, and CaMKK) were tested for their capacity to protect hippocampal neurons from rotenone-dependent degeneration.
  • the assay was performed as follows. First, hippocampal neurons were dissected. Briefly, E18-E19 embryos were removed from anesthetized pregnant rats, placed in Petri dishes containing cold HBSS (see above), and washed in fresh, cold HBSS. Embryos were removed from their sacs and placed in fresh, cold HBSS, and the brains were isolated and placed in fresh, cold HBSS using standard techniques.
  • the hippocampus and cortex were isolated from each embryo, and the brains were cut sagitally in half to separate the hemispheres. Remaining cerebellum/brain stem, olfactory bulbs, non-cortex ventral underlying tissue, and the meninges were removed. The hippocampi were removed from the remaining tissue and transferred to a 1.5 ml tube on ice. The cortical tissues were removed to a separate 1.5 ml tube on ice. As much HBSS as possible was removed, and 1% Trypsin (Hyclone)/0.1% DNase (Sigma) in HBSS was added to the remaining tissue in each tube. The tissues were each broken up using a fire-polished pipette.
  • the tissues were incubated for ten minutes at 37° C., with tapping of the tubes every two minutes. As much solution as possible was removed from the tissues, and the tissues were each washed with 0.05% DNase (Sigma) solution.
  • the samples were triturated in 0.05% DNase (Sigma) about 20 ⁇ with each of the following (1) fire polished pipette at 2 ⁇ 3 bore, and (2) fire polished pipette at 1 ⁇ 3 bore. The samples were permitted to settle for five minutes, after which the supernatants were collected (the debris settled and the supernatant was removed with a pipette) and the cells were counted on a hemocytometer.
  • Neurons were nucleofected using a preset Amaxa program, CU110. Immediately following nucleofection, 100 ⁇ l pre-warmed CNBM (10 ml B27 (serum-free supplement; Invitrogen), 5 mls 100 ⁇ Pen-Strep, 5 mls 100 ⁇ Glutamax, 480 mls NBM (neurobasal medium; Invitrogen)) was added, and the cells were subsequently plated at a density of 70,000 cells/well in 8-well PDL-coated chamber slides. Neurons were grown for 5-14 days before rotenone addition, with changes of medium every 3-5 days.
  • Ten ⁇ M rotenone (resuspended in DMSO; VWR) was added to neurons in the presence or absence of vehicle or experimental compounds. 17-18 hours after rotenone addition, neurons were fixed in a solution of 4% paraformaldehyde/15% sucrose for 40 minutes at room temperature. Neurons were washed once with PBS and mouse anti-Tuja antibody (Covance) was added at a dilution of 1:1000 (in PBS, 0.1% Triton X-100, 2% goat serum) for an overnight incubation at 4° C.
  • Neurons were washed 4 ⁇ with PBS and goat anti-mouse antibody conjugated to Alexa-568 (Alexa) was added at a dilution of 1:200 (in PBS, 2% goat serum) for 30 minutes. Neurons were again washed 4 ⁇ with PBS and mounted on slides in Vectashield mounting medium (Vector Labs). All neurons were visualized with Tuj1, and individual neurons were visualized with GFP.
  • Alexa Alexa-568
  • the kinase inhibitors were found to protect hippocampal neurons from rotenone-dependent degeneration. Similar studies were carried out with cortical neurons, and showed that cortical neurons are also protected from rotenone-dependent degeneration by kinase inhibitors ( FIG. 32 ).
  • DRGs were cultured as described above for the screen. After 24 hours of growth, cells were fixed by adding 8% PFA/30% sucrose to culture medium at a 1:1 ratio for 30 minutes and washed 1 ⁇ with PBS. Fixed cells were incubated in 5% BSA and 0.2% TritonX100 in PBS for 30 minutes, and then incubated overnight in 2% BSA in PBS at 4° C. with the following antibodies: (1) 50 ⁇ g/ml anti-EGFR (D1-5, Genentech), (2) 1:500 anti-ErbB2 (Abcam), (3) 24 ⁇ g/ml anti-ErbB3 (57.88, Genentech), and (4) 1:500 ErbB4 (Abcam).
  • Dorsal Root Ganglia (DRG) immunoblots were prepared as follows. Primary cells used in the experiments were Charles River CD-1 E13 Dorsal Root Ganglia (DRG). The cells were maintained in N3/F12 (+25 ng/ml NGF) medium (Ham's F12 (23 ml), N3 supplement (1 ml), glucose (1 ml of 1 M glucose stock), 25 ng/ml Nerve Growth Factor 2.5 S, mouse (Roche 11362348001) in Ham's F12 (stock: 50 ⁇ g/ml ⁇ 80° C.), which was filter-sterilized prior to use).
  • N3/F12 (+25 ng/ml NGF) medium Ham's F12 (23 ml)
  • N3 supplement (1 ml
  • glucose (1 ml of 1 M glucose stock
  • 25 ng/ml Nerve Growth Factor 2.5 S mouse
  • Gib's F12 Ham's F12 (stock: 50 ⁇ g/ml ⁇ 80° C.), which was filter-steril
  • the experiments also employed Triton lysis buffer (20 mM Tris pH 7.5, 150 mM NaCl, 0.1% Triton-X100, 100 ⁇ Phosphatase inhibitor cocktail I (added fresh), 100 ⁇ Phosphatase inhibitor cocktail II (added fresh), 1 tablet/10 ml Protease inhibitor tablet (added fresh)).
  • DRG explants were prepared on Day 0. Embryo dissections were carried out in L15 medium (dissection tools were soaked in 70% isopropanol, and dishes were set up on ice: 10 cm dishes (4 embryos per dish) and one 6 cm dish for spinal cords). E13.5 spinal cords were extracted into DMEM+10% FBS. 5 ⁇ 20 DRGs were detached from the spinal cord. 8 well slides were filled with 250 ⁇ l N3/F12 (25 ng/ml NGF)+7 ⁇ M cytosine arabinoside. Approximately 20 DRGs were placed in each well (five total), and attachment was allowed for about 10 minutes at room temperature. On day 2, media was changed to N3/F12+25 ng/ml NGF.
  • ErbB ligands were added (1000 ⁇ ; 100 ⁇ g/ml; dilute in SQ water 1:10) for 30 minutes to 1 hour (SQ water (control); EGF (ErbB1); Neuregulin-1 (ErbB3); Beta-cellulin (ErbB1/4); Epiregulin (ErbB1/4); Anti-NGF (25 ⁇ g/ml)) and slides were shaken slightly.
  • Immunobloting was carried out by aspiration of media with a pipette tip, washing twice with ice-cold sterile PBS, and removal of all PBS using an aspirator with a pipette tip or kimwipes.
  • Cells were lysed with 40 ⁇ l Triton lysis buffer on ice. Lysate was collected, rotated for 30 minutes at 4° C., spun for 5 minutes at top speed, and supernatant was kept (stop: ⁇ 80° C.). About 20 ⁇ l of sample was loaded. The sample was prepared by adding 1 ⁇ SDS sample buffer and NuPAGE reducing agent (10 ⁇ ), and the lysate was boiled.
  • Samples were fractionated by 10% SDS-PAGE (at 120 Volts)(run for two membranes) with standards (1 ⁇ l MWM; 1 ⁇ l and 2 ⁇ l spinal cord lysate).
  • the gels were blotted using the iBlot program 3 (Nitrocellulose), and the blot was cut at 98 kDa.
  • the top membrane was blocked in 5% BSA in TBST for 1 hour.
  • Primary antibody was placed into 2 ml 5% BSA in TBST for 1 hour (Calbiochem anti-P-tyrosine HRP conjugate (PY20) 1:10,000).
  • the blot was washed with TBST for 3 ⁇ 5 minutes and developed with ECL.
  • the bottom membrane was blocked in 5% milk for one hour in PBS.
  • FIG. 34 EGFR is expressed on axons.
  • FIG. 35 shows that EGF added to neurons maintained in NGF does not cause degeneration.
  • EGF is capable of activating EGFR/ErbBs in the neuronal cultures used in these assays.
  • ERK activation was assessed (ERK is a downstream target of EGFR).
  • adding EGF increased ERK activity, as determined by Western blot.
  • BD Biocoat PDL/Laminin coated glass 8 well chamber slides (BD 354688); L15 medium (Invitrogen 11415114); albumin from bovine serum (BSA) (Sigma A7906-500g); fetal bovine serum (Sigma F2442-100 ml); N3 supplement (see above); Fluoromount G (Electron Microscopy Sciences 17984-25); 24 ⁇ 60 mm No.
  • Ectodomains were resuspended in sterile filtered 0.1% BSA in PBS to 1 mg/ml.
  • Mouse E13.5 embryos were dissected out and place into L15 medium. Using forceps, the ventral region of the embryo was opened, organs removed, ribs cut away, and spinal cord dissected out with DRGs attached. The spinal cords with DRGs attached were placed into L15 medium +5% goat serum on ice. DRGs were removed with a tungsten needle and the remaining spinal cord was disposed of. 8 well slides were filled with N3-F12 plus 25 ng/ml NGF. DRGs were sectioned into halves.
  • Sectioned DRGs were placed in the centers of each well of an 8-chamber slide and DRGs were allowed to attach at room temperature for 5-10 minutes. Ectodomain was added to a final concentration of 50 ⁇ g/ml in the top row. Slides were placed in a 37° C. incubator overnight. Ectodomain was added to the bottom row to a final concentration of 50 ⁇ g/ml. Anti-NGF antibody was added to the wells at a concentration of 25 ⁇ g/ml. EGFR inhibitor AG555 was added at a concentration of 10 ⁇ M as a positive control.
  • EGFR ectodomain from R&D Systems was added at a concentration of 50 ⁇ g/ml, which should be sufficient to bind any free ligands that may activate EGFR.
  • the EGFR ectodomain added either 24 hours prior to, or at the same time as adding anti-NGF, does not block degeneration. This suggests EGFR activation during degeneration is likely ligand-independent.
  • DSC dorsal spinal cord
  • 293 cells were plated at 30% confluence into 3 wells of a 6-well plate.
  • Cells were transfected with either control plasmid DNA, a DNA construct expressing wild type DLK, or two plasmids, with one expressing wild type DLK and the other expressing a DLK in which threonine 277 has been mutated to alanine (T278A), creating a form of the protein without activity (Fugene 6, Roche). Twenty-four hours after transfection, cells were washed with PBS, scraped off each plate, and transferred to an eppendorf tube. Cells were then spun down and excess media was removed.
  • Pelleted cells were lysed in 20 mM Tris, 150 mM NaCl, 0.1% Triton X-100, and placed at 4° C. for 30 minutes. Samples were then spun to remove insoluble particles and tested for protein concentration in a bicinchoninic acid (BCA) assay (Promega).
  • BCA bicinchoninic acid
  • Mouse E13.5 embryos were dissected and placed into L15 medium (Invitrogen).
  • the spinal cord was dissected out from the embryos with DRGs attached.
  • the spinal cords with DRGs attached were placed into L15 medium+5% goat serum (Gibco) on ice.
  • the DRGs were removed using a tungsten needle and the remaining spinal cord was disposed.
  • Eight-well slides were filled with N3-F12 solution (23 ml of Ham's F12, 1 ml of N3 supplement, and 1 ml of 1 M glucose) to which was added 25 ng/ml NGF (Roche).
  • N3 supplement stock was made by combining the following: 10 ml Pen/Strep (100 ⁇ , Gibco), 10 ml glutamine (200 mM, Gibco), 10 ml MEM vitamins (100 ⁇ , Gibco), 10 ml N3 concentrate (100 ⁇ , see above), for a total volume of 40 ml.
  • the mixture was filter sterilized using a 0.22 ⁇ m filter, and 1-2 ml aliquots were stored at ⁇ 20° C.
  • Neurons were trypsinized using 0.05% trypsin-EDTA (Gibco) at 37° C. for 30 minutes, spun down and counted. Two hundred thousand cells were electroporated using an Amaxa 96-well nucleofector with 400 ng control of DLK siRNA (program DC100), then split equally onto two wells of an 8-chamber slide (BD Biocoat PDL/Laminin coated glass, Becton Dickinson). Neurons were permitted to attach to the slide at room temperature for 5-10 minutes, followed by incubation for 3 days at 37° C. The anti-NGF antibodies were then added to the right half of the slide (4 wells) at a concentration of 25 ⁇ g/ml.
  • the slides were fixed with 30% sucrose/8% paraformaldehyde (PFA) by adding 250 ⁇ l of the fix solution directly to the 250 ⁇ l of culture medium.
  • PFA paraformaldehyde
  • the following ingredients were added to a 600 ml beaker including a stir bar: 250 ml 16% PFA (cat#15710-S, Electron Microscopy Sciences), 50 ml 10 ⁇ PBS pH 7.4, and 150 g sucrose.
  • the solution was mixed under low heat until dissolved.
  • 6-8 drops of 1 M NaOH were added to bring the pH to 7.4.
  • the volume was then brought to 500 ml with water in graduated cylinder.
  • the solution was mixed well, placed in aliquots, and frozen).
  • E13.5 DRGs were dissected, electroporated with control siRNAs or siRNAs directed against DLK, and cultured as described above for a period of five days.
  • RNA from neurons was then isolated using Purify Total RNA by Qiagen RNeasy Mini kit, according to the manufacturer's protocols. 10 ng of total RNA from cells treated with control and DLK siRNAs were run in triplicate in quantitative PCR experiments (Qiagen Quantifect SYBR Green RT-PCR) using DNA primers specific for DLK and GAPDH (control) (CATCATCTGGGTGTGGGAAG (forward primer) and AGTTGCAGCATGAGGGCATTC (reverse primer); SEQ ID NOs: 16 and 17). Amplification curves were analyzed and relative RNA concentrations of each sample were calculated relative to controls.
  • Cortical neurons were isolated using the following procedure. Rat E18 cortices devoid of meninges were dissected into ice-cold neurobasal media (Invitrogen). Cortices were dissociated in a final concentration of 0.1% trypsin/PBS (Worthington) for 30 minutes at 37° C. A final concentration of 0.1% DNase (Roche) was added to the tube and tissue was incubated at room temperature for 1 minute. Tissue was washed once with warm neurobasal media and the tissue was allowed to settle in the tube before 1 mL of neurobasal media containing 2% B27 supplement (Invitrogen) was added. Tissue was dissociated by trituration with a P1000 pipet (Rainin). The cells were counted and, for some experiments, transfected with siRNAs using a Biosystem 96-well nucleofector (Amaxa).
  • RNA concentrations in each sample were run in triplicate using the Quantifect SYBR Green RT-PCR kit (Qiagen) with DLK-, JNK1-, JNK2-, or JNK3-specific primers. Primers for the housekeeping gene, GAPDH, were used as controls. (All primers were purchased from Qiagen.) Amplification curves were analyzed for relative RNA concentrations in each sample using ⁇ CT.
  • Cortical neurons plated for 3-4 days were treated with 300 nM vincristine, a microtubule destabilizer, for 6-72 hours. NGF withdrawal-induced apoptosis and degeneration were assayed between 4-36 hours after the final treatment. Apoptosis and degeneration were assayed using both the MTT assay and the lactate dehydrogenase assay.
  • the MTT (3-(4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyltetrazolium bromide) assay measures cell viability based on mitochondrial function. MTT was added to a total of one tenth of the culture volume to each well and incubated at 37° C. with 5% CO 2 for 90-120 minutes.
  • the MTT-containing culture media was aspirated and the cells were resuspended in an equal volume of solubilization solution (10% triton X-100, 1 drop HCl, 50 mL isopropanol). Absorbance (570 and 690 nm) was read using a spectrophotometer. Lactate dehydrogenase (LDH) levels were assayed using a CytoTox non-radioactive LDH assay kit (Promega) to assess the amount of cell death in assays. Fifty ⁇ L of media from different treatment conditions were used according to the manufacturer's instructions. For both the MTT and the LDH assays, cell survival/cell death was normalized to positive controls.
  • solubilization solution 10% triton X-100, 1 drop HCl, 50 mL isopropanol.
  • Absorbance 570 and 690 nm
  • Lactate dehydrogenase (LDH) levels were assayed using a CytoTox non
  • Sympathetic cervical ganglia were dissected from postnatal day 1 Sprague-Dawley rats (Charles River Labs) and collected in a dish containing Ultraculture media (Lonza) with 5% fetal bovine serum (Invitrogen). Ganglia were washed twice with serum-free Ultraculture media, and a final concentration of 0.1% trypsin (Worthington) was added and incubated with the tissue at 37° C. for 30 minutes. One percent DNase (Roche) solution in PBS was added to the ganglia and incubated at room temperature for 1-2 minutes. Ganglia were washed with Ultraculture and allowed to settle to the bottom of the tube.
  • NGF withdrawal assays were performed as described in Example 14A.
  • Vincristine treatments, MTT assays, and LDH assays were performed as described in Example 14B.
  • Lentivirus experiments were performed using two lentivirus vectors: GCMV-MCS-IRES-eGFP and GCMV-MCS-IRES-dsRed. Both vectors are HIV1 strains that lack the structural viral genes gag, pol, env, rev, tat, vpr, vif, vpu, and nef. In addition, there is a partial deletion of the promoter/enhancer sequences within the 3′ LTR that renders the 5′ LTR/promoter self-inactivating following integration.
  • the genes provided in trans for both vectors are the structural viral proteins Gag, Pol, Rev, and Tat (via plasmid Delta8.9) and the envelope protein VSV-G.
  • plasmids are introduced into HEK293-T cells by co-transfection, and transiently express the different viral proteins required to generate viral particles.
  • the potential for generating wild type or pathogenic lentivirus is extremely low, because it would require multiple recombination events amongst three plasmids.
  • the virulence factors (vpr, vif, vpu, and nef) have been completely deleted from both vectors.
  • Neurons were infected either immediately at the time of plating or 3-5 days after plating by adding virus into cell culture media containing 5 ⁇ g/mL polybrene. The next day the virus-containing media is removed and replaced with fresh media. Cells are allowed to express the virus for 48 hours before experimentation.
  • kinase-dead DLK introduced into 293 cells inhibited JNK phosphorylation in those cells.
  • One non-limiting possibility is that kinase-dead DLK may prevent normal DLK dimerization and self-phosphorylation.
  • This finding suggests that inhibition of DLK's JNK-phosphorylating capabilities, either through reduction of DLK expression or through introduction of a DLK variant lacking kinase activity, protects many types of neurons against axon degeneration and apoptosis in response to toxin exposure or growth factor withdrawal.
  • DLK is a MAP kinase kinase kinase in the multiple lineage kinase (MLK) family.
  • MLK multiple lineage kinase
  • DLK is a member of a signal transduction pathway activating JNK1-3 and cJun that results in apoptosis/inflammation under certain conditions.
  • Increased JNK/cJun activity has been linked to a variety of neural disorders, including Parkinson's disease, glaucoma, Alzheimer's disease, ALS, stroke, and Huntington's disease through examination of patient samples or experiments in animal models of disease (Oo et al., J. Neurochem. 72(2):557-564, 1999; Ries et al., J. Neurochem. 107(6):1578-1588, 2008; Vlug et al., Eur. J. Neurosci.
  • DLK is a MAP kinase and, like other MAP kinases, it is phosphorylated within the activation loop in its activated state.
  • p-DLK phosphorylated form of DLK
  • threonine 278 T278
  • serine 281 S281
  • Antibodies were generated against peptides in the activation loop of the DLK protein that contained these residues using standard in vivo immunization techniques in rabbits.
  • the peptide sequences used for immunization were CKELSDKSpTKMpSFAG (SEQ ID NO: 13) for antibodies 317 and 318, and KMpSFAGTVAWMAKKC (SEQ ID NO: 14) for antibodies 319 and 320, and CGTSKELSDKSpTKM (SEQ ID NO: 15) for antibodies 321 and 322.
  • polyclonal antibodies Six of the obtained polyclonal antibodies were subjected to Western blot and immunohistochemistry analyses to determine their abilities to detect p-DLK, and to distinguish it from non-phosphorylated DLK or other phosphorylated kinases and phosphorylated MLK3.
  • the media was removed and the cells were washed once with ice-cold PBS. Cells were scraped in cold PBS and were transferred to an eppendorf tube on ice. Cells were quickly pelleted and excess buffer was removed.
  • the pellets were either snap-frozen on dry ice and stored at ⁇ 80° C., or were immediately lysed in fresh lysis buffer (20 mM Tris, 150 mM NaCl, 0.1% Triton X-100) containing phosphatase (Sigma P5726 and P2850) and protease inhibitors (Roche 11836153001). Cells were lysed on a rotator at 4° C. for 30 minutes and then pelleted at 4° C. Protein concentrations were determined using a BCA assay (Pierce).
  • Protein lysates were mixed with sample buffer (Invitrogen), boiled for 5 minutes, and then loaded onto a denaturing 4-12% gradient gel (Invitrogen). Samples were transferred onto nitrocellulose (Invitrogen) and blocked in 5% milk/TBST blocking solution (Tris-buffered saline+0.05% Triton X-100) for 1 hour. The blot was incubated with a phospho-DLK antibody at a dilution of 1:1000 in TBST with 5% BSA on a shaking platform overnight at 4° C.
  • Blots were washed three times for 5 minutes with TBST, and incubated with a rabbit secondary horseradish peroxidase (HRP)-conjugated antibody (Jackson Labs, 1:5000) for 1-2 hours at room temperature. Membranes were washed three times in TBST and developed with Westdura chemiluminescent substrate (Pierce).
  • HRP horseradish peroxidase
  • 293T cells were plated onto coverslips contained in a 12-well culture dish for immunostaining.
  • the cells were then transfected with either mDLK or mMLK3 as previously described and then fixed with 4% PFA, 30% sucrose 24 hours after transfection.
  • Cells were blocked and permeabilized with 5% BSA, 0.3% Triton X-100 for an hour, and then incubated with the primary antibody at 1:500 concentration in 1% BSA overnight.
  • the cells were gently rinsed with PBS three times and conjugated with Alexa488 anti-rabbit secondary antibody for 1 hour. This step was followed by three PBS washes, with the final wash containing DAPI (1:5000) to stain nuclei.
  • the coverslip was then carefully lifted out of the culture and mounted onto a slide with the surface with cells facing down on the slide, and the slides were visualized using fluorescence microscopy.
  • Antibodies 318, 319, 320, 321, and 322 each detected p-DLK and p-DLK/DN-DLK with no (antibodies 318 and 319) or very limited (antibodies 320, 321, and 322) binding to phosphorylated MLK3 ( FIG. 43A ). In contrast, antibody 317 recognized all three proteins. Antibodies 318 and 319 showed the strongest binding to p-DLK, coupled with minimal p-MLK3 binding, and thus were used for further analysis.
  • the antibodies were also able to specifically bind to p-DLK in the context of a cell, as measured by immunohistochemistry. Both antibodies 318 and 319 stained DLK-transfected 293T cells, with significantly reduced binding observed in MLK3-transfected 293T cells ( FIG. 43B ). This binding is significantly reduced in 293 cells that have been transfected with DLK mutants having a mutation that results in a near complete lack of kinase activity ( FIG. 43C ). As DLK, like other mixed lineage kinases, is thought to dimerize and autophosphorylate when transfected in heterologous systems, these data further confirm that these antibodies indeed recognize the phosphorylated form of DLK.
  • Immunohistochemistry assays were performed as follows. SOD1 transgenic animals were perfused with 4% paraformaldehyde and the spinal cords were carefully removed from the vertebral column and post-fixed overnight at 4° C. The cords were then equilibrated in 30% sucrose/PBS before embedding in OCT for cryosectioning. Coronal sections (20 ⁇ m thick) were cut and mounted on cold slides and kept at ⁇ 80° C. Sections were hydrated in PBS and blocked for endogenous peroxidase activity with H 2 O 2 (0.3% in PBS) for 10 minutes, followed by rinsing twice with PBST (0.1% Triton X-100).
  • the slides were rinsed with PBST followed by a 30-minute incubation with avidin DH containing ABS reagent (Vector labs), and finally incubated in peroxidase substrate (0.05% di-amino bendizine in 10 mM Tris, 150 mM NaCl, pH 7.6 to which 30% H 2 O 2 was added just before use) in the dark for 10-15 minutes.
  • peroxidase substrate 0.05% di-amino bendizine in 10 mM Tris, 150 mM NaCl, pH 7.6 to which 30% H 2 O 2 was added just before use
  • the reaction was stopped by rinsing with water, and the sections were mounted on glass slides and coverslipped.
  • Alzheimer's patient tissue was purchased from US Biological. Tissue lysate from hippocampi of Alzheimer's patients and age-matched controls were used for this analysis. Analysis was conducted by Western blot using the same protocols as described above.
  • FIG. 44A demonstrate that the levels of phosphorylated-DLK (p-DLK) were highly elevated in the SOD1 mouse of ALS relative to wild type mice late in the course of disease.
  • Evidence of p-DLK was evident in tissue samples as early as 14 weeks ( FIG. 44B ), which is prior to the onset of ALS-like symptoms in these animals.
  • DLK is activated in a recognized mouse model of ALS, both prior to the onset of symptoms and at the end stage of disease, and also in cortical samples from human Alzheimer's patients.
  • DLK silencing protects neurons from degradation in response to toxin exposure or growth factor withdrawal, and DLK kinase activity is involved directly or indirectly in JNK phosphorylation.
  • Experiments were performed to assess JNK and cJun expression and activity under NGF withdrawal stress and toxin-dependent stress conditions.
  • the experimental protocols used to decrease the expression of DLK (siRNA) and for immunoblotting were the same as those described above.
  • DLK knockdown did not change baseline JNK protein levels or JNK activity in DRGs or cortical neurons ( FIG. 45 ).
  • DLK knockdown however decreased p-cJun levels after either NGF withdrawal or vincristine-dependent stress in cortical neurons, DRGS, and sympathetic ganglia neurons ( FIG. 45 ).
  • DLK knockdown also decreased p-JNK levels after either NGF withdrawal or vincristine-dependent stress in cortical neurons and DRG ( FIG. 45 ).
  • the p-JNK antibody recognizes the phosphorylated forms of each of JNK1, JNK2, and JNK3. JNK1 phosphorylation does not correlate with stress induction or phosphorylation of cJun.
  • DLK knockdown silences stress-induced phosphorylation of JNK2 and JNK3.
  • the background signal observed in the control samples in these data is likely due to baseline phosphorylated JNK1.
  • the results show that DLK silencing or other inhibition does not cause degradation of JNK or cJun, but does result in a lesser degree of stress-induced phosphorylation (and thus lack of activation) of those molecules.
  • JNKV (Calbiochem) was most protective at a concentration of 5 ⁇ M, and JNKVIII (Calbiochem) at a concentration of 4 ⁇ M.
  • JNK1 is a constitutively active molecule, known to be responsible for axon maintenance and synapse maturation
  • JNK2 and JNK3 are known to be stress-induced and involved in cJun activation and apoptosis/axon degeneration (Coffey et al., J. Neurosci. 22(11):4335-4345, 2002; Coffey et al., J. Neurosci. 20(20):7602-7613, 2000).
  • DLK inhibition results in a larger neuroprotective effect than JNK1/2/3 inhibition strongly suggests that DLK is inhibitory to one or more mechanisms of neuron growth and/or survival in addition to its role in the JNK/cJUN pathway.
  • DLK knockdown was shown to have pronounced trophic effects in both cortical neurons and sympathetic neurons (observed increase in number of cells) ( FIGS. 48A and 48B ). Specifically, DRG, cortical, and sympathetic neurons showed increased growth/survival in culture when treated with siRNA directed against DLK (observed increase in growth) (Table 13).
  • MAP2 a microtubule associated protein that is specifically localized to dendrites.
  • MAP2 expression in cultured neurons is reflective of neuronal maturation and expression, and is often increased under pro-growth conditions.
  • Inhibition of DLK activity using either a dominant-negative leucine zipper form of DLK or a dominant negative kinase-dead form of DLK in neurons resulted in induction of MAP2 protein production.
  • the induction of MAP2 expression indicates that neuronal growth and maturation are taking place, and further confirms that DLK knockdown indeed has a functional trophic effect on neurons.
  • GPCRs G-protein coupled receptors
  • SCH 202676 a sulphydryl-reactive compound that inhibits agonist and antagonist binding to G protein-coupled receptors, decreases NGF withdrawal-induced degeneration in DRGs ( FIGS. 49 and 50 ).
  • Pertussis toxin another inhibitor of G-protein signaling, also decreases degeneration in neurons following NGF withdrawal ( FIG. 51 ).
  • Additional cellular targets identified in the assays described herein, and which play a role in degeneration pathways, are members of the beta-catenin signaling pathway and its downstream targets (e.g., transcription factor 4, TCF4).
  • TCF4 transcription factor 4
  • the expression of a dominant negative form of TCF4 also mediates a decrease in neuron viability ( FIG. 52 , bottom right panel).
  • the beta-catenin signaling pathway is important for the maintenance of neuron viability.
  • Inhibitors that target the beta-catenin signaling pathway can be used to promote neuron degeneration (e.g., inhibitors of beta-catenin expression and inhibitors of TCF4 activity.)
  • activators or beta-catenin and TCF4 signaling may prevent axon degeneration and neuronal cell death.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Psychology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Plant Pathology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)

Abstract

The invention relates generally to treatment of neurological disorders and nervous system injuries. The invention specifically provides methods of using modulators of particular target proteins to modulate degeneration of neurons or portions thereof, such as axons.

Description

    FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • This invention relates generally to treatment of neurological disorders and nervous system injuries. The invention specifically concerns the use of modulators of particular target proteins and processes in methods to inhibit neuron and axon degeneration.
    • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Neuron or axon degeneration plays a central role in the proper development of the nervous system and is a hallmark of many neurodegenerative diseases including, for example, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), Alzheimer's disease, and Parkinson's disease, as well as traumatic injury to the brain and spinal cord. These diseases and injuries are devastating to patients and caregivers, and also result in great financial burdens, with annual costs currently exceeding several hundred billion dollars in the United States alone. Most current treatments for these diseases and conditions are inadequate. Adding to the urgency of the problems created by these diseases is the fact that many such diseases are age-related, and thus their incidence is increasing rapidly as population demographics change. There is a great need for the development of effective approaches to treating neurodegenerative diseases and nervous system injuries.
    • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The invention provides methods for inhibiting degeneration of a neuron or a portion thereof (e.g., the neuron cell body, an axon, or a dendrite). The methods involve administering to the neuron or portion thereof an agent that modulates: (i) the activity or expression of a target protein in the neuron or portion thereof, or (ii) a process in the neuron or portion thereof.
  • Examples of proteins that can be targeted in the methods of the invention include dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase (DLK), glycogen synthase kinase 3β (GSK3β), p38 mitogen-activated protein kinase (p38 MAPK), β-catenin, transcription factor 4 (TCF4), epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR), phosphoinositide 3-kinase (PI3K), cyclin-dependent kinase 5 (cdk5), adenylyl cyclase, c-Jun N-terminal kinase (JNK), BCL2-associated X protein (Bax), Ih channel, calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase (CaMKK), G-proteins, G-protein coupled receptors, transcription factor 4 (TCF4), or β-catenin, while examples of processes that can be targeted are transcription and protein synthesis.
  • The neuron or portion thereof can consist of or can be within a neuron selected from the group consisting of a cerebellar granule neuron, a dorsal root ganglion neuron, a cortical neuron, a sympathetic neuron, and a hippocampal neuron.
  • The agents can be, for example, inhibitors of the target protein or process. Further, the agents can be, for example, selected from the group consisting of antibodies, polypeptides, peptides, peptibodies, nucleic acid molecules, short interfering RNAs (siRNAs), polynucleotides, aptamers, small molecules, and polysaccharides. In the case of antibodies, the antibodies can be monoclonal antibodies, chimeric antibodies, humanized antibodies, human antibodies, or antibody fragments (e.g., an Fv, Fab, Fab′, or F(ab′)2 fragment). In the case of small molecules, the agent can be, for example, selected from the group consisting of MG132, SB 415286, GSK3β inhibitor I, GSK33 inhibitor VII, GSK3β inhibitor VIII, GSK3β inhibitor XII, Lithium Chloride, SB 202190, SB 239063, SB 239069, SB 203580, SB 203580 HCl, AG 556, AG 555, AG 494, PD168393, Tyrphostin B44, Tyrphostin B42 (AG 490), LY 294022, Anisomycin, Cycloheximide, Roscovitine, Forskolin, NKH 477, Actinomycin D, SP600125, Bax Channel Blocker, ZD7288, STO-609, bortezomid, disulfiram, pamapimod, gefitinib, erlotinib, lapatinib ditosylate, demeclocycline hydrochloride, gentamicin sulfate, neomycin sulfate, paromomycin sulfate, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • The neuron or portion thereof can be present in a subject, such as a human subject. The subject can, for example, have or be at risk of developing a disease or condition selected from the group consisting of (i) disorders of the nervous system, (ii) conditions of the nervous system that are secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system, (iii) injuries to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma, (iv) pain, (v) ocular-related neurodegeneration, (vi) memory loss, and (vii) psychiatric disorders.
  • Examples of disorders of the nervous system include amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), trigeminal neuralgia, glossopharyngeal neuralgia, Bell's Palsy, myasthenia gravis, muscular dystrophy, progressive muscular atrophy, primary lateral sclerosis (PLS), pseudobulbar palsy, progressive bulbar palsy, spinal muscular atrophy, inherited muscular atrophy, invertebrate disk syndromes, cervical spondylosis, plexus disorders, thoracic outlet destruction syndromes, peripheral neuropathies, prophyria, Alzheimer's disease, Huntington's disease, Parkinson's disease, Parkinson's-plus diseases, multiple system atrophy, progressive supranuclear palsy, corticobasal degeneration, dementia with Lewy bodies, frontotemporal dementia, demyelinating diseases, Guillain-Barré syndrome, multiple sclerosis, Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease, prion disease, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, Gerstmann-Sträussler-Scheinker syndrome (GSS), fatal familial insomnia (FFI), bovine spongiform encephalopathy, Pick's disease, epilepsy, and AIDS demential complex.
  • Examples of pain include chronic pain, fibromyalgia, spinal pain, carpel tunnel syndrome, pain from cancer, arthritis, sciatica, headaches, pain from surgery, muscle spasms, back pain, visceral pain, pain from injury, dental pain, neuralgia, such as neuogenic or neuropathic pain, nerve inflammation or damage, shingles, herniated disc, torn ligament, and diabetes.
  • Examples of conditions of the nervous system that are secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system include peripheral neuropathy or neuralgia caused by diabetes, cancer, AIDS, hepatitis, kidney dysfunction, Colorado tick fever, diphtheria, HIV infection, leprosy, lyme disease, polyarteritis nodosa, rheumatoid arthritis, sarcoidosis, Sjogren syndrome, syphilis, systemic lupus erythematosus, and amyloidosis.
  • Examples of injuries to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma include nerve damage caused by exposure to toxic compounds, heavy metals, industrial solvents, drugs, chemotherapeutic agents, dapsone, HIV medications, cholesterol lowering drugs, heart or blood pressure medications, and metronidazole. Additional examples include burn, wound, surgery, accidents, ischemia, prolonged exposure to cold temperature, stroke, intracranial hemorrhage, and cerebral hemorrhage.
  • Examples of psychiatric disorders include schizophrenia, delusional disorder, schizoaffective disorder, schizopheniform, shared psychotic disorder, psychosis, paranoid personality disorder, schizoid personality disorder, borderline personality disorder, anti-social personality disorder, narcissistic personality disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder, delirium, dementia, mood disorders, bipolar disorder, depression, stress disorder, panic disorder, agoraphobia, social phobia, post-traumatic stress disorder, anxiety disorder, and impulse control disorders.
  • Examples of ocular-related neurodegeneration include glaucoma, lattice dystrophy, retinitis pigmentosa, age-related macular degeneration (AMD), photoreceptor degeneration associated with wet or dry AMD, other retinal degeneration, optic nerve drusen, optic neuropathy, and optic neuritis. Examples of glaucoma include primary glaucoma, low-tension glaucoma, primary angle-closure glaucoma, acute angle-closure glaucoma, chronic angle-closure glaucoma, intermittent angle-closure glaucoma, chronic open-angle closure glaucoma, pigmentary glaucoma, exfoliation glaucoma, developmental glaucoma, secondary glaucoma, phacogenic glaucoma, glaucoma secondary to intraocular hemorrhage, traumatic glaucoma, neovascular glaucoma, drug-induced glaucoma, toxic glaucoma, and glaucoma associated with intraocular tumors, retinal deatchments, severe chemical burns of the eye, and iris atrophy.
  • Contacting of the neuron or portion thereof with the agent, according to the methods of the invention, can involve administering to a subject a pharmaceutical composition including the agent. The administering can be carried out by, for example, intravenous infusion; injection by intravenous, intraperitoneal, intracerebral, intramuscular, intraocular, intraarterial or intralesional routes; or topical or ocular application. Further, the methods of the invention can include administering to a subject one or more additional pharmaceutical agents.
  • In other examples, the neuron or portion thereof treated according to the methods of the invention is ex vivo or in vitro (e.g., a nerve graft or nerve transplant). The invention also includes methods of identifying agents for use in inhibiting degeneration of a neuron or a portion thereof. These methods involve contacting a neuron or portion thereof with a candidate agent in an assay of axon or neuron degeneration (e.g., anti-nerve growth factor (NGF) antibodies, serum deprivation/KCl reduction, and/or rotenone treatment). Detection of reduced degeneration of the neuron or portion thereof in the presence of the candidate agent, relative to a control, indicates the identification of an agent for use in inhibiting degeneration of a neuron or portion thereof. The candidate agent can be, for example, selected from the group consisting of antibodies, polypeptides, peptides, peptibodies, nucleic acid molecules, short interfering RNAs (siRNAs), polynucleotides, aptamers, small molecules, and polysaccharides.
  • The invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions and kits that contain one or more agent that can be used to inhibit degeneration of a neuron or a portion thereof, as described herein. The pharmaceutical compositions and kits can include, for example, one or more agent selected from the group consisting of MG132, SB 415286, GSK3β inhibitor I, GSK3f3 inhibitor VII, GSK3β inhibitor VIII, GSK3β inhibitor XII, Lithium Chloride, SB 202190, SB 239063, SB 239069, SB 203580, SB 203580 HCl, AG 556, AG 555, AG 494, PD168393, Tyrphostin B44, Tyrphostin B42 (AG 490), LY 294022, Anisomycin, Cycloheximide, Roscovitine, Forskolin, NKH 477, Actinomycin D, SP600125, Bax Channel Blocker, ZD7288, STO-609, bortezomid, disulfiram, pamapimod, gefitinib, erlotinib, lapatinib ditosylate, demeclocycline hydrochloride, gentamicin sulfate, neomycin sulfate, paromomycin sulfate, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof. The pharmaceutical compositions and kits can optionally include one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients. Further, the pharmaceutical compositions and kits can optionally include instructions for use of the compositions and kits in methods for inhibiting degeneration of a neuron or portion thereof.
  • In any of the methods, compositions, and kits of the invention, the agent may be a DLK signaling inhibitor (e.g., a siRNA molecule targeting DLK comprising, e.g., the sequence of, desirably, GCACTGAATTGGACAACTCTT (SEQ ID NO: 1), GAGTTGTCCAATTCAGTGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 2), GGACATCGCCTCCGCTGATTT (SEQ ID NO: 3), or ATCAGCGGAGGCGATGTCCTT (SEQ ID NO: 4), or GCAAGACCCGTCACCGAAATT (SEQ ID NO: 5), TTTCGGTGACGGGTCTTGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 6), GCGGTGTCCTGGTCTACTATT (SEQ ID NO: 7), or TAGTAGACCAGGACACCGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 8); an antibody, such as, antibody 317, antibody 318, antibody 319, antibody 320, antibody 321, antibody 322, an siRNA molecule targeting the JNK1 sequence of TTGGATGAAGCCATTAGACTA (SEQ ID NO: 9), an siRNA molecule targeting the JNK2 sequence of ACCTTTAATGGACAACATTAA (SEQ ID NO: 10) or AAGGATTAGCTTTGTATCATA (SEQ ID NO: 11), an siRNA targeting the JNK3 sequence of CCCGCATGTGTCTGTATTCAA (SEQ ID NO: 12), SP600125, JNKV inhibitor, JNKVIII inhibitor, SC-202673, SY-CC-401, SP600125, As601245, XG-102, myricetin, T278A DLK, S281A DLK, S152A DLK, and the leucine zipper domain of DLK), a GSK3β inhibitor (e.g., SB415287, GSK3β inhibitor I, GSK3β inhibitor VII, GSK3β inhibitor VIII, GSK3β inhibitor XII, and lithium chloride), an EGFR pathway inhibitor (e.g., erlotinib, tyrphostin B44, tyrphostin B42/AG490, AG555, AG494, PD168393, SB203580, SB239063, SB202190, SB239069, STO-609, and SP600125), or a G-protein inhibitor (e.g., SCG292676 and pertussis toxin).
  • In any of the above-described methods, the administering of an agent results in at least a 10% decrease (e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease) in one or more (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10) symptoms of a disorder of the nervous system; condition of the nervous system that is secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system; injury to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma; pain; ocular-related neurodegeneration; memory loss; or psychiatric disorder. Non-limiting examples of such symptoms include tremors, slowness of movement, ataxia, loss of balance, depression, decreased cognitive function, short-term memory loss, long-term memory loss, confusion, changes in personality, language difficulties, loss of sensory perception, sensitivity to touch, numbness in extremities, muscle weakness, muscle paralysis, muscle cramps, muscle spasms, significant changes in eating habits, excessive fear or worry, insomnia, delusions, hallucinations, fatigue, back pain, chest pain, digestive problems, headache, rapid heart rate, dizziness, blurred vision, shadows or missing areas of vision, metamorphopsia, impairment in color vision, decreased recovery of visual function after exposure to bright light, and loss in visual contrast sensitivity.
  • In any of the above-described methods, the administering results in at least a 10% decrease (e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease) in the likelihood of developing a disorder of the nervous system; condition of the nervous system that is secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system; injury to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma; pain; ocular-related neurodegeneration; memory loss; or psychiatric disorder, compared to a control population of subjects that are not administered said agent.
  • The invention also provides methods for activating degeneration of a neuron or portion thereof. These methods involve administering to a neuron or portion thereof an agent that modulates: (i) the activity of a target protein in the neuron or portion thereof, or (ii) a process in the neuron or portion thereof. The target protein can be, for example, selected from the group consisting of dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase (DLK), glycogen synthase kinase 3β (GSK3β), p38 mitogen-activated protein kinase (p38 MAPK), epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR), phosphoinositide 3-kinase (PI3K), cyclin-dependent kinase 5 (cdk5), adenylyl cyclase, c-Jun N-terminal kinase (JNK), BCL2-associated X protein (Bax), Ih channel, calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase (CaMKK), a G-protein, a G-protein coupled receptor, transcription factor 4 (TCF4), or β-catenin, while the process can be, for example, transcription or protein synthesis. Further, the agent can be, for example, an activator of the target protein or process (as is the case for the targets listed above, with the exception of adenylyl cyclase). In the methods of activiating degeneration of a neuron or portion thereof described above, the modulation of a target protein may be an increase in the activity or expression of GSK3β, a decrease in the activity or expression of β-catenin, and/or a loss in the activity or expression of TCF4.
  • The invention also provides purified antibodies that specifically bind to the phosphorylated form of DLK (e.g., antibody 318, antibody 319, antibody 320, antibody 321, or antibody 322) and inhibitory nucleic acids (e.g., siRNA) that comprise the sequence of, desirably, GCACTGAATTGGACAACTCTT (SEQ ID NO: 1), GAGTTGTCCAATTCAGTGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 2), GGACATCGCCTC CGCTGATTT (SEQ ID NO: 3), or ATCAGCGGAGGCGATGTCCTT (SEQ ID NO: 4), or GCAAGACCCGTCACCGAAATT (SEQ ID NO: 5), TTTCGGTGACGGGTC TTGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 6), GCGGTGTCCTGGTCTACTATT (SEQ ID NO: 7), or TAGTAGACCAGGACACCGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 8) that mediate a decrease in the expression of DLK.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 shows that treatment of neurons for 20 hours with anti-NGF antibodies results in axon degeneration. The two images in the top row show neurons visualized with Tuj1 (neuron specific β-tubulin) antibodies, with and without 20 hours of treatment with anti-NGF antibodies. The two images in the bottom row show neurons visualized with actin antibodies incubated with or without (control) 50 μg/ml anti-NGF antibodies.
  • FIG. 2 shows that varicosities form in neurons cultured with anti-NGF antibodies for 1, 3, 6, 9, 12, or 16 hours.
  • FIG. 3 shows that axons cultured with anti-NGF antibodies for 16 hours lack elongated mitochondria and show accumulation of mitochondria in varicosities.
  • FIG. 4 shows that, in axons cultured with anti-NGF antibodies for 0 to 48 hours, the microtubule network is not disassembled before the actin or neurofilament networks.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates Wallerian degeneration, which takes place in axons severed from neuron cell bodies (top panel; Raff et al., Science 296(5569):868-871, 2002), and shows that there is a significant delay in axon degeneration after lesion in Wallerian Degeneration Slow (WldS) mutants, as compared to controls (bottom panel; Araki et al., Science 305(5686):1010-1013, 2004).
  • FIGS. 6A-6D show that a proteasome inhibitor and a GSK inhibitor prevent axon degeneration in an anti-NGF antibody-based NGF withdrawal assay.
  • FIGS. 7A-7D show that a p38 MAPK inhibitor and an adenylyl cyclase activator prevent axon degeneration in an anti-NGF antibody-based NGF withdrawal assay.
  • FIGS. 8A-8D show that a transcription inhibitor and an EGFR kinase inhibitor prevent axon degeneration in an anti-NGF antibody-based NGF withdrawal assay.
  • FIGS. 9A-9D show that a JNK inhibitor and Bax Channel Blocker prevent axon degeneration in an anti-NGF antibody-based NGF withdrawal assay.
  • FIGS. 10A-10D show that an 111 channel blocker and a CAMKK inhibitor prevent axon degeneration in an anti-NGF antibody-based NGF withdrawal assay.
  • FIG. 11 is a graph showing the activities of inhibitors of GSK3 (30 μM SB415286), EGFR kinase (10 μM AG555), p38 MAPK (30 μM SB239063), CAMKK (15 μM STO-609), and JNK (10 μM SP600125) when added at the time of NGF withdrawal (t=0) or at 3, 6, 9, or 12 hours after NGF withdrawal.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a Campenot chamber, in which somal (cell body) and axonal environments are separated.
  • FIG. 13 shows that axon degeneration is localized and proceeds without apoptosis in Campenot chamber studies in which NGF withdrawal took place in the axon-containing chamber. Degeneration is visualized by tubulin immunofluorescence.
  • FIG. 14 shows that there are no signs of degeneration in the cell body compartment in the Campenot chamber-based assay illustrated in FIG. 13.
  • FIG. 15 shows that cell bodies (left panels), but not axons (right panels), in the presence of 30 μM SB415 (GSK inhibitor; GSKi) or 15 μM Act D (transcription inhibitor; TXNi) were protected from local degeneration.
  • FIG. 16 shows that axons (right panels), but not cell bodies (left panels), exposed to anti-NGF antibodies in the presence of 10 μM AG555 (EGFR inhibitor; EGFRi) or 30 μM SB239 (p38 inhibitor; p38i) were protected from local degeneration.
  • FIG. 17 is a graph showing quantification of axon degeneration in Campenot chambers in which anti-NGF antibodies were added to the axonal environment in the presence or absence (DMSO) of 15 μM actinomycin D (ActD), 30 μM SB415286 (SB415), 10 μM AG555, or 30 μM SB239063 (SB239) in the axonal (Axon) or the somal environment (Cell).
  • FIG. 18 is a model based on data from the screens described herein.
  • FIG. 19 shows that cell bodies appear smaller when NGF is removed from the axon compartment in a Campenot chamber.
  • FIG. 20 shows that many neurons deprived of NGF in the axon compartment have increased cleavage of caspase-3 and show nuclear condensation. (Neuron health may be affected by the membrane stain DiI.)
  • FIG. 21 is a graph showing GSK3 activity (as measured by decreased levels of phosphorylated GSK3β) at the start of NGF withdrawal (t=0) and after 1, 3, 6, 9, and 12 hours of NGF withdrawal in the cell body or axon compartment.
  • FIG. 22 is a graph showing JNK activity (as measured by increased levels of phosphorylated JNK) at the start of NGF withdrawal (t=0) and after 1, 3, 6, 9, and 12 hours of NGF withdrawal in the cell body or axon compartment.
  • FIG. 23 shows that a large number of axons with varicosities, as well as fragmented axons, were observed when the cell body inhibitors (30 μM SB415 (GSKi) and 15 μM Act D (TXNi)) were added to the cell body compartment. The addition of the axon inhibitors (10 μM AG555 (EGFRi) and 30 μM SB239 (p38i)) to the axon compartment showed fewer varicosities, and the axons seemed to go straight to fragmentation.
  • FIG. 24 shows that there may be more functional mitochondria, but still no elongated mitochondria, in NGF-deprived neurons treated with GSK, EGFR, and p38 inhibitors.
  • FIG. 25 shows that the GSK inhibitor SB415 can delay axon degeneration after lesion.
  • FIG. 26 shows that, after global NGF withdrawal, 10 μM or 25 μM GSK inhibitor blocks axon degeneration, but does not block cell death.
  • FIG. 27 shows that EGFR expression is increased in a section of SOD1 mouse (Tg) spinal cord stained with anti-EGFR antibodies (right panel), as compared to a non-transgenic control (NTG; left panel).
  • FIG. 28 shows that EGFR is normally expressed in neurons (motor neurons) and that the level of phosphorylated EGFR (pEGFR) is increased in ALS SOD1 mouse model (SOD1-Tg) compared to a non-transgenic control (Non-Tg).
  • FIG. 29 shows that the number of axons is decreased in the ALS SOD1 mouse model (SOD1-Tg) as compared to a non-transgenic control (Non-Tg), and that the phosphorylated EGFR (pEGFR) in the ALS SOD1 model partially co-localizes with axons.
  • FIG. 30 shows that the small molecule inhibitors of JNK (5 μM SP600125), CaMKK (5 μM STO-609), EGFR (1 μM or 10 μM AG555), p38 (5 μM SB239063), and GSK (10 μM SB415286) protect cerebellar granule neurons from serum deprivation/KCl reduction.
  • FIG. 31 shows that the small molecule inhibitors of EGFR, GSK, CaMKK, JNK, and p38 protect hippocampal neurons against 10 μM rotenone.
  • FIG. 32 shows that the small molecule inhibitors of EGFR, GSK, CaMKK, JNK, and p38 protect cortical neurons against 10 μM rotenone.
  • FIG. 33 shows that ErbB receptorsare detected on axons in dorsal root ganglion neurons by immunocytochemistry using antibodies specific for EGFR (top left panel), Her2 (top right panel), Her3 (bottom left panel), and Her4 (bottom right panel).
  • FIG. 34 shows that EGFR is expressed in axons of dorsal root ganglion neurons using immunocytochemistry.
  • FIG. 35 shows that 100 μg/mL EGF does not induce axon degeneration when added to dorsal root ganglion neurons and that addition of 100 μg/mL EGF induces phosphorylation of ERK in the treated neurons.
  • FIG. 36 shows that the EGFR ectodomain (50 μg/mL) does not block axon degeneration induced by NGF withdrawal in dorsal root ganglion neurons.
  • FIG. 37 shows that 3.4 μM, 11.1 μM, 33.3 μM, and 100 μM Tarceva® (erlotinib) blocks degeneration in dorsal spinal cord explants.
  • FIG. 38 shows that dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase (DLK) acts upstream from JNK in axon degeneration. Transfection of a plasmid encoding wild type DLK in 293 cells results in JNK activation (as measured by increased levels of phosphorylated JNK) compared to cells mock-transfected with a control plasmid or a plasmid encoding kinase-dead DLK (DLK-KD). Knockdown of DLK expression by siRNA in dorsal root ganglion neurons protects axons from degeneration induced by NGF withdrawal. The knockdown of DLK expression using DLK siRNA was confirmed using quantitative PCR as compared to a control siRNA (bottom right panel).
  • FIG. 39 shows that siRNA knockdown of DLK signaling delays local axon degeneration.
  • FIGS. 40A and 40B depict the results of experiments assessing the impact of DLK knockdown on NGF withdrawal-induced sympathetic neuron degeneration using phase contrast microscopy to visualize neurons.
  • FIG. 41 shows that knockdown of DLK expression using DLK siRNA (DLK) protects sympathetic neurons from camptothecin- and vincristine-induced apoptosis compared to neurons treated with a control siRNA (NT).
  • FIG. 42 shows that transfection of sympathetic neurons with a plasmid encoding kinase-dead DLK (KD) protects the neurons from NGF withdrawal-induced apoptosis compared to neurons transfected with a plasmid encoding wild type DLK (DLK).
  • FIGS. 43A-43D show the results of experiments assessing the binding specificities of the anti-pDLK antibodies described in Example 15A. FIG. 43A shows Western blot analyses of the binding of each of the anti-pDLK antibodies described herein to DLK, DLK in the presence of a dominant negative DLK, and control kinase MLK3. FIG. 43B shows immunofluorescent microscopic images of the binding of anti-pDLK antibodies 318 and 319 to cultured 293T cells transformed with DLK (upper two images) or control kinase MLK3 (lower two images). FIGS. 43C and 43D show Western blots using JNK and phospho-JNK antibodies.
  • FIGS. 44A and 44B show binding of anti-pDLK antibodies (antibody 318) to spinal cord sections in wild type and SOD1 mutant mice at end stage of disease (FIG. 43A) and at the onset of symptoms (FIG. 44B).
  • FIG. 44C depicts Western blot analyses of pDLK, pJNK, and pcJUN levels in human Alzheimer's disease patient cortical samples.
  • FIGS. 45A and 45B depict the results of experiments assessing the impact of DLK silencing on phosphorylation of JNK in response to NGF withdrawal stress in sympathetic neurons and dorsal root ganglion neurons; and vincristine-induced stress in cortical neurons, as described in Example 15C and Example 14B.
  • FIG. 46 shows the protective effect of JNK inhibitors on DRG explants subjected to NGF withdrawal stress, as described in Example 15C.
  • FIG. 47 depicts the results of experiments assessing the impact of silencing JNK1, JNK2, JNK3, individually, and JNK2 and JNK3 together in DRG neurons on axon degeneration observed upon NGF withdrawal stress, as described in Example 15C.
  • FIG. 48A shows the affect of DLK siRNA and control siRNA on the survival of cortical neurons.
  • FIG. 48B shows the affect of DLK siRNA and control siRNA on the survival of sympathetic neurons.
  • FIG. 49 is a set of immunomicrographs showing the ability of an inhibitor of G-coupled protein receptors (SCH 202676; 10 μM or 100 μM) to prevent NGF withdrawal-induced degeneration in DRGs.
  • FIG. 50 is a set of immunomicrographs showing the ability of SCH 202676 (0.1 μM or 1 μM) to prevent NGF withdrawal-induced degeneration in DRGs.
  • FIG. 51 is a set of immunomicrographs showing the ability of 0.01 μg/mL, 0.1 μg/mL, or 1 μg/mL pertussis toxin (an inhibitor of G-protein signaling) to prevent NGF withdrawal-induced degeneration in DRGs.
  • FIG. 52 is a set of immunomicrographs of rat hippocampal neurons showing the effect of expression of active mutant GSK (GSK3S9A), wild type TCF4, and mutant inactive TCF4 on degeneration.
    •  DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION A. Definitions
  • The term “target” is used herein to refer to proteins and processes that, when modulated by agents impacting their activities, inhibit or decrease axon degeneration. Most of the targets described herein, when contacted with an agent that inhibits their activity, inhibit or decrease axon degeneration, but the targets of the present invention also include proteins and processes that, when activated, inhibit or decrease axon degeneration. Exemplary targets of the invention are as follows: dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase (DLK), glycogen synthase kinase 3β (GSK3β), p38 mitogen-activated protein kinase (p38 MAPK), epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR), phosphoinositide 3 kinase (PI3K), cyclin-dependent kinase 5 (Cdk5), adenylyl cyclase, c-Jun N-terminal kinase (JNK), BCL2-associated X protein (Bax), Ih channel, calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase (CaMKK), a G-protein, a G-protein coupled receptor, transcription factor 4 (TCF4), β-catenin, transcription, and protein synthesis. A selection of common alternate designations for several of these targets is listed in Table 1. The targets include native, human sequences and homologues of these sequences from monkeys, mice, rats, and other non-human mammals, including all naturally occurring variants, such as alternatively spliced and allelic variants and isoforms, as well as soluble forms thereof. Exemplary, non-limiting sequence references are also provided in Table 1. Additional sequences, including sequences of various target isoforms, variants, homologues, and fragments may also be considered as targets, according to the present invention.
  • TABLE 1
    Exemplary Genbank
    Target Alternate names Accession numbers
    Gycogen synthase GSK-3β; GSK-3 beta 3; GSK3beta isoform; GSK-3α, CAG38748
    kinase 3 beta (GSK3β) GSK-3b2 NP_002084
    NP_063937
    β-catenin Catenin beta-1, beta-catenin, CTNNB, CTNB1 NP_001091679
    NP_001091680
    NP_001895
    TCF4 Transcription factor 4, E2-2, ITF2, SEF2, SEF2-1, SEF2- AAI25085
    1A, SEF2-1B NP_001077431
    NP_003190
    EAW63024
    EAW63023
    EAW63022
    EAW63021
    EAW63020
    EAW63019
    EAW63018
    EAW63017
    AAI25086
    Q9NQB0
    p38 Mitogen-activated p38alpha (MAPK14, CSBP2, Crk1, Csbp1, MGC102436, NP_002736.3
    protein kinase Mxi2, PRKM14, PRKM15, p38, p38-alpha, p38MAPK, NP_620407
    p38a, p38alpha, OTTMUSP00000021706; cytokine
    suppressive anti-inflammatory drug binding protein 1;
    mitogen activated protein kinase 14; p38 MAP kinase
    alpha; p38 MAPK; p38 alpha; tRNA synthetase cofactor
    p38)
    p38beta (MAPK11, DKFZp586C1322, P38b, Prkm11,
    Sapk2, Sapk2b, p38-2, p38beta2, mitogen activated
    protein kinase 11; protein kinase, mitogen activated
    kinase, 11, p38beta)
    p38delta (MAPK13, SAPK4,
    Serk4, OTTMUSP00000028863; SAPK/Erk/kinase 4;
    mitogen activated protein kinase 13; p38 delta MAP
    kinase)
    p38gamma (MAPK12, AW123708, Erk6, Prkm12,
    Sapk3, mitogen activated protein kinase 12; stress
    activated protein kinase 3)
    Epidermal growth factor EGFR (ERBB, ERBB1, HER1, PIG61, mENA, avian AAG35789
    receptor (EGFR) erythroblastic leukemia viral (v-erb-b) oncogene homolog; NP_005219
    cell growth inhibiting protein 40; cell proliferation- NP_958439
    inducing protein 61; epidermal growth factor receptor) NP_958440
    ErbB2 (CD340, HER-2, HER-2/neu, HER2, NEU, NGL, NP_958441
    TKR1, c-erb B2/neu protein; erbB-2; herstatin;
    neuroblastoma/glioblastoma derived oncogene homolog;
    v-erb-b2 avian erythroblastic leukemia viral oncogene
    homolog 2 (neuro/glioblastoma derived oncogene
    homolog))
    ErbB3 (ErbB-3, HER3, LCCS2, MDA-BF-1, MGC88033,
    c-erbB-3, c-erbB3, erbB3-S, p180-ErbB3, p45-sErbB3,
    p85-sErbB3, erbB-3; lethal congenital contracture
    syndrome 2; v-erb-b2 avian erythroblastic leukemia viral
    oncogene homolog 3)
    ErbB4 (HER4, MGC138404, p180erbB4, avian
    erythroblastic leukemia viral (v-erb-b2) oncogene
    homolog 4; receptor tyrosine-protein kinase erbB-4;
    tyrosine kinase-type cell surface receptor HER4; v-erb-a
    avian erythroblastic leukemia viral oncogene homolog-like
    4; v-erb-a erythroblastic leukemia viral oncogene homolog
    4)
    Mitogen-activated Jun N-terminal kinase (1); JNK; JNK1; PRKM8; SAPK1; NP_003609
    protein kinase 8 (JNK) JNK1A2; JNK21B1/2; mitogen-activated protein kinase-8; CAG38817
    MAPK8; JNK-46 AAH65516
    JNK-2; Jun N-terminal kinase (2); MAPK9; JNK2; SAPK; NP_002741
    p54a; JNK2A; JNK2B; PRKM9; JNK-55; JNK2BETA; NP_620634
    p54aSAPK; JNK2ALPHA NP_620635
    JNK-3; Jun N-terminal kinase (3); MAPK10; JNK3; NP_620637
    JNK3A; PRKM10; p493F12; FLJ12099; FLJ33785;
    MGC50974; p54bSAPK
    Calcium/calmodulin- CAMKKA; CAMKK alpha protein; CaM-KK alpha; NP_115670
    dependent protein CaM-kinase IV kinase; CaM-kinase kinase alpha; CaMKK NP_757343
    kinase beta (CaMKbeta) 1; CaMKK alpha; calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein NP_757344
    kinase kinase alpha; calcium/calmodulin-dependent NP_006540
    protein kinase 1 alpha; calcium/calmodulin-dependent NP_705719
    protein kinase kinase 1, alpha NP_705720
    CAMKKB; CAMKK beta protein; CaM-KK beta; NP_757363
    CaM-kinase kinase beta; CaMKK beta; NP_757364
    calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase beta; NP_757365
    calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase beta; NP_757380
    calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase 2,
    beta; calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase
    2, beta
    dual leucine zipper- DLK, DLK1, fetal antigen 1 (FA1), PG2, PREF-1, PREF1, NP_003827
    bearing kinase ZOG, delta-lika protein dlk, pG2, preadipocyte factor 1 ABC26857
    EAW81713
    EAW81712
    EAW81711
    AAH14015
    AAH13197
    AAH07741
    P80370
    Phosphoinositide 3 PI3-kinase, PI3K, Phosphotidylinositol 3 kinase CAA74194
    kinase
    Cyclin-dependent kinase Cdk5 NP_004926
    5
    Adenylyl cyclase Adenylyl cyclase 1 (ADCY1); 3′,5′-cyclic AMP synthetase NM_021116
    (1); ATP pyrophosphate-lyases (1); Ca2+/calmodulin- NP_065433
    activated adenylyl cyclase; Adenylate cyclase type I; Brain NP_001106
    adenylate cyclase 1
    Adenylyl cyclase 2 (ADCY2); 3′,5′-cyclic AMP synthetase
    (2); ATP pyrophosphate-lyase (2); adenylate cyclase type
    II; adenylate cyclase 2 (brain);
    Adenylate cyclase II; Type II adenylate cyclase
    Adenylyl cyclase 8 (ADCY8); ATP pyrophosphate-lyase
    8; adenylate cyclase type VIII; adenylyl cyclase 8;
    Ca(2+)/calmodulin-activated adenylyl cyclase;
    adenylate cyclase 8 (brain);
    adenylyl cyclase-8, brain
    adenylate cyclase 3 (Adcy3, AC3, mKIAA0511, adenylyl
    cyclase 3)
    adenylate cyclase 4 (Adcy4, KIAA4004, mKIAA4004)
    adenylate cyclase 5 (Adcy5, AW121902, Ac5)
    adenylate cyclase 6 (Adcy6, mKIAA0422)
    adenylate cyclase 7 (Adcy7, AA407758, MGC141539,
    adenylyl cyclase type VII)
    adenylate cyclase 9 (Adcy9, AW125421, D16Wsu65e,
    mKIAA0520)
    adenylate cyclase 10 (Adcy10, 4930431D04Rik,
    4931412F17, Sacy, sAC, OTTMUSP00000023839;
    soluble adenylyl cyclase; testicular soluble adenylyl
    cyclase)
    Ih Channel HCN1; hyperpolarization activated cyclic nucleotide-gated NP_066550
    potassium channel 1; brain cyclic nucleotide-gated channel NP_001185
    1; BCNG-1; HAC-2 NP_065948
    HCN2; hyperpolarization activated cyclic nucleotide-gated NP_005468
    potassium channel 2; brain cyclic nucleotide-gated channel
    2; BCNG-2; HAC-1
    HCN3; KIAA1535; MGC131493;
    OTTHUMP00000034062; hyperpolarization activated
    cyclic nucleotide-gated potassium channel 3;
    potassium/sodium hyperpolarization-activated cyclic
    nucleotide-gated
    channel 3
    HCN4; hyperpolarization activated cyclic
    nucleotide-gated potassium channel 4
    BCL2-associated X apoptosis regulator BAX; BCL2L4 Q07812
    protein (Bax) NP_004315
    NP_620116
    NP_620118
    NP_620119
    NP_620120
    Transcription Actinomycin D
  • “Isolated” when used to describe the various proteins disclosed herein, means a protein that has been identified and separated and/or recovered from a component of its natural environment. Contaminant components of its natural environment are materials that may interfere with uses (e.g., uses in therapy or antibody production) for the protein, and may include enzymes, hormones, and other proteinaceous or non-proteinaceous solutes. In various embodiments, the protein will be purified (i) to a degree sufficient to obtain at least 15 residues of N-terminal or internal amino acid sequence by use of a spinning cup sequenator, and/or (ii) to homogeneity by SDS-PAGE under non-reducing or reducing conditions using Coomassie blue or silver stain, and/or (iii) to homogeneity by mass spectroscopic or peptide mapping techniques. Isolated protein includes protein in situ within recombinant cells, as at least one component of the natural environment of the protein in question will not be present. Ordinarily, however, isolated protein will be prepared by at least one purification step. Isolated target proteins as described herein (or fragments thereof) can be used to make antibodies as described herein against the target proteins.
  • An “isolated” nucleic acid molecule is a nucleic acid molecule that is identified and separated from at least one contaminant nucleic acid molecule with which it is ordinarily associated in the natural source of the nucleic acid in question. An isolated nucleic acid molecule is other than in the form or setting in which it is found in nature. Isolated nucleic acid molecules therefore are distinguished from the nucleic acid molecules as they exist in natural cells. However, an isolated nucleic acid molecule includes nucleic acid molecules contained in cells that ordinarily express such nucleic acid molecule where, for example, the nucleic acid molecule is in a chromosomal location different from that of natural cells. An example of an isolated nucleic acid molecule is one lacking 5′ and/or 3′ flanking sequences with which it is contiguous in a natural setting.
  • As used herein, the terms “antagonist” and “inhibitor” refer to agents capable of blocking, neutralizing, inhibiting, abrogating, reducing and/or interfering with one or more of the activities of targets and/or reducing the expression of one or more target proteins (or the expression of nucleic acids encoding one or more target proteins) as described herein. They include, for example, antibodies, polypeptides, peptides, nucleic acid molecules, short interfering RNAs (siRNAs) and other inhibitory RNAs, small molecules (e.g., small inorganic molecules), polysaccharides, polynucleotides, aptamers, and peptibodies. Antagonists or inhibitors of particular targets as described herein (i.e., targets other than adenylyl cyclase) generally inhibit or decrease axon degeneration (e.g., by at least 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease compared to a control that is untreated with the inhibitor), as described herein. An inhibitor may decrease the activity and/or expression of a target protein by at least 10% (e.g., by at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, or even 100% decrease) as compared to the expression and/or activity of the target protein that is untreated with the inhibitor. A “DLK signaling inhibitor” is an agent capable of decreasing the activity (e.g., kinase activity) or the expression of a DLK protein (or a nucleic acid encoding a DLK protein) and/or deceasing the activity and/or expression of one or more proteins involved in a DLK signaling pathway (e.g., JNK1, JNK2, JNK3, cJun (e.g., cJun-63 and cJun-73), MKK4, and MKK7). Examples of DLK signaling inhibitors include siRNA molecules that decrease the expression of a nucleic acid encoding DLK (e.g., desirably, a sequence of GCACTGAATTGGACAACTCTT (SEQ ID NO: 1), GAGTTGTCCAATTCAGTGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 2), GGACATCGCCTCCGCTGA TTT (SEQ ID NO: 3), or ATCAGCGGAGGCGATGTCCTT (SEQ ID NO: 4), or GCAAGACCCGTCACCGAAATT (SEQ ID NO: 5), TTTCGGTGACGGG TCTTGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 6), GCGGTGTCCTGGTCTACTATT (SEQ ID NO: 7), or TAGTAGACCAGGACACCGCTT (SEQ ID NO: 8)), JNK1 (e.g., a sequence targeting the JNK1 sequence of TTGGATGAAGCCATTAGACTA (SEQ ID NO: 9)), JNK2 (e.g., a sequence targeting the JNK2 sequence of ACCTTTAATGGACAA CATTAA (SEQ ID NO: 10) or AAGGATTAGCTTTGTATCATA (SEQ ID NO: 11)), JNK3 (e.g., a sequence targeting the JNK3 sequence of CCCGCATGTGTCT GTATTCAA (SEQ ID NO: 12)), cJun (e.g., cJun-63 and cJun-73), MKK4, and MKK7. Additional examples of DLK inhibitors include antibodies that bind to a DLK protein (e.g., antibodies that recognize unphosphorylated or phosphorylated DLK, such as the 317, 318, 319, 320, 321, and 322 antibodies described herein), JNK1, JNK2, JNK3, cJun (e.g., cJun-63 and cJun-73), MKK4, and/or MKK7; inhibitors of JNK activity (e.g., SC-202673, SY-CC-401, SP600125, JNKV inhibitor, JNKVIII inhibitor, AS601245, and XG-102, as well as Catalog Nos. 420119, 420130, 420131, 420123, 420116, 420118, 420136, 420129, 420135, 420134, 420133, 420140, and 420128 from EMD Biosciences); inhibitors of MKK4 activity (e.g., myricetin and the inhibitors described in WO 04/058764), and inhibitors of MKK7 activity (e.g., inhibitors described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,195,894 and WO 04/002532). A DLK inhibitor may also be a dominant negative form or kinase-dead form of DLK protein (or a nucleic acid encoding a dominant negative form or a kinase-dead form of DLK protein), such as T278A DLK, S281A DLK, S152A DLK, and the leucine zipper domain of DLK.
  • Another example of an inhibitor is a “GSK3β inhibitor.” GSK3β inhibitor refers to an agent capable of decreasing the activity and/or expression of GSK3β (or a nucleic acid encoding GSK3β) and/or decreasing the activity and/or the expression of one or more proteins (or a nucleic acid encoding the one or more proteins) that activate GSK3β or the expression or activity of one or more substrates of GSK3β. Non-limiting examples of GSK3β inhibitors include SB415286, GSK3β inhibitor I, GSK3β inhibitor VII, GSK3β inhibitor VIII, GSK3β inhibitor XII, and lithium chloride.
  • An additional example of an inhibitor is a “G-protein inhibitor.” A G-protein inhibitor refers to an agent capable of decreasing the activity and/or expression of one or more G-proteins or G-protein coupled receptors (GPCRs) (or the expression of one or more nucleic acids encoding a G-protein or a GPCR), and/or decreasing the activity and/or expression of one or more proteins downstream of a G-protein or a GPCR. Non-limiting examples of a G-protein inhibitor include siRNA molecules that decrease the level of expression of a nucleic acid encoding a G-protein or a GPCR, an antibody or peptibody that binds to a G-protein or GPCR, or a small molecule or peptide that inhibits the activity of a G-protein or GPCR (e.g., SCH202676 and pertussis toxin).
  • Another example of an inhibitor is a “EGFR pathway inhibitor.” EGFR pathway inhibitor refers to an agent capable of decreasing the activity and/or expression of EGFR protein (or a nucleic acid encoding EGFR) and/or decreasing the activity and/or the expression of one or more proteins that function downstream of EGFR in the cell (e.g., p38 MAPK, CAMKK, and JNK). Non-limiting examples of EGFR pathway inhibitors include inhibitors of EGFR (e.g., erlotinib, tyrphostin B44, tyrphostin B42/AG 490, AG555, AG494, and PD168393), inhibitors of p38 MAPK (e.g., SB203580, SB239063, SB202190, and SB239069), inhibitors of CAMKK (e.g., STO-609), and inhibitors of JNK (e.g., SP600125). Additional examples of EGFR pathway inhibitors include antibodies and peptibodies that bind to EGFR, p38 MAPK, CAMKK, and/or JNK; and siRNA molecules that decrease the expression of one or more nucleic acids that encode a protein that functions downstream of EGFR in the cell (e.g., EGFR, p38 MAPK, CAMKK, and/or JNK).
  • An additional example of an inhibitor is a “CAMKβ inhibitor.” A CAMKβ inhibitor refers to an agent capable of decreasing the activity and/or expression of CAMKβ protein (or a nucleic acid encoding CAMKβ) and/or decreasing the activity and/or expression of one or more proteins that function downstream of CAMKβ in the cell. Non-limiting examples of CAMKβ inhibitors include antibodies and peptibodies that specifically bind to CAMKβ, and siRNA molecules that decrease the expression of one or more nucleic acids that encode CAMKβ or a protein that functions downstream of CAMKβ.
  • Another example of an inhibitor is a “cdk5 inhibitor.” A cdk5 inhibitor refers to an agent capable of decreasing the activity and/or expression of cdk5 protein (or a nucleic acid encoding cdk5) and/or decreasing the activity and/or expression of one or more proteins that function downstream of cdk5 in the cell. Non-limiting examples of cdk5 inhibitors include antibodies and peptibodies that specifically bind to cdk5, and siRNA molecules that decrease the expression of one or more nucleic acids that encode cdk5 or a protein that functions downstream of cdk5.
  • An additional example of an inhibitor is a “TCF4 inhibitor.” A TCF4 inhibitor refers to an agent capable of decreasing the activity and/or expression of TCF4 protein (or a nucleic acid encoding TCF4) and/or decreasing the activity and/or expression of a gene regulated by TCF4 protein. Non-limiting examples of TCF4 inhibitors include antibodies and peptibodies that specifically bind to TCF4 or a protein encoded by a gene regulated by TCF4, and siRNA molecules that decrease the expression of one or more nucleic acids that encode TCF4 or decrease the expression of an mRNA encoded by a gene regulated by TCF4.
  • An additional example of an inhibitor is a “β-catenin inhibitor.” A β-catenin refers to an agent capable of decreasing the activity and/or expression of β-catenin protein (or a nucleic acid encoding β-catenin) and/or decreasing the activity and/or expression of a gene regulated by β-catenin protein. Non-limiting examples of β-catenin inhibitors include antibodies and peptibodies that specifically bind to β-catenin or a protein encoded by a gene regulated by β-catenin, and siRNA molecules that decrease the expression of one or more nucleic acids that encode β-catenin or decrease the expression of an mRNA encoded by a gene regulated by β-catenin.
  • An additional example of an inhibitor is an “adenyl cyclase inhibitor.” An adenyl cyclase inhibitor refers to an agent capable of decreasing the activity and/or expression of adenyl cyclase protein (or a nucleic acid encoding adenyl cyclase) and/or decreasing the activity and/or expression of one or more proteins that function downstream of adenyl cyclase in the cell. Non-limiting examples of adenyl cyclase inhibitors include antibodies and peptibodies that specifically bind to adenyl cyclase, and siRNA molecules that decrease the expression of one or more nucleic acids that encode adenyl cyclase or a protein that functions downstream of adenyl cyclase. Additional examples of adenyl cyclase inhibitors include small molecules that inhibit the activity of adenyl cyclase (e.g., forksolin and NKH 477).
  • The terms “agonist” or “activator” as used herein refer to agents capable of increasing or activating one or more of the activities of targets as described herein, and include, for example, antibodies, polypeptides, peptides, nucleic acid molecules, short interfering RNAs (siRNAs) or other inhibitory RNAs, small molecules (e.g., small inorganic molecules), polysaccharides, polynucleotides, aptamers, and peptibodies. Agonists or activators of adenylyl cyclase as described herein generally inhibit or decrease axon degeneration, while agonists or activators of the other particular targets described herein can be considered to activate axon degeneration.
  • The term “antibody” herein is used in the broadest sense understood in the art and specifically covers, for example, intact antibodies, monoclonal antibodies, polyclonal antibodies, monospecific antibodies, multispecific antibodies (e.g., bispecific antibodies) formed from at least two intact antibodies, antibody fragments, provided that they exhibit the desired biological activity, and intrabodies.
  • The term “monoclonal antibody” as used herein refers to an antibody obtained from a population of substantially homogeneous antibodies, i.e., the individual antibodies comprising the population are identical except for possible naturally occurring mutations that may be present in minor amounts. Monoclonal antibodies are highly specific, being directed against a single antigenic site or epitope. Furthermore, in contrast to polyclonal antibody preparations, which include different antibodies directed against different determinants (epitopes), each monoclonal antibody is directed against a single determinant on an antigen. In addition to their specificity, monoclonal antibodies are advantageous in that they may be synthesized so that they are uncontaminated by other antibodies. The modifier “monoclonal” indicates the character of the antibody as being obtained from a substantially homogeneous population of antibodies, and is not to be construed as requiring production of the antibody by any particular method. For example, the monoclonal antibodies to be used in accordance with the present invention may be made by the hybridoma method first described by Kohler et al., Nature, 256:495 (1975), or may be made by recombinant DNA methods (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567). The “monoclonal antibodies” may also be isolated from phage antibody libraries using, for example, the techniques described in Clackson et al., Nature 352:624-628, 1991, and Marks et al., J. Mol. Biol. 222:581-597, 1991.
  • Antibodies specifically include “chimeric” antibodies in which a portion of the heavy and/or light chain is identical with or homologous to corresponding sequences in antibodies derived from a particular species or belonging to a particular antibody class or subclass, while the remainder of the chain(s) is identical with or homologous to corresponding sequences in antibodies derived from another species or belonging to another antibody class or subclass, as well as fragments of such antibodies, provided that they exhibit the desired biological activity (U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567; and Morrison et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 81:6851-6855, 1984). Chimeric antibodies of interest herein include primatized antibodies comprising variable domain antigen-binding sequences derived from a non-human primate (e.g., Old World Monkey, Ape, etc.) and human constant region sequences.
  • “Antibody fragments” comprise a portion of an intact antibody, such as the antigen-binding or variable region thereof. Examples of antibody fragments include Fab, Fab′, F(ab′)2, and Fv fragments; diabodies; linear antibodies; and single-chain antibody molecules.
  • The term “multispecific antibody” is used in the broadest sense and specifically covers an antibody comprising a heavy chain variable domain (VH) and a light chain variable domain (VL), where the VHVL unit has polyepitopic specificity (i.e., is capable of binding to more than one different epitope on one or more biological molecules). If the multispecific antibody binds to two epitopes, it can be designated as a “bispecific antibody.” Multispecific antibodies include, but are not limited to, full length antibodies, antibodies having two or more VL and VH domains, antibody fragments such as Fab, Fv, dsFv, scFv, diabodies, bispecific diabodies and triabodies, antibody fragments that have been linked covalently or non-covalently. “Polyepitopic specificity” refers to the ability to specifically bind to two or more different epitopes on the same or different target(s).
  • An “intact” antibody is one that comprises an antigen-binding variable region as well as a light chain constant domain (CO and heavy chain constant domains, C H1, C H2, and C H3. The constant domains may be native sequence constant domains (e.g., human native sequence constant domains) or amino acid sequence variants thereof. In one example, the intact antibody has one or more effector functions.
  • “Humanized” forms of non-human (e.g., rodent) antibodies are chimeric antibodies that contain minimal sequence derived from non-human immunoglobulin. For the most part, humanized antibodies are human immunoglobulins (recipient antibody) in which residues from a hypervariable region of the recipient are replaced by residues from a hypervariable region of a non-human species (donor antibody) such as mouse, rat, rabbit, or nonhuman primate having the desired specificity and affinity. In some instances, framework region (FR) residues of the human immunoglobulin are replaced by corresponding non-human residues. Furthermore, humanized antibodies may comprise residues that are not found in the recipient antibody or in the donor antibody. These modifications may be made to further refine antibody performance. In general, the humanized antibody will comprise substantially all of at least one, and typically two, variable domains (Fab, Fab′, F(ab′)2, Fabc, Fv), in which all or substantially all of the hypervariable loops correspond to those of a non-human immunoglobulin and all or substantially all of the FRs are those of a human immunoglobulin sequence. The humanized antibody optionally also will comprise at least a portion of an immunoglobulin constant region (Fc), typically that of a human immunoglobulin. For further details see, for example, Jones et al., Nature 321:522-525, 1986; Riechmann et al., Nature 332:323-329, 1988; and Presta, Curr. Op. Struct. Biol. 2:593-596, 1992.
  • The term “hypervariable region” when used herein refers to the regions of an antibody variable domain that are hypervariable in sequence and/or form structurally defined loops. The hypervariable region comprises amino acid residues from a “complementarity determining region” or “CDR” (i.e., residues 24-34, 50-56, and 89-97 in the light chain variable domain and 31-35, 50-65, and 95-102 in the heavy chain variable domain; Kabat et al., Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest, 5th Ed. Public Health Service, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Md., 1991) and/or those residues from a “hypervariable loop” (i.e., residues 26-32, 50-52, and 91-96 in the light chain variable domain and 26-32, 53-55, and 96-101 in the heavy chain variable domain; Chothia et al., J. Mol. Biol. 196:901-917, 1987). In both cases, the variable domain residues are numbered according to Kabat et al., supra, as discussed in more detail below. “Framework” or “FR” residues are those variable domain residues other than the residues in the hypervariable regions as herein defined.
  • A “parent antibody” or “wild-type” antibody is an antibody comprising an amino acid sequence that lacks one or more amino acid sequence alterations compared to an antibody variant as herein disclosed. Thus, the parent antibody generally has at least one hypervariable region that differs in amino acid sequence from the amino acid sequence of the corresponding hypervariable region of an antibody variant. The parent polypeptide may comprise a native sequence (i.e., a naturally occurring) antibody (including a naturally occurring allelic variant), or an antibody with pre-existing amino acid sequence modifications (such as insertions, deletions, and/or other alterations) of a naturally occurring sequence. The terms “wild type,” “WT,” “wt,” and “parent” or “parental” antibody may be used interchangeably.
  • As used herein, “antibody variant” or “variant antibody” refers to an antibody that has an amino acid sequence that differs from the amino acid sequence of a parent antibody. In one example, the antibody variant comprises a heavy chain variable domain or a light chain variable domain having an amino acid sequence that is not found in nature. Such variants necessarily have less than 100% sequence identity or similarity with the parent antibody. In one embodiment, the antibody variant will have an amino acid sequence from about 75% to less than 100% amino acid sequence identity or similarity with the amino acid sequence of either the heavy or light chain variable domain of the parent antibody, for example, about 80% to less than 100%, from about 85% to less than 100%, from about 90% to less than 100%, or from about 95% to less than 100%. The antibody variant is generally one that comprises one or more amino acid alterations in or adjacent to one or more hypervariable regions thereof.
  • An “amino acid alteration” refers to a change in the amino acid sequence of a predetermined amino acid sequence. Exemplary alterations include insertions, substitutions, and deletions. An “amino acid substitution” refers to the replacement of an existing amino acid residue in a predetermined amino acid sequence with another, different amino acid residue.
  • A “replacement” amino acid residue refers to an amino acid residue that replaces or substitutes another amino acid residue in an amino acid sequence. The replacement residue may be a naturally occurring or non-naturally occurring amino acid residue.
  • An “amino acid insertion” refers to the introduction of one or more amino acid residues into a predetermined amino acid sequence. The amino acid insertion may comprise a “peptide insertion” in which case a peptide comprising two or more amino acid residues joined by peptide bond(s) is introduced into the predetermined amino acid sequence. Where the amino acid insertion involves insertion of a peptide, the inserted peptide may be generated by random mutagenesis such that it has an amino acid sequence that does not exist in nature. An amino acid alteration “adjacent a hypervariable region” refers to the introduction or substitution of one or more amino acid residues at the N-terminal and/or C-terminal end of a hypervariable region, such that at least one of the inserted or replacement amino acid residue(s) forms a peptide bond with the N-terminal or C-terminal amino acid residue of the hypervariable region in question.
  • A “naturally occurring amino acid residue” is one encoded by the genetic code, generally selected from the group consisting of: alanine (Ala); arginine (Arg); asparagine (Asn); aspartic acid (Asp); cysteine (Cys); glutamine (Gln); glutamic acid (Glu); glycine (Gly); histidine (His); isoleucine (Ile): leucine (Leu); lysine (Lys); methionine (Met); phenylalanine (Phe); proline (Pro); serine (Ser); threonine (Thr); tryptophan (Trp); tyrosine (Tyr); and valine (Val).
  • A “non-naturally occurring amino acid residue” as referred to herein is an amino acid residue other than those naturally occurring amino acid residues listed above, which is able to covalently bind adjacent amino acid residue(s) in a polypeptide chain. Examples of non-naturally occurring amino acid residues include norleucine, ornithine, norvaline, homoserine, and other amino acid residue analogues such as those described in Ellman et al., Meth. Enzym. 202:301-336, 1991. To generate such non-naturally occurring amino acid residues, the procedures of Noren et al., Science 244:182, 1989, and Ellman et al., supra, can be used. Briefly, these procedures involve chemically activating a suppressor tRNA with a non-naturally occurring amino acid residue followed by in vitro transcription and translation of the RNA.
  • Throughout this disclosure, reference is made to the numbering system from Kabat, E. A., et al., Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest (National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Md., 1987 and 1991). In these compendiums, Kabat lists many amino acid sequences for antibodies for each subclass, and lists the most commonly occurring amino acid for each residue position in that subclass. Kabat uses a method for assigning a residue number to each amino acid in a listed sequence, and this method for assigning residue numbers has become standard in the field. The Kabat numbering scheme is followed in this description. For purposes of this invention, to assign residue numbers to a candidate antibody amino acid sequence that is not included in the Kabat compendium, one follows the following steps. Generally, the candidate sequence is aligned with any immunoglobulin sequence or any consensus sequence in Kabat. Alignment may be done by hand or by computer using commonly accepted computer programs, such as the Align 2 program. Alignment may be facilitated by using some amino acid residues that are common to most Fab sequences. For example, the light and heavy chains each typically have two cysteines that have the same residue numbers; in VL domain the two cysteines are typically at residue numbers 23 and 88, and in the VH domain the two cysteine residues are typically at numbers 22 and 92. Framework residues generally, but not always, have approximately the same number of residues, however the CDRs will vary in size. For example, in the case of a CDR from a candidate sequence that is longer than the CDR in the sequence in Kabat to which it is aligned, typically suffixes are added to the residue number to indicate the insertion of additional residues. For candidate sequences that, for example, align with a Kabat sequence for residues 34 and 36 but have no residue between them to align with residue 35, the number 35 is simply not assigned to a residue.
  • As used herein, an antibody with a “high-affinity” is an antibody having a KD, or dissociation constant, in the nanomolar (nM) range or better. A KD in the “nanomolar range or better” may be denoted by X nM, where X is a number less than about 10.
  • The term “filamentous phage” refers to a viral particle capable of displaying a heterogenous polypeptide on its surface and includes, without limitation, f1, fd, Pf1, and M13. The filamentous phage may contain a selectable marker such as tetracycline (e.g., “fd-tet”). Various filamentous phage display systems are well known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., Zacher et al., Gene 9:127-140, 1980, Smith et al., Science 228:1315-1317, 1985; and Parmley et al., Gene 73:305-318, 1988).
  • The term “panning” is used to refer to the multiple rounds of a screening process that is used in the identification and isolation of phages carrying compounds, such as antibodies, with high affinity and specificity to a target.
  • The term “short-interfering RNA (siRNA)” refers to small double-stranded RNAs that interfere with gene expression. siRNAs are mediators of RNA interference, the process by which double-stranded RNA silences homologous genes. siRNAs typically are comprised of two single-stranded RNAs of about 15-25 nucleotides in length that form a duplex, which may include single-stranded overhang(s). Processing of the double-stranded RNA by an enzymatic complex, for example, polymerases, results in cleavage of the double-stranded RNA to produce siRNAs. The antisense strand of the siRNA is used by an RNA interference (RNAi) silencing complex to guide mRNA cleavage, thereby promoting mRNA degradation. To silence a specific gene using siRNAs, for example, in a mammalian cell, a base pairing region is selected to avoid chance complementarity to an unrelated mRNA. RNAi silencing complexes have been identified in the art, such as, for example, by Fire et al., Nature 391:806-811, 1998, and McManus et al., Nat. Rev. Genet. 3(10):737-747, 2002.
  • The term “interfering RNA (RNAi)” is used herein to refer to a double-stranded RNA that results in catalytic degradation of specific mRNAs, and thus can be used to inhibit/lower expression of a particular gene.
  • As used herein, the term “disorder” in general refers to any condition that would benefit from treatment with the agents or inhibitors of the present invention, including any disease or disorder that can be treated by effective amounts of inhibitors of the targets described herein (or activators, in the case of adenylyl cyclase). Non-limiting examples of disorders to be treated herein include those listed in section E of the present application, below.
  • The terms “treating,” “treatment,” and “therapy” as used herein refer to curative therapy, prophylactic therapy, and preventative therapy. Consecutive treatment or administration refers to treatment on at least a daily basis without interruption in treatment by one or more days. Intermittent treatment or administration, or treatment or administration in an intermittent fashion, refers to treatment that is not consecutive, but rather cyclic in nature. Treatment according to the methods of the invention can result in complete relief or cure from a disease or condition, or partial amelioration of one or more symptoms of the disease or condition, and can be temporary or permanent.
  • The phrases “preventing axon degeneration,” “preventing neuron degeneration,” “inhibiting axon degeneration,” or “inhibiting neuron degeneration” as used herein include (i) the ability to inhibit or prevent axon or neuron degeneration in patients newly diagnosed as having a neurodegenerative disease or at risk of developing a new neurodegenerative disease and (ii) the ability to inhibit or prevent further axon or neuron degeneration in patients who are already suffering from, or have symptoms of, a neurodegenerative disease. Preventing axon or neuron degeneration includes decreasing or inhibiting axon or neuron degeneration, which may be characterized by complete or partial inhibition of neuron or axon degeneration. This can be assessed, for example, by analysis of neurological function. The above-listed terms also include in vitro and ex vivo methods. Further, the phrases “preventing neuron degeneration” and “inhibiting neuron degeneration” include such inhibition with respect to the entire neuron or a portion thereof, such as the neuron cell body, axons, and dendrites. The administration of one or more agent as described herein may result in at least a 10% decrease (e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, or even 100% decrease) in one or more (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9) symptoms of a disorder of the nervous system; a condition of the nervous system that is secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system; an injury to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma, pain; an ocular-related neurodegeneration; memory loss; or a psychiatric disorder (e.g., tremors, slowness of movement, ataxia, loss of balance, depression, decreased cognitive function, short-term memory loss, long-term memory loss, confusion, changes in personality, language difficulties, loss of sensory perception, sensitivity to touch, numbness in extremities, muscle weakness, muscle paralysis, muscle cramps, muscle spasms, significant changes in eating habits, excessive fear or worry, insomnia, delusions, hallucinations, fatigue, back pain, chest pain, digestive problems, headache, rapid heart rate, dizziness, blurred vision, shadows or missing areas of vision, metamorphopsia, impairment in color vision, decreased recovery of visual function after exposure to bright light, and loss in visual contrast sensitivity) in a subject or population compared to a control subject or population that does not receive the one or more agent described herein. The administration of one or more agent as described herein may result in at least a 10% decrease (e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease) in the number of neurons (or neuron bodies, axons, or dendrites thereof) that degenerate in a neuron population or in a subject compared to the number of neurons (or neuron bodies, axons, or dendrites thereof) that degenerate in neuron population or in a subject that is not administered the one or more of the agents described herein. The administration of one or more agent as described herein may result in at least a 10% decrease (e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease) in the likelihood of developing a disorder of the nervous system; a condition of the nervous system that is secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system; an injury to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma, pain; an ocular-related neurodegeneration; memory loss; or a psychiatric disorder in a subject or a subject population compared to a control subject or population not treated with the one or more agent described herein.
  • The term “administering” as used herein refers to contacting a neuron or portion thereof with an inhibitor as described herein. This includes administration of the inhibitor to a subject in which the neuron or portion thereof is present, as well as introducing the inhibitor into a medium in which a neuron or portion thereof is cultured.
  • The term “neuron” as used herein denotes nervous system cells that include a central cell body or soma, and two types of extensions or projections: dendrites, by which, in general, the majority of neuronal signals are conveyed to the cell body, and axons, by which, in general, the majority of neuronal signals are conveyed from the cell body to effector cells, such as target neurons or muscle. Neurons can convey information from tissues and organs into the central nervous system (afferent or sensory neurons) and transmit signals from the central nervous systems to effector cells (efferent or motor neurons). Other neurons, designated interneurons, connect neurons within the central nervous system (the brain and spinal column). Certain specific examples of neuron types that may be subject to treatment according to the invention include cerebellar granule neurons, dorsal root ganglion neurons, and cortical neurons.
  • The term “mammal” as used herein refers to any animal classified as a mammal, including humans, higher non-human primates, rodents, and domestic and farm animals, such as cows, horses, dogs, and cats. In one embodiment of the invention, the mammal is a human.
  • Administration “in combination with” one or more further therapeutic agents includes simultaneous (concurrent) and consecutive administration, in any order.
  • An “effective amount” is an amount sufficient to effect beneficial or desired therapeutic (including preventative) results. An effective amount can be administered in one or more administrations.
  • As used herein, the expressions “cell,” “cell line,” and “cell culture” are used interchangeably and all such designations include progeny. Thus, the words “transformants” and “transformed cells” include the primary subject cell and cultures derived therefrom without regard for the number of transfers. It is also understood that all progeny may not be precisely identical in DNA content, due to deliberate or inadvertent mutations. The term “progeny” refers to any and all offspring of every generation subsequent to an originally transformed cell or cell line. Mutant progeny that have the same function or biological activity as screened for in the originally transformed cell are included.
  • A “small molecule” is defined herein to have a molecular weight below about 1000 Daltons, for example, below about 500 Daltons. Small molecules may be organic or inorganic, and may be isolated from, for example, compound libraries or natural sources, or may be obtained by derivatization of known compounds.
  • “Aptamers” are nucleic acid molecules that form tertiary structures that specifically bind to a target molecule, such as the targets described herein. The generation and therapeutic use of aptamers are well established in the art (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,475,096). Aptamers used in the invention can include modified nucleotides (e.g., nucleic acid analogs or derivatives) that are stable from degradation in vivo. At a minimum, the nucleic acid molecules are designed to be sufficiently stable in vivo, for a sufficient length of time, to allow therapeutic action to take place prior to degradation and/or elimination. As non-limiting examples, such nucleotide analogs can be selected from the group consisting of phosphorothioate, boranophosphate, methyl-phosphonate, and 2′-O-methyl analogs, and analogs thereof. As a specific example, the analog can be 2′-deoxy-2′-fluoro-RNA (2′-F-RNA).
  • “Peptibodies” are peptide sequences linked to an amino acid sequence encoding a fragment or portion of an immunoglobulin molecule. The peptide sequences may be derived from randomized sequences selected by any method for specific binding, including but not limited to, phage display technology. In one embodiment, the selected polypeptide may be linked to an amino acid sequence encoding the Fc portion of an irnmunoglobulin. Peptibodies that specifically bind to and modulate the targets described herein, leading to inhibition of neuron degeneration, are also useful in the methods of the invention.
  • The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” is used herein to refer to those salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, Berge et al. describe pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharm. Sci. 66:1-19, 1977. The salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds of the invention or separately by reacting the free base group with a suitable organic acid. Representative acid addition salts include acetate, adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphersulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, hemisulfate, heptonate, hexanoate, hydrobromide, hydrochloride, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, phosphate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, stearate, succinate, sulfate, tartrate, thiocyanate, toluenesulfonate, undecanoate, valerate salts and the like. Representative alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium and the like, as well as nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations, including, but not limited to ammonium, tetramethylammonium, tetraethylammonium, methylamine, dimethylamine, trimethylamine, triethylamine, ethylamine and the like.
    • B. Screening Assays to Identify and Characterize Inhibitors of Neuron Degeneration
  • The invention is based in part on the discovery that certain modulators of the target proteins and activities listed in Table 1 in section A, above (dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase (DLK), glycogen synthase kinase 3β (GSK3β), p38 mitogen-activated protein kinase (p38 MAPK), epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR), phosphoinositide 3 kinase (PI3K), cyclin-dependent kinase 5 (Cdk5), adenylyl cyclase, c-Jun N-terminal kinase (JNK), BCL2-associated X protein (Bax), Ih channel, calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase (CaMKK), a G-protein, a G-protein coupled receptor, transcription factor 4 (TCF4), β-catenin, transcription, and protein synthesis) are effective inhibitors of neuron (such as axon) degeneration. The modulators function as inhibitors of the target proteins and activities, with the exception of the modulator of adenylyl cyclase, which is an activator. The inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration are referred to as “inhibitors” herein, regardless of their effects on their respective targets, as they are inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration. They are also referred to herein as “agents” that modulate the activity of a target protein or activity in the neuron or axon, leading to inhibition of neuron or axon degeneration.
  • The invention includes methods of inhibiting neuron or axon degeneration by use of inhibitors as described herein. As described in further detail below, the methods can be carried out in vivo, such as in the treatment of neurological disorders or injuries to the nervous system. The methods can also be carried out in vitro or ex vivo, such as in laboratory studies of neuron function and in the treatment of nerve grafts or transplants. These methods are described further below, after a description of methods for identifying and testing inhibitors used in the invention.
  • Inhibitors that can be used in the invention include those listed in Table 2 (section C, below), which have been shown in assays described herein to prevent neuron or axon degeneration, as well as additional, known inhibitors of the targets described herein (see, e.g., Table 3). Additional inhibitors for use in the invention can be identified using standard screening methods specific for each target, as summarized below. These assays can also be used to confirm the activities of derivatives of compounds found to have a desired activity, which are designed according to standard medicinal chemistry approaches. After an inhibitor (or activator, in the case of adenylyl cyclase) is confirmed as being active with respect to a particular target, the inhibitors can be tested in models of neuron or axon degeneration, as described herein, as well as in appropriate animal model systems.
  • Exemplary assays for identifying inhibitors of the targets listed in Table 1, as well as for identifying and characterizing additional inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration, which can be used in the methods of the invention, are described briefly as follows.
  • i) Cell-Based and In Vitro Assays for Inhibitors of Neuron or Axon Degeneration
  • Assays for confirming that an inhibitor of the targets described herein also inhibits neuron or axon degeneration, as well as for identifying additional inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration, are described in detail in the Examples, below, and are briefly summarized as follows. These assays include (i) anti-Nerve Growth Factor (anti-NGF) antibody assays, (ii) serum deprivation/potassium chloride (KCl) reduction assays, (iii) rotenone degeneration assays, and (iv) vincristine degeneration assays. Additional assays for assessing neuron or axon degeneration that are known in the art can also be used in the invention.
  • NGF is a small, secreted protein involved in differentiation and survival of target neurons. Treatment of cultured neurons with NGF results in proliferation of axons, while treating such neurons with anti-NGF antibodies results in axon degeneration. Treatment of neurons with anti-NGF antibodies also leads to several different morphological changes that are detectable by microscopy, and which can be monitored to observe the effects of candidate inhibitors. These changes, which are described further in Example 1 and illustrated in, for example, FIGS. 1-4, include varicosity formation, loss of elongated mitochondria, accumulation of mitochondria in varicosities, cytoskeletal disassembly, and axon fragmentation. Agents that are found to counter any of the morphological changes induced by anti-NGF antibodies can be considered as candidate inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration, which may, if desired, be tested in additional systems, such as those described herein.
  • The serum deprivation/KCl reduction assay is based on the use of cultures of cerebellar granule neurons (CGN) isolated from mouse (e.g., P7 mouse) brains. In this assay, the neurons are cultured in a medium including KCl and then are switched to medium containing less KCl (Basal Medium Eagles including 5 mM KCl), which induces neuron degeneration. Agents that are found to block or reduce neuron degeneration upon KCl withdrawal, which can be detected by, for example, analysis of images of fixed neurons stained with a neuronal marker (e.g., anti-class III beta-tubulin) can be considered as candidate inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration, which may, if desired, be tested in additional systems, such as those described herein.
  • Another model of neuron or axon degeneration involves contact of cultured neurons with rotenone (2R,6aS,12aS)-1,2,6,6a,12,12a-hexahydro-2-isopropenyl-8,9-dimethoxychromeno[3,4-b] furo(2,3-h)chromen-6-one), which is a pesticide and insecticide that naturally occurs in the roots and stems of several plants, interferes with mitochondrial electron transport, and causes Parkinson's disease-like symptoms when injected into rats. Agents that are found to block or reduce degeneration of neurons cultured in the presence of rotenone, which can be detected by, for example, analysis of images of fixed neurons stained with, e.g., an antibody against neuron specific beta III tubulin, can be considered as candidate inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration, which may, if desired, be tested in additional systems, such as those described herein.
  • An additional model of neuron or axon degeneration involves contact of cultured neurons with vincristine, an alkaloid that binds to tubulin dimers and prevents assemble of microtubule structures. Agenst that are found to block or reduce degeneration of neurons cultured in the presence of vincristine, which can be detected by, for example, analysis of images of fixed neurons stained with, e.g., an antibody against neuron specific beta III tubulin, can be considered as candidate inhibitbors of neuron or axon degeneration, which may, if desired, be tested in additional systems, such as those described herein.
  • In addition to the assays described above, for which the read-out is inhibition of neuron or axon degeneration, the invention also employs assays directed at detecting inhibitors of the targets listed in Table 1, for which the read-out is, for example, target binding or target activity. Thus, the invention includes the use of screening assays for inhibitors of the targets listed in Table 1, which may be designed to identify compounds that bind or complex with the targets, or otherwise interfere with their activities. The screening assays include assays amenable to high-throughput screening of chemical libraries, making them suitable for identifying small molecule drug candidates. Generally, binding assays and activity assays are used. The assays can be performed in a variety of formats, including, without limitation, kinase assays, biochemical screening assays, immunoassays, and cell-based assays, as determined to be appropriate, based on the subject target.
  • In binding assays, the interaction is binding, and the complex formed can be isolated or detected in the reaction mixture. In a particular embodiment, either the target polypeptide or the drug candidate is immobilized on a solid phase, e.g., on a microtiter plate, by covalent or non-covalent attachments. Non-covalent attachment generally is accomplished by coating the solid surface with a solution of the polypeptide and drying. Alternatively, an immobilized antibody, e.g., a monoclonal antibody, specific for the target polypeptide to be immobilized can be used to anchor it to a solid surface. The assay is performed by adding the non-immobilized component, which may be labeled by a detectable label, to the immobilized component, e.g., the coated surface containing the anchored component. When the reaction is complete, the non-reacted components are removed, e.g., by washing, and complexes anchored on the solid surface are detected. When the originally non-immobilized component carries a detectable label, the detection of label immobilized on the surface indicates that complexing occurred. Where the originally non-immobilized component does not carry a label, complexing can be detected, for example, by using a labeled antibody specifically binding the immobilized complex.
  • If the candidate compound is a polypeptide that interacts with but does not bind to the target, the interaction of the target with the respective polypeptide can be assayed by methods well known for detecting protein-protein interactions. Such assays include traditional approaches, such as, e.g., cross-linking, co-immunoprecipitation, and co-purification through gradients or chromatographic columns. In addition, protein-protein interactions can be monitored by using a yeast-based genetic system described by Fields and co-workers (Fields et al., Nature (London) 340:245-246, 1989; Chien et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 88:9578-9582, 1991) as disclosed by Chevray et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 89:5789-5793, 1991. Many transcriptional activators, such as yeast GAL4, consist of two physically discrete modular domains, one acting as the DNA-binding domain, and the other one functioning as the transcription-activation domain. The yeast expression system described in the foregoing publications (generally referred to as the “two-hybrid system”) takes advantage of this property, and employs two hybrid proteins, one in which the target protein is fused to the DNA-binding domain of GAL4, and another, in which candidate activating proteins are fused to the activation domain. The expression of a GAL1-lacZ reporter gene under control of a GAL4-activated promoter depends on reconstitution of GAL4 activity via protein-protein interaction. Colonies containing interacting polypeptides are detected with a chromogenic substrate for β-galactosidase. A complete kit (MATCHMAKER™) for identifying protein-protein interactions between two specific proteins using the two-hybrid technique is commercially available from Clontech. This system can also be extended to map protein domains involved in specific protein interactions as well as to pinpoint amino acid residues that are crucial for these interactions.
  • Compounds that interfere with the interaction of the target and other intra- or extracellular components can be tested as follows. Usually a reaction mixture is prepared containing the target and the intra- or extracellular component under conditions and for a time allowing for the interaction of the two products. To test the ability of a candidate compound to inhibit the interaction of the target, the reaction is run in the absence and in the presence of the test compound. In addition, a placebo may be added to a third reaction mixture, to serve as a positive control.
  • Assays for measuring the impact of a candidate inhibitor on the activity of a protein kinase are known in the art, and include direct phosphorylation assays, typically interpreted via radio-labeled phosphate, phosphorylation-specific antibodies to a substrate, and cell-based assays that measure the downstream consequence of kinase activity, e.g., activation of a reporter gene. Both of these major strategies, in addition to alternative assays based on fluorescence polarization, may be used in small-scale or high-throughput format to identify, validate, or characterize an inhibitor (see, for example, Favata et al., J. Biol. Chem. 273:18623-18632, 1998; Parker et al., J. Biomol. Screening 5:77-99, 2000; Singh et al., Comb. Chem. High Throughput Screen 8:319-325, 2005; Garton et al., Meth. Enz. 439:491-500, 2008; and Kupchko et al., Anal. Biochem. 317:210-217, 2003).
  • The screening assays specifically discussed herein are for the purpose of illustration only. A variety of other assays, which can be selected depending on the particular target and type of antagonist candidates screened (e.g., antibodies, polypeptides, peptides, non-peptide small organic molecules, nucleic acid molecules, etc.) are well known to those skilled in the art and may also be used in the present invention.
  • The assays described herein may be used to screen libraries of compounds including, without limitation, chemical libraries, natural product libraries (e.g., collections of microorganisms, animals, plants, etc.), and combinatorial libraries comprised of random peptides, oligonucleotides, or small organic molecules. In a particular embodiment, the assays herein are used to screen antibody libraries including, without limitation, naïve human, recombinant, synthetic, and semi-synthetic antibody libraries. The antibody library can, for example, be a phage display library, including monovalent libraries, displaying on average one single-chain antibody or antibody fragment per phage particle, and multi-valent libraries, displaying, on average, two or more antibodies or antibody fragments per viral particle. However, the antibody libraries to be screened in accordance with the present invention are not limited to phage display libraries. Other display techniques include, for example, ribosome or mRNA display (Mattheakis et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 91:9022-9026, 1994; Hanes et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 94:4937-4942, 1997), microbial cell display, such as bacterial display (Georgiou et al., Nature Biotech. 15:29-34, 1997), or yeast cell display (Kieke et al., Protein Eng. 10:1303-1310, 1997), display on mammalian cells, spore display, viral display, such as retroviral display (Urban et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 33:e35, 2005), display based on protein-DNA linkage (Odegrip et al., Proc. Acad. Natl. Sci. U.S.A. 101:2806-2810, 2004; Reiersen et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 33:e10, 2005), and microbead display (Sepp et al., FEBS Lett. 532:455-458, 2002).
  • The results obtained in the primary binding/interaction assays herein can be confirmed in in vitro and/or in vivo assays of axon degeneration. Alternatively, in vitro and/or in vivo assays of axon degeneration may be used as primary assays to identify inhibitors and antagonists as described herein.
  • ii) Animal Models of Neuron or Axon Degeneration
  • In vivo assays for use in the invention include animal models of various neurodegenerative diseases, such as animal models of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, and multiple sclerosis (e.g., experimental autoimmune encephalitis (EAE) in mice). In addition, spinal cord and traumatic brain injury models can be used. Non-limiting examples of in vivo assays that can be used in characterizing inhibitors for use in the invention are described as follows.
  • In the case of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), a transgenic mouse that expresses a mutant form of superoxide dismutase 1 (SOD1) recapitulates the phenotype and pathology of ALS (Rosen et al., Nature 362(6415):59-62, 1993). In addition to the SOD1 mouse, several mouse models of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS) have been developed and can be used in the invention. These include motor neuron degeneration (Mnd), progressive motor neuropathy (pmn), wobbler (Bird et al., Acta Neuropathologica 19(1):39-50, 1971), and TDP-43 mutant transgenic mice (Wegorzewska et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., e-published on Oct. 15, 2009). In addition, a canine model has been developed and can be used in the invention (hereditary canine spinal muscular atrophy (HCSMA)).
  • Animal models that simulate the pathogenic, histological, biochemical, and clinical features of Parkinson's disease, which can be used in characterizing inhibitors for use in the methods of the present invention, include the reserpine (rabbit; Carlsson et al., Nature 180:1200, 1957); methamphetamine (rodent and non-human primates; Seiden et al., Drug Alcohol Depend 1:215-219, 1975); 6-OHDA (rat; Perese et al., Brain Res. 494:285-293, 1989); MPTP (mouse and non-human primates; Langston et al., Ann. Neurol. 46:598-605, 1999); paraquat/maneb (mouse; Brooks et al., Brain Res. 823:1-10, 1999 and Takahashi et al., Res. Commun. Chem. Pathol. Pharmacol. 66:167-170, 1989); rotenone (rat; Betarbet et al., Nat. Neurosci. 3:1301-1306, 2000); 3-nitrotyrosine (mouse; Mihm et al., J. Neurosci. 21:RC149, 2001); and mutated α-synuclein (mouse and Drosophila; Polymeropoulos et al., Science 276:2045-2047, 1997) models.
  • Genetically-modified animals, including mice, flies, fish, and worms, have been used to study the pathogenic mechanisms behind Alzheimer's disease. For example, mice transgenic for β-amyloid develop memory impairment consistent with Alzheimer's disease (Gotz et al., Mol. Psychiatry 9:664-683, 2004). Models such as these may be used in characterizing the inhibitors.
  • Several animal models are used in the art to study stroke, including mice, rats, gerbils, rabbits, cats, dogs, sheep, pigs, and monkeys. Most focal cerebral ischemia models involve occlusion of one major cerebral blood vessel such as the middle cerebral artery (see, e.g., Garcia, Stroke 15:5-14, 1984 and Bose et al., Brain Res. 311:385-391, 1984). Any of these models may also be used in the invention.
    • C. Inhibitors of Neuron or Axon Degeneration
  • As described further below, in the Examples, the compounds listed in Table 2, below, were identified as inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration. These compounds, as well as other agents (see, e.g., Table 3) that inhibit (or activate, in the case of adenylyl cyclase) the targets and processes listed in Table 2, can be used in methods of inhibiting neuron or axon degeneration, according to the invention.
  • TABLE 2
    Compounds
    Target (Source) Structure
    Proteasome MG 132 (Calbiochem Cat. No. 474790) (CAS: 133407-82-6)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00001
    GSK3β SB 415286 (Tocris Cat. No. 1617) (CAS: 264218-23-7)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00002
    GSK3β inhibitor I (Calbiochem Cat. No. 361540) (CAS: 327036-89-5)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00003
    GSK3β inhibitor VII (Calbiochem Cat. No. 361548) (CAS: 99-73-0)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00004
    GSK3β inhibitor VIII (Calbiochem Cat. No. 361549) (CAS: 487021-52-3)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00005
    GSK3β inhibitor XII (Calbiochem Cat. No. 361554) (CAS: 601514-19-6)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00006
    Lithium Chloride LiCl
    Other lithium salts (e.g.,
    lithium carbonate (e.g.,
    Lithobid ™) and lithium
    citrate)
    (CAS: 7447-41-8)
    P38 MAPK SB 202190 (Calbiochem Cat. No. 559388) (CAS: 152121-30-7)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00007
    SB 239063 (Calbiochem Cat. No. 559404) (CAS: 193551-21-2)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00008
    SB 239069
    SB 203580 (Calbiochem Cat. No. 559389) (CAS: 152121-47-6)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00009
    EGFRK AG 556 (Calbiochem Cat. No. 658415) (CAS: 149092-35-3)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00010
    AG 555 (Calbiochem Cat. No. 658404) (CAS: 133550-34-2)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00011
    AG 494 (Tocris Cat. No. 0619) (CAS: 133550-35-3)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00012
    PD168393 (Calbiochem Cat. No. 513033)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00013
    Tyrphostin B44 (+ and − isomers) (Calbiochem Cat. No. 658402) (CAS: 133550-32-0)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00014
    AG 490 Tyrphostin B42 (Calbiochem. Cat. No. 658401) (CAS: 133550-30-8)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00015
    PI3K LY294002 (Calbiochem. Cat. No. 440202) (CAS: 154447-36-6)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00016
    Cdk5 Seliciclib (R- roscovitine/CYC202) (CAS: 186692-46-6)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00017
    Adenylyl cyclase Forskolin (Calbiochem Cat. No. 344270) (CAS: 66575-29-9)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00018
    NKH 477 (Tocris Cat. No. 1603) (CAS: 138605-00-2)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00019
    Transcription Actinomycin D (Calbiochem Cat. No. 114666) (CAS: 50-76-0)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00020
    JNK SP600125 (Calbiochem Cat. No. 420119) (CAS: 129-56-6)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00021
    JNKV Inhibitor AS601245 (Calbiochem Cat. No. 420129
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00022
    JNKVIII Inhibitor Calbiochem Cat. No. 420135
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00023
    Bax Channel Bax Channel Blocker (Tocris Cat. No. 2160) (CAS: 335165-68-9)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00024
    Ih Channel ZD7288 (Tocris Cat. No. 1000) (CAS: 133059-99-1)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00025
    CAMK STO-609 (Calbiochem Cat. No. 570250) (CAS: 52029-86-4)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00026
    Protein Synthesis Anisomycin (CAS: 22862-76-6)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00027
    Cycloheximide (CAS: 66-81-9)
    Figure US20180325992A1-20181115-C00028
  • TABLE 3
    Target Compounds Structure CAS/Reference
    Proteasome Bortezomib [(1R)-3-methyl-1-({(2S)-3-phenyl- CAS: 179324-69-7
    (Velcade ™) 2-[(pyrazin-2- Adams et al., Cancer
    ylcarbonyl)amino]propanoyl} Invest. 22 (2): 304
    amino)butyl]boronic acid (2004)
    Disulfiram 1-(diethylthiocarbamoyldisulfanyl)- CAS: 97-77-8
    (Antabus ™/ N,N-diethyl-methanethioamide Lövborg et al.,
    Antabuse ™) International Journal of
    Cancer 118 (6): 1577
    (2006)
    GSK3β Lithium Salts (e.g., CAS: 7447-41-8
    lithium carbonate Kaladchibachi et al., J.
    (e.g., Lithobid ™) Circadian Rhythms 5: 3
    and lithium citrate) (2007)
    p38 MAPK Pamapimod Pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidin-7(8H)-one, CAS: 449811-01-2
    6-(2,4-difluorophenoxy)-2-[[3- Hill et al., J. Pharmacol
    hydroxy-1-(2- Exp. Therapeutics Online
    hydroxyethyl)propyl]amino]-8- publication (September
    methyl- 2008)
    EGFRK Gefitinib N-(3-chloro-4-fluoro-phenyl)-7- CAS: 184475-35-2
    (Iressa ™) methoxy- Paez et al., Science
    6-(3-morpholin-4- 304(5676): 1497 (2004)
    ylpropoxy)quinazolin-4-amine
    Erlotinib N-(3-ethynylphenyl)-6,7-bis(2- CAS: 183321-74-6
    (Tarceva ™) methoxyethoxy) Shepherd et al., N. Engl. J.
    quinazolin-4-amine Med. 353: 123 (2005)
    Lapatinib N-[3-chloro-4-[(3- CAS: 388082-78-8
    ditosylate fluorophenyl)methoxy]phenyl]-6- Higa et al., Exp. Rev.
    (Tykerb ™/ [5-[(2- Anticancer Ther.
    Tyverb ™) methylsulfonylethylamino)methyl]- 7(9): 1183 (2007)
    2-furyl]
    quinazolin-4-amine
    Adenylyl Demeclocycline 2-(amino-hydroxy-methylidene)-7- CAS: 127-33-3
    cyclase hydrochloride chloro-4-dimethylamino- Roitman et al., Human
    (Declomycin ™/ 6,10,11,12a-tetrahydroxy- Psychopharmacololgy:
    Declostatin ™/ 4,4a,5,5a,6,12a-hexahydro- Clinical and Experimental
    Ledermycin ™) tetracene-1,3,12-trione 13(2): 121-125 (1998)
    Protein Gentamicin sulfate 2-[4,6-diamino-3-[3-amino-6-(1- CAS: 1405-41-0
    Synthesis (Garamycin ™) methylaminoethyl) tetrahydropyran- Kadurugamuwa et al., J.
    2-yl] oxy-2-hydroxy-cyclohexoxy]- Bacteriol. 175: 5798 (1993)
    5-methyl-4-methylamino-
    tetrahydropyran-3,5-diol
    Neomycin sulfate (1R,2R,3S,4R,6S)-4,6-diamino-2- CAS: 1404-04-2
    (Mycifradin ™, {[3-O-(2,6-diamino-2,6-dideoxy-β- Hu, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
    Neo-Rx ™) L-idopyranosyl)-β-D- USA 95(17): 9791 (1998)
    ribofuranosyl]oxy}-3-
    hydroxycyclohexyl 2,6-diamino-
    2,6-dideoxy-α-D-glucopyranoside
    Paromomycin (2R,3S,4R,5R,6S)-5-amino-6- CAS: 1263-89-4
    sulfate [(1R,2S,3S,4R,6S)- VanLoock et al., J.
    (Humatin ™) 4,6-diamino-2-[(2S,3R,4R,5R)-4- Molecular Biol.
    [(2R,3R,4R,5R,6S)- 304(4): 507 (2000)
    3-amino-6-(aminomethyl)-4,5-
    dihydroxy-oxan-2-yl]
    oxy-3-hydroxy-5-
    (hydroxymethyl)oxolan-2-yl]oxy-
    3-hydroxy-cyclohexyl]oxy-2-
    (hydroxymethyl)oxane-3,4-diol
    • D. Making Antibody Inhibitors of Neuron or Axon Degeneration
  • Antibodies identified by the binding and activity assays of the present invention can be produced by methods known in the art, including techniques of recombinant DNA technology.
  • (i) Antigen Preparation
  • Soluble antigens or fragments thereof, optionally conjugated to other molecules, can be used as immunogens for generating antibodies. For transmembrane molecules, such as receptors, fragments of these (e.g., the extracellular domain of a receptor) can be used as the immunogen. Alternatively, cells expressing the transmembrane molecule can be used as the immunogen. Such cells can be derived from a natural source (e.g., cancer cell lines) or may be cells that have been transformed by recombinant techniques to express the transmembrane molecule. Exemplary sequences of targets of the invention are referred to in Table 1, and can be used in the preparation of antigens for making antibodies for use in the invention. Other antigens and forms thereof useful for preparing antibodies will be apparent to those in the art.
  • (ii) Polyclonal Antibodies
  • Polyclonal antibodies are typically raised in animals by multiple subcutaneous (sc) or intraperitoneal (ip) injections of the relevant antigen and an adjuvant. It may be useful to conjugate the relevant antigen to a protein that is immunogenic in the species to be immunized, e.g., keyhole limpet hemocyanin, serum albumin, bovine thyroglobulin, or soybean trypsin inhibitor using a bifunctional or derivatizing agent, for example, maleimidobenzoyl sulfosuccinimide ester (conjugation through cysteine residues), N-hydroxysuccinimide (through lysine residues), glutaraldehyde, succinic anhydride, SOCl2, or R1N═C═NR, where R and R1 are different alkyl groups.
  • Animals are immunized against the antigen, immunogenic conjugates, or derivatives by combining, e.g., 100 μg or 5 μg of the protein or conjugate (for rabbits or mice, respectively) with 3 volumes of Freund's complete adjuvant and injecting the solution intradermally at multiple sites. One month later the animals are boosted with ⅕ to 1/10 of the original amount of peptide or conjugate in Freund's complete adjuvant by subcutaneous injection at multiple sites. Seven to 14 days later the animals are bled and serum is assayed for antibody titer. Animals are boosted until the titer plateaus. The animal can be boosted with a conjugate of the same antigen, but conjugated to a different protein and/or through a different cross-linking reagent. Conjugates also can be made in recombinant cell culture as protein fusions. Also, aggregating agents such as alum are suitably used to enhance the immune response.
  • (iii) Monoclonal Antibodies
  • Monoclonal antibodies may be made using the hybridoma method first described by Kohler et al., Nature 256:495, 1975, or may be made by recombinant DNA methods (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567). In the hybridoma method, a mouse or other appropriate host animal, such as a hamster or macaque monkey, is immunized as hereinabove described to elicit lymphocytes that produce or are capable of producing antibodies that will specifically bind to the protein used for immunization. Alternatively, lymphocytes may be immunized in vitro. Lymphocytes then are fused with myeloma cells using a suitable fusing agent, such as polyethylene glycol, to form a hybridoma cell (Goding, Monoclonal Antibodies: Principles and Practice, pp. 59-103, Academic Press, 1986).
  • The hybridoma cells thus prepared are seeded and grown in a suitable culture medium that can contain one or more substances that inhibit the growth or survival of the unfused, parental myeloma cells. For example, if the parental myeloma cells lack the enzyme hypoxanthine guanine phosphoribosyl transferase (HGPRT or HPRT), the culture medium for the hybridomas typically will include hypoxanthine, aminopterin, and thymidine (HAT medium), which substances prevent the growth of HGPRT-deficient cells.
  • Exemplary myeloma cells are those that fuse efficiently, support stable high-level production of antibody by the selected antibody-producing cells, and are sensitive to a medium such as HAT medium. Among these, particular myeloma cell lines that may be considered for use are murine myeloma lines, such as those derived from MOPC-21 and MPC-11 mouse tumors available from the Salk Institute Cell Distribution Center, San Diego, Calif., USA, and SP-2 or X63-Ag8-653 cells available from the American Type Culture Collection, Manassas, Va., USA. Human myeloma and mouse-human heteromyeloma cell lines also have been described for the production of human monoclonal antibodies (Kozbor, J. Immunol. 133:3001, 1984; Brodeur et al., Monoclonal Antibody Production Techniques and Applications, pp. 51-63, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, 1987).
  • Culture medium in which hybridoma cells are growing is assayed for production of monoclonal antibodies directed against the antigen. The binding specificity of monoclonal antibodies produced by hybridoma cells can be determined by immunoprecipitation or by an in vitro binding assay, such as radioimmunoassay (RIA) or enzyme-linked immunoabsorbent assay (ELISA).
  • After hybridoma cells are identified that produce antibodies of the desired specificity, affinity, and/or activity, clones may be subcloned by limiting dilution procedures and grown by standard methods (Goding, Monoclonal Antibodies: Principles and Practice, pp. 59-103, Academic Press, 1986). Suitable culture media for this purpose include, for example, D-MEM or RPMI-1640 medium. In addition, the hybridoma cells may be grown in vivo as ascites tumors in an animal.
  • The monoclonal antibodies secreted by the subclones are suitably separated from the culture medium, ascites fluid, or serum by conventional immunoglobulin purification procedures such as, for example, protein A-Sepharose, hydroxylapatite chromatography, gel electrophoresis, dialysis, or affinity chromatography.
  • DNA encoding the monoclonal antibodies is readily isolated and sequenced using conventional procedures (e.g., by using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding the heavy and light chains of the monoclonal antibodies). The hybridoma cells serve as a source of such DNA. Once isolated, the DNA may be placed into expression vectors, which are then transfected into host cells such as E. coli cells, simian COS cells, Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells, or myeloma cells that do not otherwise produce immunoglobulin protein, to obtain the synthesis of monoclonal antibodies in the recombinant host cells. Recombinant production of antibodies will be described in more detail below.
  • In a further embodiment, antibodies or antibody fragments can be isolated from antibody phage libraries generated using the techniques described, for example, in McCafferty et al., Nature 348:552-554, 1990.
  • Clackson et al., Nature 352:624-628, 1991 and Marks et al., J. Mol. Biol. 222:581-597, 1991, describe the isolation of murine and human antibodies, respectively, using phage libraries. Subsequent publications describe the production of high affinity (nM range) human antibodies by chain shuffling (Marks et al., Bio/Technology 10:779-783, 1992), as well as combinatorial infection and in vivo recombination as a strategy for constructing very large phage libraries (Waterhouse et al., Nucl. Acids. Res. 21:2265-2266, 1993). Thus, these techniques are viable alternatives to traditional monoclonal antibody hybridoma techniques for isolation of monoclonal antibodies.
  • The DNA also may be modified, for example, by substituting the coding sequence for human heavy- and light-chain constant domains in place of the homologous murine sequences (U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567; Morrison et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 81:6851, 1984), or by covalently joining to the immunoglobulin coding sequence all or part of the coding sequence for a non-immunoglobulin polypeptide.
  • Typically, such non-immunoglobulin polypeptides are substituted for the constant domains of an antibody, or they are substituted for the variable domains of one antigen-combining site of an antibody to create a chimeric bivalent antibody comprising one antigen-combining site having specificity for an antigen and another antigen-combining site having specificity for a different antigen.
  • (iv) Humanized and Human Antibodies
  • A humanized antibody has one or more amino acid residues introduced into it from a source that is non-human. These non-human amino acid residues are often referred to as “import” residues, which are typically taken from an “import” variable domain. Humanization can be essentially performed following the method of Winter and co-workers (Jones et al., Nature 321:522-525, 1986; Riechmann et al., Nature 332:323-327, 1988; Verhoeyen et al., Science 239:1534-1536, 1988), by substituting rodent CDRs or CDR sequences for the corresponding sequences of a human antibody. Accordingly, such “humanized” antibodies are chimeric antibodies (U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567) wherein substantially less than an intact human variable domain has been substituted by the corresponding sequence from a non-human species. In practice, humanized antibodies are typically human antibodies in which some CDR residues and possibly some FR residues are substituted by residues from analogous sites in rodent antibodies.
  • The choice of human variable domains, both light and heavy, to be used in making the humanized antibodies is very important to reduce antigenicity. According to the so-called “best-fit”method, the sequence of the variable domain of a rodent antibody is screened against the entire library of known human variable-domain sequences. The human sequence that is closest to that of the rodent is then accepted as the human framework (FR) for the humanized antibody (Sims et al., J. Immunol. 151:2296, 1993; Chothia et al., J. Mol. Biol. 196:901, 1987). Another method uses a particular framework derived from the consensus sequence of all human antibodies of a particular subgroup of light or heavy chains. The same framework may be used for several different humanized antibodies (Carter et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 89:4285, 1992; Presta et al., J. Immnol. 151:2623, 1993).
  • It is further important that antibodies be humanized with retention of high affinity for the antigen and other favorable biological properties. To achieve this goal, according to an exemplary method, humanized antibodies are prepared by a process of analysis of the parental sequences and various conceptual humanized products using three-dimensional models of the parental and humanized sequences. Three-dimensional immunoglobulin models are commonly available and are familiar to those skilled in the art. Computer programs are available that illustrate and display probable three-dimensional conformational structures of selected candidate immunoglobulin sequences. Inspection of these displays permits analysis of the likely role of the residues in the functioning of the candidate immunoglobulin sequence, i.e., the analysis of residues that influence the ability of the candidate immunoglobulin to bind its antigen. In this way, FR residues can be selected and combined from the recipient and import sequences so that the desired antibody characteristic, such as increased affinity for the target antigen(s), is achieved. In general, the CDR residues are directly and most substantially involved in influencing antigen binding.
  • Alternatively, it is now possible to produce transgenic animals (e.g., mice) that are capable, upon immunization, of producing a full repertoire of human antibodies in the absence of endogenous immunoglobulin production. For example, it has been described that the homozygous deletion of the antibody heavy-chain joining region (JH) gene in chimeric and germ-line mutant mice results in complete inhibition of endogenous antibody production. Transfer of the human germ-line immunoglobulin gene array in such germ-line mutant mice will result in the production of human antibodies upon antigen challenge. See, e.g., Jakobovits et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 90:2551, 1993; Jakobovits et al., Nature 362:255-258, 1993; Bruggermann et al., Year in Immunol. 7:33, 1993; and Duchosal et al., Nature 355:258, 1992. Human antibodies can also be derived from phage-display libraries (Hoogenboom et al., J. Mol. Biol. 227:381, 1991; Marks et al., J. Mol. Biol. 222:581-597, 1991; Vaughan et al., Nature Biotech. 14:309, 1996). Generation of human antibodies from antibody phage display libraries is further described below.
  • (v) Antibody Fragments
  • Various techniques have been developed for the production of antibody fragments. Traditionally, these fragments were derived via proteolytic digestion of intact antibodies (see, e.g., Morimoto et al., J. Biochem. Biophys. Meth. 24:107-117, 1992 and Brennan et al., Science 229:81, 1985). However, these fragments can now be produced directly by recombinant host cells. For example, the antibody fragments can be isolated from the antibody phage libraries discussed above. Alternatively, Fab′-SH fragments can be directly recovered from E. coli and chemically coupled to form F(ab′)2 fragments (Carter et al., Bio/Technology 10:163-167, 1992). In another embodiment as described in the example below, the F(ab′)2 is formed using the leucine zipper GCN4 to promote assembly of the F(ab′)2 molecule. According to another approach, F(ab′)2 fragments can be isolated directly from recombinant host cell culture. Other techniques for the production of antibody fragments will be apparent to the skilled practitioner. In other embodiments, the antibody of choice is a single chain Fv fragment (scFv) (see WO 93/16185).
  • (vi) Multispecific Antibodies
  • Multispecific antibodies have binding specificities for at least two different epitopes, where the epitopes are usually from different antigens. While such molecules normally will only bind two different epitopes (i.e., bispecific antibodies, BsAbs), antibodies with additional specificities such as trispecific antibodies are encompassed by this expression when used herein.
  • Methods for making bispecific antibodies are known in the art. Traditional production of full-length bispecific antibodies is based on the coexpression of two immunoglobulin heavy chain-light chain pairs, where the two chains have different specificities (Millstein et al., Nature 305:537-539, 1983). Because of the random assortment of immunoglobulin heavy and light chains, these hybridomas (quadromas) produce a potential mixture of 10 different antibody molecules, of which only one has the correct bispecific structure. Purification of the correct molecule, which is usually done by affinity chromatography steps, is rather cumbersome, and the product yields are low. Similar procedures are disclosed in WO 93/08829, and in Traunecker et al., EMBO J. 10:3655-3659, 1991. According to a different approach, antibody variable domains with the desired binding specificities (antibody-antigen combining sites) are fused to immunoglobulin constant domain sequences. The fusion can be with an immunoglobulin heavy chain constant domain, comprising at least part of the hinge, CH2, and CH3 regions. The first heavy-chain constant region (CH1) containing the site necessary for light chain binding can be present in at least one of the fusions. DNAs encoding the immunoglobulin heavy chain fusions and, if desired, the immunoglobulin light chain, are inserted into separate expression vectors, and are co-transfected into a suitable host organism. This provides for great flexibility in adjusting the mutual proportions of the three polypeptide fragments in embodiments when unequal ratios of the three polypeptide chains used in the construction provide the optimum yields. It is, however, possible to insert the coding sequences for two or all three polypeptide chains in one expression vector when the expression of at least two polypeptide chains in equal ratios results in high yields or when the ratios are of no particular significance.
  • In one example of this approach, the bispecific antibodies are composed of a hybrid immunoglobulin heavy chain with a first binding specificity in one arm, and a hybrid immunoglobulin heavy chain-light chain pair (providing a second binding specificity) in the other arm. It was found that this asymmetric structure facilitates the separation of the desired bispecific compound from unwanted immunoglobulin chain combinations, as the presence of an immunoglobulin light chain in only one half of the bispecific molecule provides for a facile way of separation. This approach is disclosed in WO 94/04690. For further details of generating bispecific antibodies see, for example, Suresh et al., Methods Enzymol. 121:210, 1986.
  • According to another approach described in WO 96/27011, the interface between a pair of antibody molecules can be engineered to maximize the percentage of heterodimers that are recovered from recombinant cell culture. The interface may comprise at least a part of the CH3 domain of an antibody constant domain. In this method, one or more small amino acid side chains from the interface of the first antibody molecule are replaced with larger side chains (e.g., tyrosine or tryptophan). Compensatory “cavities” of identical or similar size to the large side chain(s) are created on the interface of the second antibody molecule by replacing large amino acid side chains with smaller ones (e.g., alanine or threonine). This provides a mechanism for increasing the yield of the heterodimer over other unwanted end-products such as homodimers.
  • Bispecific antibodies include cross-linked or “heteroconjugate” antibodies. For example, one of the antibodies in the heteroconjugate can be coupled to avidin, the other to biotin. Such antibodies have, for example, been proposed to target immune system cells to unwanted cells (U.S. Pat. No. 4,676,980), and for treatment of HIV infection (WO 91/00360 and WO 92/200373). Heteroconjugate antibodies may be made using any convenient cross-linking methods. Suitable cross-linking agents are well known in the art and are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,676,980, along with a number of cross-linking techniques.
  • Techniques for generating bispecific antibodies from antibody fragments have also been described in the literature. For example, bispecific antibodies can be prepared using chemical linkage. Brennan et al., Science 229:81, 1985 describe a procedure in which intact antibodies are proteolytically cleaved to generate F(ab′)2 fragments. These fragments are reduced in the presence of the dithiol complexing agent sodium arsenite to stabilize vicinal dithiols and prevent intermolecular disulfide formation. The Fab′ fragments generated are then converted to thionitrobenzoate (TNB) derivatives. One of the Fab′-TNB derivatives is then reconverted to the Fab′-thiol by reduction with mercaptoethylamine and is mixed with an equimolar amount of the other Fab′-TNB derivative to form the bispecific antibody. The bispecific antibodies produced can be used as agents for the selective immobilization of enzymes.
  • Fab′-SH fragments can also be directly recovered from E. coli, and can be chemically coupled to form bispecific antibodies. Shalaby et al., J. Exp. Med. 175:217-225, 1992 describe the production of a fully humanized bispecific antibody F(ab′)2 molecule. Each Fab′ fragment was separately secreted from E. coli and subjected to directed chemical coupling in vitro to form the bispecific antibody.
  • Various techniques for making and isolating bispecific antibody fragments directly from recombinant cell culture have also been described. For example, bispecific antibodies have been produced using leucine zippers (Kostelny et al., J. Immunol. 148(5):1547-1553, 1992). The leucine zipper peptides from the Fos and Jun proteins were linked to the Fab′ portions of two different antibodies by gene fusion. The antibody homodimers were reduced at the hinge region to form monomers and then re-oxidized to form the antibody heterodimers. This method can also be utilized for the production of antibody homodimers. The “diabody” technology described by Hollinger et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 90:6444-6448, 1993, has provided an alternative mechanism for making bispecific antibody fragments. The fragments comprise a heavy-chain variable domain (VH) connected to a light-chain variable domain (VL) by a linker that is too short to allow pairing between the two domains on the same chain. Accordingly, the VH and VL domains of one fragment are forced to pair with the complementary VL and VH domains of another fragment, thereby forming two antigen-binding sites. Another strategy for making bispecific antibody fragments by the use of single-chain Fv (sFv) dimers has also been reported (see Gruber et al., J. Immunol. 152:5368, 1994).
  • Antibodies with more than two valencies are contemplated. For example, trispecific antibodies can be prepared (Tuft et al., J. Immunol. 147:60, 1991).
  • (vii) Effector Function Engineering
  • It may be desirable to modify an antibody used in the invention with respect to effector function, so as to enhance the effectiveness of the antibody. For example cysteine residue(s) may be introduced in the Fc region, thereby allowing interchain disulfide bond formation in this region. The homodimeric antibody thus generated may have improved internalization capability and/or increased complement-mediated cell killing and antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity (ADCC; see Caron et al., J. Exp. Med. 176:1191-1195, 1992 and Shopes, J. Immunol. 148:2918-2922, 1992). Homodimeric antibodies with enhanced anti-tumor activity may also be prepared using heterobifunctional cross-linkers as described in Wolff et al., Cancer Research 53:2560-2565, 1993. Alternatively, an antibody can be engineered which has dual Fc regions and may thereby have enhanced complement lysis and ADCC capabilities (see Stevenson et al., Anti- Cancer Drug Design 3:219-230, 1989).
  • (viii) Antibody-Salvage Receptor Binding Epitope Fusions
  • In certain embodiments of the invention, it may be desirable to use an antibody fragment, rather than an intact antibody, to increase blood brain barrier penetration, for example. In this case, it may be desirable to modify the antibody fragment in order to increase its serum half-life. This may be achieved, for example, by incorporation of a salvage receptor binding epitope into the antibody fragment (e.g., by mutation of the appropriate region in the antibody fragment or by incorporating the epitope into a peptide tag that is then fused to the antibody fragment at either end or in the middle, e.g., by DNA or peptide synthesis).
  • The salvage receptor binding epitope can constitute a region in which any one or more amino acid residues from one or two loops of an Fc domain are transferred to an analogous position of the antibody fragment. In another example, three or more residues from one or two loops of the Fc domain are transferred, while in a further example, the epitope is taken from the CH2 domain of the Fc region (e.g., of an IgG) and transferred to the CH1, CH3, or VH region, or more than one such region, of the antibody. Alternatively, the epitope is taken from the CH2 domain of the Fc region and transferred to the CL region or VL region, or both, of the antibody fragment.
  • (ix) Other Covalent Modifications of Antibodies
  • Covalent modifications of antibodies are included within the scope of this invention. They may be made by chemical synthesis or by enzymatic or chemical cleavage of the antibody, if applicable. Other types of covalent modifications of the antibody are introduced into the molecule by reacting targeted amino acid residues of the antibody with an organic derivatizing agent that is capable of reacting with selected side chains or the N- or C-terminal residues. Examples of covalent modifications are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,534,615, which is specifically incorporated herein by reference. One example of a type of covalent modification of the antibody comprises linking the antibody to one of a variety of nonproteinaceous polymers, e.g., polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, or polyoxyalkylenes, in the manner set forth in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,640,835; 4,496,689; 4,301,144; 4,670,417; 4,791,192; or 4,179,337.
  • (x) Generation of Antibodies from Synthetic Antibody Phage Libraries
  • In a further embodiment, the invention may employ a method for generating and selecting novel antibodies using a phage display approach. The approach involves generation of synthetic antibody phage libraries based on single framework template, design of sufficient diversities within variable domains, display of polypeptides having the diversified variable domains, selection of candidate antibodies with high affinity to target the antigen, and isolation of the selected antibodies.
  • Details of phage display methods can be found, for example, WO 03/102157, the entire disclosure of which is expressly incorporated herein by reference.
  • In one example, the antibody libraries used in the invention can be generated by mutating the solvent accessible and/or highly diverse positions in at least one CDR of an antibody variable domain. Some or all of the CDRs can be mutated using the methods provided herein. In some embodiments, diverse antibody libraries can be generated by mutating positions in CDRH1, CDRH2, and CDRH3 to form a single library, or by mutating positions in CDRL3 and CDRH3 to form a single library, or by mutating positions in CDRL3 and CDRH1, CDRH2, and CDRH3 to form a single library.
  • A library of antibody variable domains can be generated, for example, having mutations in the solvent accessible and/or highly diverse positions of CDRH1, CDRH2, and CDRH3. Another library can be generated having mutations in CDRL1, CDRL2, and CDRL3. These libraries can also be used in conjunction with each other to generate binders of desired affinities. For example, after one or more rounds of selection of heavy chain libraries for binding to a target antigen, a light chain library can be replaced into the population of heavy chain binders for further rounds of selection to increase the affinity of the binders.
  • A library can be created by substitution of original amino acids with variant amino acids in the CDRH3 region of the variable region of the heavy chain sequence. The resulting library can contain a plurality of antibody sequences, in which the sequence diversity is primarily in the CDRH3 region of the heavy chain sequence.
  • In one example, the library is created in the context of the humanized antibody 4D5 sequence, or the sequence of the framework amino acids of the humanized antibody 4D5 sequence. The library can be created by substitution of at least residues 95-100a of the heavy chain with amino acids encoded by the DVK codon set, wherein the DVK codon set is used to encode a set of variant amino acids for every one of these positions. An example of an oligonucleotide set that is useful for creating these substitutions comprises the sequence (DVK)7. In some embodiments, a library is created by substitution of residues 95-100a with amino acids encoded by both DVK and NNK codon sets. An example of an oligonucleotide set that is useful for creating these substitutions comprises the sequence (DVK)6 (NNK). In another embodiment, a library is created by substitution of at least residues 95-100a with amino acids encoded by both DVK and NNK codon sets. An example of an oligonucleotide set that is useful for creating these substitutions comprises the sequence (DVK)5 (NNK). Another example of an oligonucleotide set that is useful for creating these substitutions comprises the sequence (NNK)6. Other examples of suitable oligonucleotide sequences can be determined by one skilled in the art according to the criteria described herein.
  • In another embodiment, different CDRH3 designs are utilized to isolate high affinity binders and to isolate binders for a variety of epitopes. The range of lengths of CDRH3 generated in this library is 11 to 13 amino acids, although lengths different from this can also be generated. H3 diversity can be expanded by using NNK, DVK, and NVK codon sets, as well as more limited diversity at N and/or C-terminal.
  • Diversity can also be generated in CDRH1 and CDRH2. The designs of CDR-H1 and H2 diversities follow the strategy of targeting to mimic natural antibodies repertoire as described with modification that focus the diversity more closely matched to the natural diversity than previous design.
  • For diversity in CDRH3, multiple libraries can be constructed separately with different lengths of H3 and then combined to select for binders to target antigens. The multiple libraries can be pooled and sorted using solid support selection and solution-sorting methods as described previously and herein below. Multiple sorting strategies may be employed. For example, one variation involves sorting on target bound to a solid, followed by sorting for a tag that may be present on the fusion polypeptide (e.g., anti-gD tag) and followed by another sort on target bound to solid. Alternatively, the libraries can be sorted first on target bound to a solid surface, the eluted binders are then sorted using solution phase binding with decreasing concentrations of target antigen. Utilizing combinations of different sorting methods provides for minimization of selection of only highly expressed sequences and provides for selection of a number of different high affinity clones.
  • High affinity binders for the target antigen can be isolated from the libraries. Limiting diversity in the H1/H2 region decreases degeneracy about 104 to 105 fold and allowing more H3 diversity provides for more high affinity binders. Utilizing libraries with different types of diversity in CDRH3 (e.g., utilizing DVK or NVT) provides for isolation of binders that may bind to different epitopes of a target antigen.
  • Of the binders isolated from the pooled libraries as described above, it has been discovered that affinity may be further improved by providing limited diversity in the light chain. Light chain diversity is generated in this embodiment as follows in CDRL1: amino acid position 28 is encoded by RDT; amino acid position 29 is encoded by RKT; amino acid position 30 is encoded by RVW; amino acid position 31 is encoded by ANW; amino acid position 32 is encoded by THT; optionally, amino acid position 33 is encoded by CTG; in CDRL2: amino acid position 50 is encoded by KBG; amino acid position 53 is encoded by AVC; and optionally, amino acid position 55 is encoded by GMA; in CDRL3: amino acid position 91 is encoded by TMT or SRT or both; amino acid position 92 is encoded by DMC; amino acid position 93 is encoded by RVT; amino acid position 94 is encoded by NHT; and amino acid position 96 is encoded by TWT or YKG or both.
  • In another embodiment, a library or libraries with diversity in CDRH1, CDRH2, and CDRH3 regions is generated. In this embodiment, diversity in CDRH3 is generated using a variety of lengths of H3 regions and using primarily codon sets XYZ and NNK or NNS. Libraries can be formed using individual oligonucleotides and pooled or oligonucleotides can be pooled to form a subset of libraries. The libraries of this embodiment can be sorted against target bound to solid. Clones isolated from multiple sorts can be screened for specificity and affinity using ELISA assays. For specificity, the clones can be screened against the desired target antigens as well as other nontarget antigens. Those binders to the target antigen can then be screened for affinity in solution binding competition ELISA assay or spot competition assay. High affinity binders can be isolated from the library utilizing XYZ codon sets prepared as described above. These binders can be readily produced as antibodies or antigen binding fragments in high yield in cell culture.
  • In some embodiments, it may be desirable to generate libraries with a greater diversity in lengths of CDRH3 region. For example, it may be desirable to generate libraries with CDRH3 regions ranging from about 7 to 19 amino acids.
  • High affinity binders isolated from the libraries of these embodiments are readily produced in bacterial and eukaryotic cell culture in high yield. The vectors can be designed to readily remove sequences such as gD tags, viral coat protein component sequence, and/or to add in constant region sequences to provide for production of full length antibodies or antigen binding fragments in high yield.
  • A library with mutations in CDRH3 can be combined with a library containing variant versions of other CDRs, for example CDRL1, CDRL2, CDRL3, CDRH1, and/or CDRH2. Thus, for example, in one embodiment, a CDRH3 library is combined with a CDRL3 library created in the context of the humanized 4D5 antibody sequence with variant amino acids at positions 28, 29, 30, 31, and/or 32 using predetermined codon sets. In another embodiment, a library with mutations to the CDRH3 can be combined with a library comprising variant CDRH1 and/or CDRH2 heavy chain variable domains. In one embodiment, the CDRH1 library is created with the humanized antibody 4D5 sequence with variant amino acids at positions 28, 30, 31, 32, and 33. A CDRH2 library may be created with the sequence of humanized antibody 4D5 with variant amino acids at positions 50, 52, 53, 54, 56, and 58 using the predetermined codon sets.
  • (xi) Antibody Mutants
  • The antibodies generated from phage libraries can be further modified to generate antibody mutants with improved physical, chemical, and/or biological properties over the parent antibody. Where the assay used is a biological activity assay, the antibody mutant can have a biological activity in the assay of choice that is at least about 10 fold better, at least about 20 fold better, at least about 50 fold better, and sometimes at least about 100 fold or 200 fold better, than the biological activity of the parent antibody in that assay. For example, an anti-target antibody mutant may have a binding affinity for the target that is at least about 10 fold stronger, at least about 20 fold stronger, at least about 50 fold stronger, and sometimes at least about 100 fold or 200 fold stronger, than the binding affinity of the parent antibody.
  • To generate the antibody mutant, one or more amino acid alterations (e.g., substitutions) are introduced in one or more of the hypervariable regions of the parent antibody. Alternatively, or in addition, one or more alterations (e.g., substitutions) of framework region residues may be introduced in the parent antibody where these result in an improvement in the binding affinity of the antibody mutant for the antigen from the second mammalian species. Examples of framework region residues to modify include those that non-covalently bind antigen directly (Amit et al., Science 233:747-753, 1986); interact with/affect the conformation of a CDR (Chothia et al., J. Mol. Biol. 196:901-917, 1987); and/or participate in the VL-VH interface (EP 239 400B1). In certain embodiments, modification of one or more of such framework region residues results in an enhancement of the binding affinity of the antibody for the antigen from the second mammalian species. For example, from about one to about five framework residues may be altered in this embodiment of the invention. Sometimes, this may be sufficient to yield an antibody mutant suitable for use in preclinical trials, even where none of the hypervariable region residues have been altered. Normally, however, the antibody mutant will comprise additional hypervariable region alteration(s).
  • The hypervariable region residues that are altered may be changed randomly, especially where the starting binding affinity of the parent antibody is such that such randomly produced antibody mutants can be readily screened.
  • One useful procedure for generating such antibody mutants is called “alanine scanning mutagenesis” (Cunningham et al., Science 244:1081-1085, 1989). Here, one or more of the hypervariable region residue(s) are replaced by alanine or polyalanine residue(s) to affect the interaction of the amino acids with the antigen from the second mammalian species. Those hypervariable region residue(s) demonstrating functional sensitivity to the substitutions then are refined by introducing further or other mutations at or for the sites of substitution. Thus, while the site for introducing an amino acid sequence variation is predetermined, the nature of the mutation per se need not be predetermined. The ala-mutants produced this way are screened for their biological activity as described herein.
  • Normally one would start with a conservative substitution such as those shown below under the heading of “preferred substitutions.” If such substitutions result in a change in biological activity (e.g., binding affinity), then more substantial changes, denominated “exemplary substitutions” in the Table 4, or as further described below in reference to amino acid classes, are introduced and the products screened.
  • TABLE 4
    Original Exemplary Preferred
    Residue Substitutions Substitutions
    Ala (A) val; leu; ile val
    Arg (R) lys; gln; asn lys
    Asn (N) gln; his; lys; arg gln
    Asp (D) glu glu
    Cys (C) ser ser
    Gln (Q) asn asn
    Glu (E) asp asp
    Gly (G) pro; ala ala
    His (H) asn; gln; lys; arg arg
    Ile (I) leu; val; met; ala; phe; leu
    norleucine
    Leu (L) norleucine; ile; val; met; ala; ile
    phe
    Lys (K) arg; gln; asn arg
    Met (M) leu; phe; ile leu
    Phe (F) leu; val; ile; ala; tyr leu
    Pro (P) ala ala
    Ser (S) thr thr
    Thr (T) ser ser
    Trp (W) tyr; phe tyr
    Tyr (Y) trp; phe; thr; ser phe
    Val (V) ile; leu; met; phe; ala; leu
    norleucine
  • Even more substantial modifications in the antibodies biological properties are accomplished by selecting substitutions that differ significantly in their effect on maintaining (a) the structure of the polypeptide backbone in the area of the substitution, for example, as a sheet or helical conformation, (b) the charge or hydrophobicity of the molecule at the target site, or (c) the bulk of the side chain. Naturally occurring residues are divided into groups based on common side-chain properties:
  • (1) hydrophobic: norleucine, met, ala, val, leu, ile;
  • (2) neutral hydrophilic: cys, ser, thr, asn, gln;
  • (3) acidic: asp, glu;
  • (4) basic: his, lys, arg;
  • (5) residues that influence chain orientation: gly, pro; and
  • (6) aromatic: trp, tyr, phe.
  • Non-conservative substitutions will entail exchanging a member of one of these classes for another class.
  • In another embodiment, the sites selected for modification are affinity matured using phage display (see above).
  • Nucleic acid molecules encoding amino acid sequence mutants are prepared by a variety of methods known in the art. These methods include, but are not limited to, oligonucleotide-mediated (or site-directed) mutagenesis (see, e.g., Kunkel, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:488 (1985)), PCR mutagenesis, and cassette mutagenesis of an earlier prepared mutant or a non-mutant version of the parent antibody.
  • In certain embodiments, the antibody mutant will only have a single hypervariable region residue substituted. In other embodiments, two or more of the hypervariable region residues of the parent antibody will have been substituted, e.g., from about two to about ten hypervariable region substitutions.
  • Ordinarily, the antibody mutant with improved biological properties will have an amino acid sequence having at least 75% amino acid sequence identity or similarity with the amino acid sequence of either the heavy or light chain variable domain of the parent antibody, for example, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95% sequence identity or similarity. Identity or similarity with respect to this sequence is defined herein as the percentage of amino acid residues in the candidate sequence that are identical (i.e., same residue) or similar (i.e., amino acid residue from the same group based on common side-chain properties, see above) with the parent antibody residues, after aligning the sequences and introducing gaps, if necessary, to achieve the maximum percent sequence identity. None of N-terminal, C-terminal, or internal extensions, deletions, or insertions into the antibody sequence outside of the variable domain shall be construed as affecting sequence identity or similarity.
  • Following production of the antibody mutant, the biological activity of that molecule relative to the parent antibody is determined. As noted above, this may involve determining the binding affinity and/or other biological activities of the antibody. In a preferred embodiment of the invention, a panel of antibody mutants is prepared and screened for binding affinity for the antigen or a fragment thereof. One or more of the antibody mutants selected from this initial screen are optionally subjected to one or more further biological activity assays to confirm that the antibody mutant(s) with enhanced binding affinity are indeed useful, e.g., for preclinical studies.
  • The antibody mutant(s) so selected may be subjected to further modifications, oftentimes depending on the intended use of the antibody. Such modifications may involve further alteration of the amino acid sequence, fusion to heterologous polypeptide(s) and/or covalent modifications such as those elaborated below. With respect to amino acid sequence alterations, exemplary modifications are elaborated above. For example, any cysteine residue not involved in maintaining the proper conformation of the antibody mutant also may be substituted, generally with serine, to improve the oxidative stability of the molecule and prevent aberrant cross linking. Conversely, cysteine bond(s) may be added to the antibody to improve its stability (particularly where the antibody is an antibody fragment such as an Fv fragment). Another type of amino acid mutant has an altered glycosylation pattern. This may be achieved by deleting one or more carbohydrate moieties found in the antibody, and/or adding one or more glycosylation sites that are not present in the antibody. Glycosylation of antibodies is typically either N-linked or O-linked. N-linked refers to the attachment of the carbohydrate moiety to the side chain of an asparagine residue. The tripeptide sequences asparagine-X-serine and asparagine-X-threonine, where X is any amino acid except proline, are the recognition sequences for enzymatic attachment of the carbohydrate moiety to the asparagine side chain. Thus, the presence of either of these tripeptide sequences in a polypeptide creates a potential glycosylation site. O-linked glycosylation refers to the attachment of one of the sugars N-aceylgalactosamine, galactose, or xylose to a hydroxyamino acid, most commonly serine or threonine, although 5-hydroxyproline or 5-hydroxylysine may also be used. Addition of glycosylation sites to the antibody is conveniently accomplished by altering the amino acid sequence such that it contains one or more of the above-described tripeptide sequences (for N-linked glycosylation sites). The alteration may also be made by the addition of, or substitution by, one or more serine or threonine residues to the sequence of the original antibody (for 0-linked glycosylation sites).
  • (xii) Recombinant Production of Antibodies
  • For recombinant production of an antibody, a nucleic acid encoding the antibody is isolated and inserted into a replicable vector for further cloning (amplification of the DNA) or for expression. DNA encoding the monoclonal antibody is readily isolated and sequenced using conventional procedures (e.g., by using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding the heavy and light chains of the antibody). Many vectors are available. The vector components generally include, but are not limited to, one or more of the following: a signal sequence, an origin of replication, one or more marker genes, an enhancer element, a promoter, and a transcription termination sequence (e.g., as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,534,615, which is specifically incorporated herein by reference).
  • Suitable host cells for cloning or expressing the DNA in the vectors herein are the prokaryote, yeast, or higher eukaryote cells described above. Suitable prokaryotes for this purpose include eubacteria, such as Gram-negative or Gram-positive organisms, for example, Enterobacteriaceae such as Escherichia, e.g., E. coli, Enterobacter, Erwinia, Klebsiella, Proteus, Salmonella, e.g., Salmonella typhimurium, Serrafia, e.g., Serratia marcescans, and Shigella, as well as Bacilli such as B. subtilis and B. licheniformis (e.g., B. licheniformis 41P disclosed in DD 266,710), Pseudomonas such as P. aeruginosa, and Streptomyces. One exemplary E. coli cloning host is E. coli 294 (ATCC 31,446), although other strains such as E. coli B, E. coli X 1776 (ATCC 31,537), and E. coli W3110 (ATCC 27,325) are suitable. These examples are illustrative rather than limiting.
  • In addition to prokaryotes, eukaryotic microbes such as filamentous fungi or yeast are suitable cloning or expression hosts for antibody-encoding vectors. Saccharomyces cerevisiae, or common baker's yeast, is the most commonly used among lower eukaryotic host microorganisms. However, a number of other genera, species, and strains are commonly available and useful herein, such as Schizosaccharomyces pombe; Kluyveromyces hosts such as, e.g., K. lactis, K. fragilis (ATCC 12,424), K. bulgaricus (ATCC 16,045), K. wickeramii (ATCC 24,178), K. waltii (ATCC 56,500), K. drosophilarum (ATCC 36,906), K. thermotolerans, and K. marxianus; yarrowia (EP 402,226); Pichia pastoris (EP 183,070); Candida; Trichoderma reesia (EP 244,234); Neurospora crassa; Schwanniomyces such as Schwanniomyces occidentalis; and filamentous fungi such as, e.g., Neurospora, Penicillium, Tolypocladium, and Aspergillus hosts such as A. nidulans and A. niger.
  • Suitable host cells for the expression of glycosylated antibody are derived from multicellular organisms. Examples of invertebrate cells include plant and insect cells. Numerous baculoviral strains and variants and corresponding permissive insect host cells from hosts such as Spodoptera frugiperda (caterpillar), Aedes aegypti (mosquito), Aedes albopictus (mosquito), Drosophila melanogaster (fruitfly), and Bombyx mori have been identified. A variety of viral strains for transfection are publicly available, e.g., the L-1 variant of Autographa californica NPV and the Bm-5 strain of Bombyx mori NPV, and such viruses may be used as the virus herein according to the present invention, particularly for transfection of Spodoptera frugiperda cells. Plant cell cultures of cotton, corn, potato, soybean, petunia, tomato, and tobacco can also be utilized as hosts.
  • However, interest has been greatest in vertebrate cells, and propagation of vertebrate cells in culture (tissue culture) has become a routine procedure. Examples of useful mammalian host cell lines are monkey kidney CV1 line transformed by SV40 (COS-7, ATCC CRL 1651); human embryonic kidney line (293 or 293 cells subloned for growth in suspension culture, Graham et al., J. Gen. Virol. 36:59 (1977)); baby hamster kidney cells (BHK, ATCC CCL 10); Chinese hamster ovary cells/−DHFR (CHO, Urlaub et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 77:4216, 1980); mouse sertoli cells (TM4, Mather, Biol. Reprod. 23:243-25, 1980); monkey kidney cells (CV1 ATCC CCL 70); African green monkey kidney cells (VERO-76, ATCC CRL-1587); human cervical carcinoma cells (HELA, ATCC CCL 2); canine kidney cells (MDCK, ATCC CCL 34); buffalo rat liver cells (BRL 3A, ATCC CRL 1442); human lung cells (W138, ATCC CCL 75); human liver cells (Hep G2, HB 8065); mouse mammary tumor (MMT 060562, ATCC CCL51); TRI cells (Mather et al., Annals N.Y. Acad. Sci. 383:44-68, 1982); MRC 5 cells; FS4 cells; and a human hepatoma line (Hep G2).
  • Host cells are transformed with the above-described expression or cloning vectors for antibody production and cultured in conventional nutrient media modified as appropriate for inducing promoters, selecting transformants, or amplifying the genes encoding the desired sequences.
  • The host cells used to produce antibodies for use in the invention may be cultured in a variety of media. Commercially available media such as Ham's F10 (Sigma), Minimal Essential Medium (MEM, Sigma), RPMI-1640 (Sigma), and Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium (DMEM, Sigma) are suitable for culturing the host cells. In addition, any of the media described in Ham et al., Meth. Enz. 58:44, 1979, Barnes et al., Anal. Biochem. 102:255, 1980, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,767,704; 4,657,866; 4,927,762; 4,560,655; or 5,122,469; WO 90/03430; WO 87/00195; or U.S. Pat. No. Re. 30,985 may be used as culture media for the host cells. Any of these media may be supplemented as necessary with hormones and/or other growth factors (such as insulin, transferrin, or epidermal growth factor), salts (such as sodium chloride, calcium, magnesium, and phosphate), buffers (such as HEPES), nucleotides (such as adenosine and thymidine), antibiotics (such as GENTAMYCIN™), trace elements (defined as inorganic compounds usually present at final concentrations in the micromolar range), and glucose or an equivalent energy source. Any other necessary supplements may also be included at appropriate concentrations that would be known to those skilled in the art. The culture conditions, such as temperature, pH, and the like, are those previously used with the host cell selected for expression, and will be apparent to the ordinarily skilled artisan.
  • When using recombinant techniques, the antibody can be produced intracellularly, in the periplasmic space, or directly secreted into the medium. If the antibody is produced intracellularly, as a first step, the particulate debris, either host cells or lysed cells, is removed, for example, by centrifugation or ultrafiltration. Where the antibody is secreted into the medium, supernatants from such expression systems are generally first concentrated using a commercially available protein concentration filter, for example, an Amicon or Millipore Pellicon ultrafiltration unit. A protease inhibitor such as PMSF may be included in any of the foregoing steps to inhibit proteolysis and antibiotics may be included to prevent the growth of adventitious contaminants.
  • The antibody composition prepared from the cells can be purified using, for example, hydroxylapatite chromatography, gel electrophoresis, dialysis, and affinity chromatography. The suitability of protein A as an affinity ligand depends on the species and isotype of any immunoglobulin Fc domain that is present in the antibody. Protein A can be used to purify antibodies that are based on human γ1, γ2, or γ4 heavy chains (Lindmark et al., J. Immunol. Meth. 62:1-13, 1983). Protein G is recommended for all mouse isotypes and for human γ3 (Guss et al., EMBO J. 5:1567-1575, 1986). The matrix to which the affinity ligand is attached is most often agarose, but other matrices are available. Mechanically stable matrices such as controlled pore glass or poly(styrenedivinyl)benzene allow for faster flow rates and shorter processing times than can be achieved with agarose. Where the antibody comprises a CH3 domain, the Bakerbond ABX™ resin (J. T. Baker, Phillipsburg, N.J.) is useful for purification. Other techniques for protein purification such as fractionation on an ion-exchange column, ethanol precipitation, Reverse Phase HPLC, chromatography on silica, chromatography on heparin SEPHAROSE™ chromatography on an anion or cation exchange resin (such as a polyaspartic acid column), chromatofocusing, SDS-PAGE, and ammonium sulfate precipiation are also available depending on the antibody to be recovered.
    • E. Use of Inhibitors of Neuron or Axon Degeneration
  • Inhibitors of the targets described herein, such as inhibitors identified or characterized in the screening assays described herein (e.g., the particular inhibitors described above) can be used in methods for inhibiting neuron or axon degeneration. The inhibitors are, therefore, useful in the therapy of, for example, (i) disorders of the nervous system (e.g., neurodegenerative diseases), (ii) conditions of the nervous system that are secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system, (iii) injuries to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma, (iv) pain, (v) ocular-related neurodegeneration, (vi) memory loss, and (vii) psychiatric disorders. Non-limiting examples of some of these diseases, conditions, and injuries are provided below.
  • Examples of neurodegenerative diseases and conditions that can be prevented or treated according to the invention include amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), trigeminal neuralgia, glossopharyngeal neuralgia, Bell's Palsy, myasthenia gravis, muscular dystrophy, progressive muscular atrophy, primary lateral sclerosis (PLS), pseudobulbar palsy, progressive bulbar palsy, spinal muscular atrophy, progressive bulbar palsy, inherited muscular atrophy, invertebrate disk syndromes (e.g., herniated, ruptured, and prolapsed disk syndromes), cervical spondylosis, plexus disorders, thoracic outlet destruction syndromes, peripheral neuropathies, prophyria, mild cognitive impairment, Alzheimer's disease, Huntington's disease, Parkinson's disease, Parkinson's-plus diseases (e.g., multiple system atrophy, progressive supranuclear palsy, and corticobasal degeneration), dementia with Lewy bodies, frontotemporal dementia, demyelinating diseases (e.g., Guillain-Barré syndrome and multiple sclerosis), Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease (CMT; also known as Hereditary Motor and Sensory Neuropathy (HMSN), Hereditary Sensorimotor Neuropathy (HSMN), and Peroneal Muscular Atrophy), prion disease (e.g., Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, Gerstmann-Sträussler-Scheinker syndrome (GSS), fatal familial insomnia (FFI), and bovine spongiform encephalopathy (BSE, commonly known as mad cow disease)), Pick's disease, epilepsy, and AIDS demential complex (also known as HIV dementia, HIV encephalopathy, and HIV-associated dementia).
  • The methods of the invention can also be used in the prevention and treatment of ocular-related neurodegeneration and related diseases and conditions, such as glaucoma, lattice dystrophy, retinitis pigmentosa, age-related macular degeneration (AMD), photoreceptor degeneration associated with wet or dry AMD, other retinal degeneration, optic nerve drusen, optic neuropathy, and optic neuritis. Non-limiting examples of different types of glaucoma that can be prevented or treated according to the invention include primary glaucoma (also known as primary open-angle glaucoma, chronic open-angle glaucoma, chronic simple glaucoma, and glaucoma simplex), low-tension glaucoma, primary angle-closure glaucoma (also known as primary closed-angle glaucoma, narrow-angle glaucoma, pupil-block glaucoma, and acute congestive glaucoma), acute angle-closure glaucoma, chronic angle-closure glaucoma, intermittent angle-closure glaucoma, chronic open-angle closure glaucoma, pigmentary glaucoma, exfoliation glaucoma (also known as pseudoexfoliative glaucoma or glaucoma capsulare), developmental glaucoma (e.g., primary congenital glaucoma and infantile glaucoma), secondary glaucoma (e.g., inflammatory glaucoma (e.g., uveitis and Fuchs heterochromic iridocyclitis)), phacogenic glaucoma (e.g., angle-closure glaucoma with mature cataract, phacoanaphylactic glaucoma secondary to rupture of lens capsule, phacolytic glaucoma due to phacotoxic meshwork blockage, and subluxation of lens), glaucoma secondary to intraocular hemorrhage (e.g., hyphema and hemolytic glaucoma, also known as erythroclastic glaucoma), traumatic glaucoma (e.g., angle recession glaucoma, traumatic recession on anterior chamber angle, postsurgical glaucoma, aphakic pupillary block, and ciliary block glaucoma), neovascular glaucoma, drug-induced glaucoma (e.g., corticosteroid induced glaucoma and alpha-chymotrypsin glaucoma), toxic glaucoma, and glaucoma associated with intraocular tumors, retinal deatchments, severe chemical burns of the eye, and iris atrophy.
  • Examples of types of pain that can be treated according to the methods of the invention include those associated with the following conditions: chronic pain, fibromyalgia, spinal pain, carpel tunnel syndrome, pain from cancer, arthritis, sciatica, headaches, pain from surgery, muscle spasms, back pain, visceral pain, pain from injury, dental pain, neuralgia, such as neuogenic or neuropathic pain, nerve inflammation or damage, shingles, herniated disc, torn ligament, and diabetes.
  • Certain diseases and conditions having primary effects outside of the nervous system can lead to damage to the nervous system, which can be treated according to the methods of the present invention. Examples of such conditions include peripheral neuropathy and neuralgia caused by, for example, diabetes, cancer, AIDS, hepatitis, kidney dysfunction, Colorado tick fever, diphtheria, HIV infection, leprosy, lyme disease, polyarteritis nodosa, rheumatoid arthritis, sarcoidosis, Sjogren syndrome, syphilis, systemic lupus erythematosus, and amyloidosis.
  • In addition, the methods of the invention can be used in the treatment of nerve damage, such as peripheral neuropathy, which is caused by exposure to toxic compounds, including heavy metals (e.g., lead, arsenic, and mercury) and industrial solvents, as well as drugs including chemotherapeutic agents (e.g., vincristine and cisplatin), dapsone, HIV medications (e.g., Zidovudine, Didanosine, Stavudine, Zalcitabine, Ritonavir, and Amprenavir), cholesterol lowering drugs (e.g., Lovastatin, Indapamid, and Gemfibrozil), heart or blood pressure medications (e.g., Amiodarone, Hydralazine, Perhexiline), and Metronidazole.
  • The methods of the invention can also be used to treat injury to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma. Thus, the methods can be used in the treatment of peripheral nerve damage caused by physical injury (associated with, e.g., burns, wounds, surgery, and accidents), ischemia, prolonged exposure to cold temperature (e.g., frost-bite), as well as damage to the central nervous system due to, e.g., stroke or intracranial hemorrhage (such as cerebral hemorrhage).
  • Further, the methods of the invention can be used in the prevention or treatment of memory loss such as, for example, age-related memory loss. Types of memory that can be affected by loss, and thus treated according to the invention, include episodic memory, semantic memory, short-term memory, and long-term memory. Examples of diseases and conditions associated with memory loss, which can be treated according to the present invention, include mild cognitive impairment, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, chemotherapy, stress, stroke, and traumatic brain injury (e.g., concussion).
  • The methods of the invention can also be used in the treatment of psychiatric disorders including, for example, schizophrenia, delusional disorder, schizoaffective disorder, schizopheniform, shared psychotic disorder, psychosis, paranoid personality disorder, schizoid personality disorder, borderline personality disorder, anti-social personality disorder, narcissistic personality disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder, delirium, dementia, mood disorders, bipolar disorder, depression, stress disorder, panic disorder, agoraphobia, social phobia, post-traumatic stress disorder, anxiety disorder, and impulse control disorders (e.g., kleptomania, pathological gambling, pyromania, and trichotillomania).
  • In addition to the in vivo methods described above, the methods of the invention can be used to treat nerves ex vivo, which may be helpful in the context of nerve grafts or nerve transplants. Thus, the inhibitors described herein can be useful as components of culture media for use in culturing nerve cells in vitro.
  • Therapeutic formulations of the inhibitors described herein are prepared for storage by mixing the inhibitor (such as small molecule or an antibody) having the desired degree of purity with optional physiologically acceptable carriers, excipients, or stabilizers (see, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences (18th edition), ed. A. Gennaro, 1990, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa.), in the form of lyophilized cake or aqueous solutions. Acceptable carriers, excipients, or stabilizers are nontoxic to recipients at the dosages and concentrations employed, and can include buffers such as phosphate, citrate, and other organic acids; antioxidants including ascorbic acid, BHA, and BHT; low molecular weight (less than about 10 residues) polypeptides; proteins, such as serum albumin, gelatin or immunoglobulins; hydrophilic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone, amino acids such as glycine, glutamine, asparagine, arginine, or lysine; monosaccharides, disaccharides, and other carbohydrates including glucose, mannose, or dextrins; chelating agents such as EDTA; sugar alcohols such as mannitol or sorbitol; salt-forming counter-ions such as sodium; and/or nonionic surfactants such as Tween, Pluronics, or PEG.
  • Inhibitors to be used for in vivo administration must be sterile, which can be achieved by filtration through sterile filtration membranes, prior to or following lyophilization and reconstitution. Therapeutic compositions may be placed into a container having a sterile access port, for example, an intravenous solution bag or vial having a stopper pierceable by a hypodermic injection needle.
  • The inhibitors can be optionally combined with or administered in concert with each other or other agents known to be useful in the treatment of the relevant disease or condition. Thus, in the treatment of ALS, for example, inhibitors can be administered in combination with Riluzole (Rilutek), minocycline, insulin-like growth factor 1 (IGF-1), and/or methylcobalamin. In another example, in the treatment of Parkinson's disease, inhibitors can be administered with L-dopa, dopamine agonists (e.g., bromocriptine, pergolide, pramipexole, ropinirole, cabergoline, apomorphine, and lisuride), dopa decarboxylase inhibitors (e.g., levodopa, benserazide, and carbidopa), and/or MAO-B inhibitors (e.g., selegiline and rasagiline). In a further example, in the treatment of Alzheimer's disease, inhibitors can be administered with acetylcholinesterase inhibitors (e.g., donepezil, galantamine, and rivastigmine) and/or NMDA receptor antagonists (e.g., memantine). The combination therapies can involve concurrent or sequential administration, by the same or different routes, as determined to be appropriate by those of skill in the art. The invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions and kits including combinations as described herein.
  • In addition to the combinations noted above, other combinations included in the invention are combinations of inhibitors of degeneration of different neuronal regions. Thus, the invention includes combinations of agents that (i) inhibit degeneration of the neuron cell body, and (ii) inhibit axon degeneration. As described further below, inhibitors of GSK and transcription were found to prevent degeneration of neuron cell bodies, while inhibitors of EGFR and p38 MAPK prevent degeneration of axons. Thus, the invention includes combinations of inhibitors of GSK and EGFR (and/or p38 MAPK), combinations of transcription inhibitors and EGFR (and/or p38 MAPK), and further combinations of inhibitors of dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase (DLK), glycogen synthase kinase 3β (GSK3β), p38 MAPK, EGFF, phosphoinositide 3-kinase (PI3K), cyclin-dependent kinase 5 (cdk5), adenylyl cyclase, c-Jun N-terminal kinase (JNK), BCL2-associated X protein (Bax), In channel, calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase (CaMKK), a G-protein, a G-protein coupled receptor, transcription factor 4 (TCF4), and β-catenin. The inhibitors used in these combinations can be any of those described herein, or other inhibitors of these targets.
  • The route of administration of the inhibitors is selected in accordance with known methods, e.g., injection or infusion by intravenous, intraperitoneal, intracerebral, intramuscular, intraocular, intraarterial or intralesional routes, topical administration, or by sustained release systems as described below.
  • For intracerebral use, the compounds can be administered continuously by infusion into the fluid reservoirs of the CNS, although bolus injection may be acceptable. The inhibitors can be administered into the ventricles of the brain or otherwise introduced into the CNS or spinal fluid. Administration can be performed by use of an indwelling catheter and a continuous administration means such as a pump, or it can be administered by implantation, e.g., intracerebral implantation of a sustained-release vehicle. More specifically, the inhibitors can be injected through chronically implanted cannulas or chronically infused with the help of osmotic minipumps. Subcutaneous pumps are available that deliver proteins through a small tubing to the cerebral ventricles. Highly sophisticated pumps can be refilled through the skin and their delivery rate can be set without surgical intervention. Examples of suitable administration protocols and delivery systems involving a subcutaneous pump device or continuous intracerebroventricular infusion through a totally implanted drug delivery system are those used for the administration of dopamine, dopamine agonists, and cholinergic agonists to Alzheimer's disease patients and animal models for Parkinson's disease, as described by Harbaugh, J. Neural Transm. Suppl. 24:271, 1987; and DeYebenes et al., Mov. Disord. 2:143, 1987.
  • Suitable examples of sustained release preparations include semipermeable polymer matrices in the form of shaped articles, e.g., films or microcapsules. Sustained release matrices include polyesters, hydrogels, polylactides (U.S. Pat. No. 3,773,919; EP 58,481), copolymers of L-glutamic acid and gamma ethyl-L-glutamate (Sidman et al., Biopolymers 22:547, 1983), poly (2-hydroxyethyl-methacrylate) (Langer et al., J. Biomed. Mater. Res. 15:167, 1981; Langer, Chem. Tech. 12:98, 1982), ethylene vinyl acetate (Langer, et al., Id), or poly-D-(−)-3-hydroxybutyric acid (EP 133,988A). Sustained release compositions also include liposomally entrapped compounds, which can be prepared by methods known per se (Epstein et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 82:3688, 1985; Hwang et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 77:4030, 1980; U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,485,045 and 4,544,545; and EP 102,324A). Ordinarily, the liposomes are of the small (about 200-800 Angstroms) unilamelar type in which the lipid content is greater than about 30 mol % cholesterol, the selected proportion being adjusted for the optimal therapy.
  • An effective amount of an active compound to be employed therapeutically will depend, for example, upon the therapeutic objectives, the route of administration, and the condition of the patient. Accordingly, it will be necessary for the therapist to titer the dosage and modify the route of administration as required to obtain the optimal therapeutic effect. A typical daily dosage might range from, for example, about 1 μg/kg to up to 100 mg/kg or more (e.g., about 1 μg/kg to 1 mg/kg, about 1 μg/kg to about 5 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg to 10 mg/kg, about 5 mg/kg to about 200 mg/kg, about 50 mg/kg to about 150 mg/mg, about 100 mg/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 100 mg/kg to about 400 mg/kg, and about 200 mg/kg to about 400 mg/kg), depending on the factors mentioned above. Typically, the clinician will administer an active inhibitor until a dosage is reached that results in improvement in or, optimally, elimination of, one or more symptoms of the treated disease or condition. The progress of this therapy is easily monitored by conventional assays. One or more agent provided herein may be administered together or at different times (e.g., one agent is administered prior to the administration of a second agent). One or more agent may be administered to a subject using different techniques (e.g., one agent may be administered orally, while a second agent is administered via intramuscular injection or intranasally). One or more agent may be administered such that the one or more agent has a pharmacologic effect in a subject at the same time. Alternatively, one or more agent may be administered, such that the pharmacological activity of the first administered agent is expired prior the administration of one or more secondarily administered agents (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 secondarily administered agents).
  • Antibodies of the invention (and adjunct therapeutic agent) can be administered by any suitable means, including parenteral, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intrapulmonary, intranasal, and, if desired for local treatment, intralesional administration. Parenteral infusions include intramuscular, intravenous, intraarterial, intraperitoneal, and subcutaneous administration. In addition, antibodies can be administered by pulse infusion, particularly with declining doses of the antibody. Dosing can be by any suitable route, e.g., by injections, such as intravenous or subcutaneous injections, depending in part on whether the administration is brief or chronic.
  • The location of the binding target of an antibody used in the invention can be taken into consideration in preparation and administration of the antibody. When the binding target is an intracellular molecule, certain embodiments of the invention provide for the antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof to be introduced into the cell where the binding target is located. In one embodiment, an antibody of the invention can be expressed intracellularly as an intrabody. The term “intrabody,” as used herein, refers to an antibody or antigen-binding portion thereof that is expressed intracellularly and that is capable of selectively binding to a target molecule, as described in Marasco, Gene Therapy 4:11-15, 1997; Kontermann, Methods 34:163-170, 2004; U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,004,940 and 6,329,173; U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2003/0104402, and PCT Publication No. WO 03/077945. Intracellular expression of an intrabody is effected by introducing a nucleic acid encoding the desired antibody or antigen-binding portion thereof (lacking the wild-type leader sequence and secretory signals normally associated with the gene encoding that antibody or antigen-binding fragment) into a target cell. Any standard method of introducing nucleic acids into a cell may be used, including, but not limited to, microinjection, ballistic injection, electroporation, calcium phosphate precipitation, liposomes, and transfection with retroviral, adenoviral, adeno-associated viral and vaccinia vectors carrying the nucleic acid of interest.
  • In another embodiment, internalizing antibodies are provided. Antibodies can possess certain characteristics that enhance delivery of antibodies into cells, or can be modified to possess such characteristics. Techniques for achieving this are known in the art. For example, cationization of an antibody is known to facilitate its uptake into cells (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,703,019). Lipofections or liposomes can also be used to deliver the antibody into cells. Where antibody fragments are used, the smallest inhibitory fragment that specifically binds to the binding domain of the target protein is generally advantageous. For example, based upon the variable-region sequences of an antibody, peptide molecules can be designed that retain the ability to bind the target protein sequence. Such peptides can be synthesized chemically and/or produced by recombinant DNA technology (see, e.g., Marasco et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 90:7889-7893, 1993).
  • Entry of modulator polypeptides into target cells can be enhanced by methods known in the art. For example, certain sequences, such as those derived from HIV Tat or the Antennapedia homeodomain protein are able to direct efficient uptake of heterologous proteins across cell membranes (see, e.g., Chen et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 96:4325-4329, 1999).
  • When the binding target is located in the brain, certain embodiments of the invention provide for the antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof to traverse the blood-brain barrier. Certain neurodegenerative diseases are associated with an increase in permeability of the blood-brain barrier, such that the antibody or antigen-binding fragment can be readily introduced to the brain. When the blood-brain barrier remains intact, several art-known approaches exist for transporting molecules across it, including, but not limited to, physical methods, lipid-based methods, and receptor and channel-based methods.
  • Physical methods of transporting the antibody or antigen-binding fragment across the blood-brain barrier include, but are not limited to, circumventing the blood-brain barrier entirely, or by creating openings in the blood-brain barrier. Circumvention methods include, but are not limited to, direct injection into the brain (see, e.g., Papanastassiou et al., Gene Therapy 9:398-406, 2002), interstitial infusion/convection-enhanced delivery (see, e.g., Bobo et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 91:2076-2080, 1994), and implanting a delivery device in the brain (see, e.g., Gill et al., Nature Med. 9:589-595, 2003; and Gliadel Wafers™, Guildford Pharmaceutical). Methods of creating openings in the barrier include, but are not limited to, ultrasound (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Publication No. 2002/0038086), osmotic pressure (e.g., by administration of hypertonic mannitol (Neuwelt, E. A., Implication of the Blood-Brain Barrier and its Manipulation, Volumes 1 and 2, Plenum Press, N.Y., 1989)), permeabilization by, e.g., bradykinin or permeabilizer A-7 (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,112,596, 5,268,164, 5,506,206, and 5,686,416), and transfection of neurons that straddle the blood-brain barrier with vectors containing genes encoding the antibody or antigen-binding fragment (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Publication No. 2003/0083299).
  • Lipid-based methods of transporting the antibody or antigen-binding fragment across the blood-brain barrier include, but are not limited to, encapsulating the antibody or antigen-binding fragment in liposomes that are coupled to antibody binding fragments that bind to receptors on the vascular endothelium of the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2002/0025313), and coating the antibody or antigen-binding fragment in low-density lipoprotein particles (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0204354) or apolipoprotein E (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0131692).
  • Receptor and channel-based methods of transporting the antibody or antigen-binding fragment across the blood-brain barrier include, but are not limited to, using glucocorticoid blockers to increase permeability of the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos. 2002/0065259, 2003/0162695, and 2005/0124533); activating potassium channels (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2005/0089473), inhibiting ABC drug transporters (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2003/0073713); coating antibodies with a transferrin and modulating activity of the one or more transferrin receptors (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2003/0129186), and cationizing the antibodies (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,004,697).
  • Antibody compositions used in the methods of the invention are formulated, dosed, and administered in a fashion consistent with good medical practice. Factors for consideration in this context include the particular disorder being treated, the particular mammal being treated, the clinical condition of the individual patient, the cause of the disorder, the site of delivery of the agent, the method of administration, the scheduling of administration, and other factors known to medical practitioners. The antibody need not be, but is optionally formulated with one or more agent currently used to prevent or treat the disorder in question. The effective amount of such other agents depends on the amount of antibodies of the invention present in the formulation, the type of disorder or treatment, and other factors discussed above. These are generally used in the same dosages and with administration routes as described herein, or about from 1 to 99% of the dosages described herein, or in any dosage and by any route that is empirically/clinically determined to be appropriate.
  • For the prevention or treatment of disease, the appropriate dosage of an antibody (when used alone or in combination with other agents) will depend on the type of disease to be treated, the type of antibody, the severity and course of the disease, whether the antibody is administered for preventive or therapeutic purposes, previous therapy, the patient's clinical history and response to the antibody, and the discretion of the attending physician. The antibody is suitably administered to the patient at one time or over a series of treatments. Depending on the type and severity of the disease, about 1 μg/kg to 15 mg/kg (e.g., 0.1 mg/kg-10 mg/kg) of antibody can be an initial candidate dosage for administration to the patient, whether, for example, by one or more separate administrations, or by continuous infusion. One typical daily dosage might range from about 1 μg/kg to 100 mg/kg or more, depending on the factors mentioned above. For repeated administrations over several days or longer, depending on the condition, the treatment would generally be sustained until a desired suppression of disease symptoms occurs. One exemplary dosage of the antibody would be in the range from about 0.05 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg. Thus, one or more doses of about 0.5 mg/kg, 2.0 mg/kg, 4.0 mg/kg, or 10 mg/kg (or any combination thereof) may be administered to the patient. Such doses may be administered intermittently, e.g., every week or every three weeks (e.g., such that the patient receives from about two to about twenty, or, e.g., about six doses of the antibody). An initial higher loading dose, followed by one or more lower doses may be administered. An exemplary dosing regimen comprises administering an initial loading dose of about 4 mg/kg, followed by a weekly maintenance dose of about 2 mg/kg of the antibody. However, other dosage regimens may be useful. The progress of this therapy is easily monitored by conventional techniques and assays.
    • F. Activation of Neuron or Axon Degeneration
  • The invention also includes methods for activating or increasing neuron or axon degeneration. This may be accomplished by use of an activator or agonist of one or more of the targets listed in Table 2, above (with the exception of adenylyl cyclase, with respect to which an inhibitor can be used to activate neuron or axon degeneration). Thus, agonists of dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase (DLK), glycogen synthase kinase 3β (GSK3β), p38 mitogen-activated protein kinase (p38 MAPK), epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR), phosphoinositide 3-kinase (PI3K), cyclin-dependent kinase 5 (Cdk5), c-Jun N-terminal kinase (JNK), BCL2-associated X protein (Bax), Ih channel, and calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase (CaMKK) can be used in methods of activating or increasing axon degeneration. Such agonists may be identified or characterized in assays of axon degeneration, as described herein. Thus, for example, a candidate agonist can be present in medium in which neurons are cultured, in the presence of nerve growth factor, and assessed for its effect on degeneration. Agonists of neuron or axon degeneration can be used in the prevention and treatment of diseases or conditions including epilepsy and autism, as well as any disease or condition that may be characterized by the failure of a natural process of axon pruning and degeneration. The agonists may be formulated and administered to subjects in need of such treatment using methods such as those described in section E, above.
    • G. Articles of Manufacture
  • In another aspect of the invention, an article of manufacture (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition or kit) containing materials useful for the treatment or prevention of the disorders and conditions described above is provided. The article of manufacture includes a container and a label or package insert on or associated with the container. Suitable containers include, for example, bottles, vials, syringes, etc. The containers may be formed from a variety of materials such as glass or plastic. The container holds a composition that is by itself or when combined with another composition effective for treating or preventing the condition and may have a sterile access port (for example the container may be an intravenous solution bag or a vial having a stopper pierceable by a hypodermic injection needle). At least one active agent in the composition is an inhibitor of the invention. The label or package insert indicates that the composition is used for treating the condition of choice. Moreover, the article of manufacture may include (a) a first container with a composition contained therein, wherein the composition includes an inhibitor of the invention; and (b) a second container with a composition contained therein, wherein the composition includes a further therapeutic agent. The article of manufacture in this embodiment of the invention may further include a package insert indicating that the compositions can be used to treat a particular condition. Alternatively, or additionally, the article of manufacture may further include a second (or third) container including a pharmaceutically-acceptable buffer, such as bacteriostatic water for injection (BWFI), phosphate-buffered saline, Ringer's solution and dextrose solution. It may further include other materials desirable from a commercial and user standpoint, including other buffers, diluents, filters, needles, and syringes.
  • Further details of the invention are illustrated by the following non-limiting examples.
    • H. Examples
  • As discussed above, neuron or axon degeneration is a common feature of many neurodegenerative diseases and also occurs as a result of injury or trauma to the nervous system. The mechanisms that regulate this active process, however, are just beginning to be understood. Based on studies employing different models of neuron or axon degeneration, it appears that different mechanisms may be involved in this process, depending upon the nature of the disorder or injury. To further characterize the events that regulate neuron or axon degeneration, a library of small molecule compounds targeting known signaling pathways in models of neuron or axon degeneration were screened. Multiple signaling pathways were identified as being necessary for neuron or axon degeneration. Notably, a number of kinases were identified as mediators of neuron or axon degeneration, and further mechanistic studies localized the function of distinct kinases to either the axonal or cell body compartments. These pathways were also studied in other degeneration paradigms with similar results, suggesting common molecular mechanisms leading to neuron or axon self-destruction. These experiments are described in the following Examples.
    • Example 1
  • Models of Neuron or Axon Degeneration
  • Three models of neuron or axon degeneration, which were introduced above in connection with descriptions of assays that can be used to identify and characterize inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration, as described herein, were used in the experiments described below, including anti-NGF antibody, serum deprivation/KCl reduction, and rotenone treatment assays.
  • As described above, treatment of cultured nerves with NGF results in proliferation of axons, while treating such nerves with anti-NGF antibodies results in axon degeneration (FIG. 1). Treatment of neurons with anti-NGF antibodies leads to several different morphological changes that are detectable by microscopy. For example, varicosities formed in nerves cultured with anti-NGF antibodies before axon fragmentation and, in some cases, appeared to burst (FIG. 2). In another example, axons cultured with anti-NGF antibodies lacked elongated mitochondria and showed accumulation of mitochondria in varicosities, suggesting that axon transport is blocked. A significant number of mitochondria were still active within hours of axon fragmentation (FIG. 3). A further example relates to cytoskeletal disassembly. After axotomy, the mictrotubule network disassembles prior to the actin and neurofilament networks. In contrast, in the NGF withdrawal model, the microtubule network was not disassembled before the actin or neurofilament network (FIG. 4).
  • Another model of axon degeneration is Wallerian degeneration, which is induced by the occurrence of a lesion in the axon that separates it from the cell body (FIG. 5) (see, e.g., Raff et al., Science 296(5569):868-871, 2002). In Wallerian Degeneration Slow (WldS) mutants, axon degeneration was significantly delayed, as compared to wild type controls (FIG. 5; Araki et al., Science 305(5686):1010-1013, 2004). The effect of the WldS mutant is evidence of the existence of an axonal self-destruction mechanism, which is weakened in the WldS mutant. WldS protected axons after NGF withdrawal, but did not prevent apoptosis.
  • Additional information concerning the anti-NGF antibody, serum deprivation/KCL reduction, and rotenone treatment assays is provided in Examples 2-4 (anti-NGF antibody), 7 (serum deprivation/KCl reduction), and 8 and 9 (rotenone treatment).
    • Example 2
  • Screen for Inhibitors of Neuron or Axon Degeneration
  • The anti-NGF antibody model described above in Example 1 was used in a screen for inhibitors of neuron or axon degeneration. A library of more than 400 small molecules (Tocris Bioscience) was tested to see which, if any, modulate degeneration observed in the presence of anti-NGF antibodies.
  • Methods and Materials
  • Mouse E13.5 embryos were dissected and placed into L15 medium (Invitrogen). The spinal cord was dissected out from the embryos with DRGs attached. The spinal cords with DRGs attached were placed into L15 medium+5% goat serum (Gibco) on ice. The DRGs were removed using a tungsten needle and the remaining spinal cord was disposed of. Eight well slides were filled with N3-F12 solution (23 ml Ham's F12, 1 ml N3 supplement, and 1 ml 1 M glucose) to which was added 25 ng/ml NGF (Roche). (N3 supplement was made by dilution of N3 100× concentrate, which was made by mixing the following ingredients, in the following order: 5.0 ml Hank's buffered saline solution (HBSS; Ca, Mg free; Invitrogen), 1.0 ml bovine serum albumin (10 mg/ml in HBSS=150 μm), 2.0 ml Transferrin (T1147-1G, human, 100 mg/ml in HBSS=1.1 mM), 1.0 ml sodium selenite (S9133-1MG, 0.01 mg/ml in HBSS=58 μM), 0.4 ml putrescine dihydrochloride (P5780-5G, 80 mg/ml in HBSS=500 mM), 0.2 ml progesterone (P8783-5G, 0.125 mg/ml in absolute ethanol=400 μM), 0.02 ml corticosterone (C2505-500MG, 2 mg/ml in absolute ethanol=5.8 mM), 0.1 ml triiodothyonine, sodium salt (T6397-100MG, 0.2 mg/ml in 0.01 N NaOH=300 μM), 0.4 ml insulin (16634-250MG, bovine pancreas, 241 U/mg, 25 mg/ml in 20 mM HCl=4.4 mM), for a total volume of 10.02 ml (can be stored at −20° C.). An N3 supplement stock was made by combining the following: 10 ml Pen/Strep (100×, Gibco), 10 ml glutamine (200 mM, Gibco), 10 ml MEM vitamins (100×, Gibco), 10 ml N3 concentrate (100×, see above), for a total volume of 40 ml. The mixture was filter sterilized using a 0.22 μm filter, and 1-2 ml aliquots were stored at −20° C.).
  • The DRGs were sectioned into halves, and placed in the center of each well of an 8-chamber slide (BD Biocoat PDL/Laminin coated glass, Becton Dickinson). The DRGs were permitted to attach to the slide at room temperature for 5-10 minutes, followed by an overnight incubation at 37° C. Inhibitors of choice were added at a concentration of 100 μM (top row) or 10 μM (bottom row) 1 hour before adding anti-NGF antibodies. The anti-NGF antibodies were added to the right half of the slide (4 wells) at a concentration of 25 μg/ml. After incubation for 20 hours at 37° C., the slides were fixed with 30% sucrose/8% paraformaldehyde (PFA) by adding 250 μl of the fix solution directly to the 250 μl of culture medium. (To make the 30% sucrose/8% PFA solution, the following ingredients were added to a 600 ml beaker including a stir bar: 250 ml 16% PFA (cat#15710-S, Electron Microscopy Sciences), 50 ml 10×PBS pH 7.4, and 150 g sucrose. The solution was mixed under low heat until dissolved, and then 6-8 drops of 1 M NaOH were added to bring the pH to 7.4. The volume was then brought to 500 ml with water in a graduated cylinder. The solution was mixed well, placed in aliquots, and frozen.) The slides were fixed for 30 minutes, followed by washing once with PBS. All cells were labeled with an actin stain (Alexa-568 conjugated phalloidin; 1:40; Invitrogen), a membrane dye (DiO; 1:200; Invitrogen), and a DNA stain (Hoechst 33258; 1:10,000; Invitrogen) in 0.1% Triton and 1% goat serum for 2 hours at room temperature. The stain solution was removed and the slides were washed 1× with PBS, and coverslipped with 130 μl of mounting medium (Fluoromount G; Electron Microscopy Sciences) and 24×60 mm no. 1 coverslips (VWR).
  • Results
  • In these experiments, control neurons (as visualized by actin staining) underwent significant degeneration upon NGF withdrawal. In contrast, in the presence of certain small molecules, axon integrity was maintained upon NGF withdrawal. FIGS. 6-10 show the results of these studies for a proteasome inhibitor and a GSK inhibitor (FIG. 6), a p38 MAPK inhibitor and an adenylyl cyclase activator (FIG. 7), a transcription inhibitor and an EGFR kinase inhibitor (FIG. 8), a JNK inhibitor and a Bax channel blocker (FIG. 9), and an Ih channel blocker and a CaMKK inhibitor (FIG. 10). Examples of specific compounds found to protect against neurodegeneration, and corresponding targets, are shown in Table 5, which is similar to Table 2, above, except that it further includes a column with comments concerning observations made with respect to some of the compounds.
  • TABLE 5
    Target Compounds Comments
    Proteasome MG132
    GSK3β SB 415286
    GSK3β inhibitor I
    GSK3β inhibitor VII
    GSK3β inhibitor VIII
    GSK3β inhibitor XII
    Lithium Chloride
    P38 MAPK SB 202190
    SB 239063
    SB 239069 Filopodia enriched
    growth cones present
    SB 203580
    SB 203580 HCI Partial
    EGFRK AG 556
    AG 555
    AG 494
    PD168393
    Tyrphostin B44 Partial
    Tyrphostin B42/AG
    490
    PI3K LY294002
    (Calbiochem. Cat. No.
    440202)
    Cdk5 Roscovitine
    Adenylyl cyclase Forskolin
    NKH 477 Partial
    Transcription Actinomycin D
    JNK SP600125
    Bax Channel Bax Channel Blocker Cell bodies detach
    Ih Channel ZD7288
    CAMK STO-609 Partial
    Protein Anisomycin
    Synthesis
    Cycloheximide
    • Example 3
  • Characterization of Inhibitors with Respect to Timing of Addition after Growth Factor Withdrawal
  • Studies were conducted to assess the activities of the inhibitors when added at various time points after NGF withdrawal. In particular, experiments were carried out to determine the latest time-point after the start NGF-deprivation at which candidate kinases can be inhibited to stop axon degeneration.
  • Methods and Materials
  • Primary cells used in this study were Charles River CD-1 E13 Dorsal Root Ganglia (DRG). The cells were maintained in N3/F12 (+25 ng/ml NGF) medium (Ham's F12 (23 ml), N3 supplement (1 ml), glucose (1 ml of 1 M glucose stock), 25 ng/ml Nerve Growth Factor 2.5 S, mouse (Roche 11362348001) in Ham's F12 (stock: 50 μg/ml −80° C.), filter-sterilized prior to use). The experiments also employed BD Biocoat PDL/Laminin coated glass 8 well chamber slides (BD 354688), and 24×60 mm No. 1 coverslips (VWR 48393 106).
  • Embryos were dissected in L15 medium (the dissection tools were soaked in 70% isopropanol, and dishes were set up on ice: 10 cm dishes (4 embryos per dish) and one 6 cm dish for spinal cords). E13.5 spinal cords were extracted into DMEM+10% FBS.>128 DRGs were detached from the spinal cord and sectioned into halves with a tungsten needle. 8 well slides were filled with 250 μl N3/F12 (25 ng/ml NGF). Sectioned DRGs (˜4 per well) were placed in a 5 μl volume. Attachment was allowed for ˜10 minutes at room temperature, and then the DRGs were incubated at 37° C. overnight. The following conditions were used to test the inhibitors. 25 μg/ml anti-NGF antibody was added at 22 hours. Inhibitors were added at T=0, 1, 3, 6, 9, and 12 hours after anti-NGF addition (1.25 μl inhibitors added; 5 μl aliquot from mass mix into −20° C.; 18 μl in 12 μl DMSO; 6 μl in 24 μl DMSO; 18 μl in 12 μl DMSO; 9 μl in 21 μl DMSO; 6 μl in 24 μl DMSO). Mixing was done by addition of the inhibitors and light shaking. The controls were +/− Anti-NGF (+1.25 μl DMSO), and the experiments were done in duplicate.
  • After 25 hours, 250 μl 30% sucrose/8% PFA was added to the 250 μl of culture medium for 30 minutes. Slides were washed with 1×PBS (stop: 4° C.). Immunofluorescence was carried out as follows. First, blocking was carried out in 5% BSA/0.2% Triton for 30 minutes at room temperature. Primary antibodies (Tuj1 (1:1,000)) were incubated with the slides overnight in 2% BSA at 4° C. Slides were washed with 1×PBS and add a secondary antibody (Goat anti-mouse 488; 1:200) was added. Slides were incubated with the secondary antibody for 1 hour at room temperature in the dark. Slides were washed in 1:10,000 Hoescht in PBS for 10 minutes, washed in PBS in a glass copland for 5 minutes, smacked on a towel to mildly dry, coverslipped with 200 μl of fluoromount G, and stored at 4° C. Pictures were taken all at the same settings (i.e., exposure times). The rate of degeneration was assessed based on detachment of axons from cell bodies as well.
  • Results
  • These studies show that the inhibitors are protective even when added several hours (3, 6, 9, and 12 hours) after NGF withdrawal (FIG. 11). Axon score is a score of axon health on a scale from 1 to 10 (0=looks like anti-NGF control; 10=looks like NGF control; 5=looks like kinase inhibitor when added at 0 hours. The inhibitors used in these studies are listed in Table 6.
  • TABLE 6
    Anti-NGF Inhibitors (stock: 10 mM in DMSO)
    Concen- Cell Body Axon
    Target/Action Inhibitor tration Compartment Compartment
    1) GSK3 inhibitor SB415286 30 μM Yes (5) No (5)
    2) EGFR kinase AG555 10 μM No (4) Yes (4)
    inhibitor
    3) p38 MAPK SB239063 30 μM No (3) Yes (3)
    inhibitor
    4) CAMKK STO-609 15 μM No (1) Yes (1)
    inhibitor
    5) JNK inhibitor SP600125 10 μM Yes (1) Yes (1)
    • Example 4
  • Characterization of Compounds with Respect to Localized Degeneration Campenot chambers were used to further analyze compounds identified as inhibiting axon degeneration in Example 2. Campenot chambers allow the separation of somal and axonal environments, and permit the induction of localized degeneration (see FIG. 12 and, e.g., Zweifel et al., Nat. Rev. Neurosci. 6(8):615-625, 2005). In such chambers, axon degeneration is localized and proceeds without apoptosis (FIGS. 13 and 14).
  • Materials and Methods
  • Teflon dividers (Tyler Research) were cleaned by washing in water and wiping them clean of any residual grease. Dividers were then soaked in Nochromix (Godax Laboratories)/sulfuric acid overnight, rinsed five times in distilled and autoclaved water (SQ water), boiled for 30 minutes, and then air-dried before use.
  • Mouse laminin (5 μg/ml in sterile filtered water; Invitrogen) was added to PDL coated 35 mm dishes (BD Biosciences) and they were incubated for 1 hour at 37° C., followed by two rinses in SQ water. The dishes were vacuum-dried and then air-dried in a laminar flow hood for 15 minutes. Prepared dishes were then scored with a pin rake (Tyler Research). Fifty microliters of NBM+MC solution containing NGF was applied across the resulting score tracks (The solution was made as follows: 1750 mg of methycellulose was combined with 480 ml of Neurobasal (Invitrogen), to which was added 4.5 ml penicillin/streptomycin, 7.5 ml L-glutamine, 10 ml B-27 serum-free supplement (Invitrogen); the solution was mixed for one hour at room temperature, overnight at 4° C., and one further hour at room temperature; the solution was then filter sterilized, and 50 ng/ml NGF (Roche) was added prior to use). High vacuum grease (VWR) was added to each Teflon divider under a dissection scope. The laminin coated PDL dishes were inverted and dropped onto the Teflon divider, with additional pressure added by use of a toothpick in the non-track-containing regions. Dishes were incubated for 1 hour at 37° C. Five hundred microliters of NBM+MC (50 ng/ml NGF) solution was added to each of the side compartments, and a grease barrier was added in front of the center cell slot.
  • Free E13.5 spinal cords were dissected from mouse embryos and placed into NBM+MC (25 ng/ml NGF) solution. DRGs were detached from the spinal cord with a tungsten needle. An NBM+MC-lubricated P200 pipette was used to move DRGs into a 1.5 ml tube. DRGs were pelleted with a tabletop centrifuge for 30 seconds. The supernate was discarded and 0.05% Trypsin/EDTA (cold) was added. The pellet was resolubilized with a pipette and incubated at 37° C. for 15 minutes with constant agitation (650 RPM). The sample was again centrifuged and the supernate discarded. The pellet was resuspended in warm NBM+MC (50 ng/ml NGF) solution and triturated with a flamed glass pipette 20 times, followed by trituration with a fire-bored glass pipette another 20 times. The samples were again centrifuged and the resulting pellets were resuspended in 0.5 ml NBM+MC (50 ng/ml NGF) solution. The cells were diluted to a final concentration of 2.5×106 cells/ml. The cell suspensions were loaded into a 1 ml syringe with a 22 gauge needle. The center slot of the Campenot divider was filled using the syringe (to a volume of at least 50 μl). The Campenot chamber was incubated overnight at 37° C. 2.5 ml NGF+MC (50 ng/ml NGF) solution was added to the center compartment and the grease gate was removed. The outer medium (cell body compartment) was replaced after three days with 2.5 ml NBM+MC medium (with 25 ng/ml NGF). After five days in culture, one distal compartment was washed three times with warmed NBM+MC (no NGF) solution. After the third wash, 500 μl NBM+MC (no NGF) solution was added to the axon compartment in combination with either 0.5% DMSO or an inhibitor. The cell body compartment was replaced with 2.5 ml NBM+MC medium (with 25 ng/ml NGF) containing either 0.5% DMSO or inhibitor.
  • After 28 hours of anti-NGF antibody treatment, 8% PFA/30% sucrose solution (see above) was added directly to the culture medium at a 1:1 dilution and incubated for 30 minutes. The Teflon divider was removed after the first 15 minutes of addition. The system was washed once with 2.5 ml PBS prior to immunostaining. Neurons were blocked in 5% BSA/0.2% triton in PBS for 30 minutes. The primary antibody Tuj1 (Covance) was added to a final dilution of 1:1000 in PBS containing 2% BSA and incubated overnight at 4° C. The dish was washed once with PBS. The secondary antibody (Alexa 488 goat anti-mouse antibody (Invitrogen)) was added at a final dilution of 1:200 in 2% BSA in PBS and incubated for one hour at room temperature. The dish was washed twice with PBS, and a 22×22 mm coverslip (VWR) was added with 350 μl of fluoromount G (Electron Microscopy Sciences). The neurons were visualized by use of a fluorescence microscope.
  • Results
  • As described above, E13.5 DRGs were isolated and grown for 5 days in a Campenot chamber. Fifty μg/ml anti-NGF was added to the experimental axon compartment, with an inhibitor added either to the axon compartment (together with the NGF antibody), or the cell body compartment, and the axons were allowed to degenerate for 28 hours. Another axon compartment was maintained in NGF as a control. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, when cell bodies were exposed to SB415 (GSKi) or Act D (transcription inhibitor), or when axons were exposed to AG555 (EGFRi) or SB239 (p38i), axons deprived of NGF did not degenerate. In contrast, SB415 (GSKi) or Act D (transcription inhibitor) in the NGF-deprived axon compartment, or AG555 (EGFRi) or SB239 (p38i) treatment in the cell body compartment, failed to prevent degeneration, suggesting that signaling in local axon degeneration is not limited to the axon segment being lost; some inhibitors are most effective when applied to the cell body, and others to the axon. Quantification of these results is shown in FIG. 17. Table 7 provides a summary of axon degeneration data from Campenot chambers.
  • TABLE 7
    Inhibitors in Axon vs. Cell Body Compartment
    Concen- Cell Body Axon Cellular
    Target/Action Inhibitor tration Compartment Compartment IC50
    Transcription inhibitor Actinomycin D 15 μM Yes (4) No (4)
    Protein synthesis Cycloheximide  5 μM Yes (2) No (2)
    inhibitor
    Proteasome inhibitor MG132 0.5 μM  Yes (1) No (1)
    GSK3 inhibitor SB415286 30 μM Yes (5) No (5) 10 μMa
    GSK3 inhibitor 30 μM Yes (2) No (2)
    XI
    AR-A014418 20 μM Yes (1) No (1)
    Ih channel blocker ZD7288  5 μM Yes (3) No (3)
    ErbB kinase inhibitor AG555 10 μM No (4) Yes (4) 5 nMb
    PD168393  5 μM No (1) Yes (1) 100 nMc
    p38 MAPK inhibitor SB239063 30 μM No (3) Yes (3) 0.35 μMd
     5 μM No (1) Yes (1)
    CAMKK inhibitor STO-609 15 μM No (1) Yes (1) 3 μMe
    Adenylyl cyclase Forskolin  3 μM Yes (2) Yes (2)
    activator
    JNK inhibitor SP600125  5 μM Yes (1) Yes (1)
    (Note:
    IC50 information in Table 7 is from published sources and some values were generated with non-neuronal cell types)
    aCross et al., J. Neurochem. 77(1): 94-102, 2001; total GSK-3 activity by in vitro peptide assay in cerebellar granule neurons.
    bFry et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 95(20): 12022-12027, 1998; heregulin induced tyrosine phosphorylation in MDA-MB-453 cells.
    cBose et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 103(26): 9773-9778, 2006; protein tyrosine phosphorylation in 3T3-Her2 cells.
    dBarone et al., J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 296(2): 312-321, 2001; LPS-induced TNF-alpha production in human monocytes.
    eTokumitsu et al., J. Biol. Chem. 277(18): 15813-15818, 2002; CaMKK activity after ionomycin stimulation in transfected HeLa cells.
  • A model based on data from the screens described above is shown in FIG. 18. Preliminary studies showed that cell bodies appeared smaller when NGF was removed from the axon compartment (FIG. 19), and that many of the neurons locally deprived of NGF were cleaved caspase-3-positive and showed nuclear condensation (FIG. 20). Further studies show that GSK3 (FIG. 21) and JNK (FIG. 22) activities peak 6 hours after NGF withdrawal.
    • Example 5
  • Characterization of Compounds with Respect to Particular Phenotypes of Neuron Degeneration
  • With compounds identified above as being cell body inhibitors (SB415 (GSKi) and Act D (transcription inhibitor)) applied to the cell body, and compounds identified as axon inhibitors (AG555 (EGFRi) and SB239 (p38i)) applied to axons, locally deprived axons were observed with respect to formation of varicosities using the Campenot chamber assay described above. A large number of axons with varicosities, as well as fragmented axons, were observed with the cell body inhibitors (FIG. 23). The axon inhibitors showed fewer varicosities, and the axons appeared to proceed straight to fragmentation upon treatment with those inhibitors (FIG. 23). These observations indicate that EGFR and p38 may be upstream of the formation of varicosities. Mitochondrial dysfunction and blockade of axon transport were studied with GSK, EGFR, and p38 inhibitors. As shown in FIG. 24, functional mitochondria were observed, but none were elongated.
  • Inhibiting GSK in an axon degeneration paradigm where signaling through the cell body does not occur was also studied. Fifty μM SB415 slightly delayed degeneration after lesion, so inhibiting GSK3 has a direct effect on the axon, most likely through stabilization of the axonal microtubule network. This effect likely contributes to the delay in axon degeneration observed after global NGF withdrawal, but the role of GSK3b in the cell body appears to be more significant (FIG. 25). Additionally, protection of axons after global NGF withdrawal appears to be independent of the role of GSK in neuronal death since the GSK inhibitor blocked axon degeneration but did not block cell death (FIG. 26).
    • Example 6
  • Protection Against Peripheral Neuropathy in Patients
  • Tarceva® (erlotinib) is an EGFR kinase inhibitor. Treatment of patients with paclitaxel and other chemotherapeutic agents is known to lead to peripheral neuropathy (reviewed in Wilkes, Semin. Oncol. Nurs. 23(3):162-173, 2007). Patients treated with a combination of Tarceva® and paclitaxel showed significantly less peripheral neuropathy (p=0.012; Fisher's exact), as compared to a placebo+paclitaxel group (16.3% vs. 26.4% of patients; first 400 patients enrolled; analysis of common adverse events).
    • Example 7
  • Analysis of EGFR Kinase Levels in an Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis (ALS) Model
  • Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (“ALS”) is a severely debilitating and fatal neurodegenerative disease, the pathology of which is characterized by loss of motor neurons. Similar pathology occurs in mouse models of ALS containing mutations in the Superoxide Dismutase (“SOD”) gene (SOD(G93A)). Phosphorylation of the EGF receptor is associated with axonal degeneration. EGFR levels are altered in SOD(G93A) mice, and an experiment was performed to determine whether phosphorylated EGFR levels are also altered in SOD(G93A) mice.
  • Spinal cords from terminal SOD(G93A) and non-transgenic littermates were cryosectioned (20 μm thick) onto slides and stored at −80° C. Slides were thawed to room temperature and hydrated in PBS twice for 5 minutes per rinse. Slides were blocked in hydrogen peroxide (0.3% in PBS) for 5 minutes, and then were rinsed twice in PBS for 5 minutes per rinse. Slides were washed twice in PBS-T (PBS containing 0.1% Triton X100) for 10 minutes per wash. Slides were blocked in PBS containing 5% BSA and 0.3% Triton X100 for about 1 hour at room temperature. A rabbit monoclonal anti-phosphorylated EGFR primary antibody (Novus Biologicals) was diluted 1:500 in 1% BSA and 0.3% Triton X100 in PBS and incubated with the slides overnight at 4° C. The slides were washed four times in PBS-T for 10 minutes per wash. A biotinylated goat anti-rabbit secondary antibody (Vector Labs) was diluted 1:300 in 1% BSA and 0.3% Triton X100 in PBS and incubated with the slides for 30 minutes-1 hour. The slides were washed four times in PBS-T for 5 minutes per wash. Washed slides were incubated in Avidin-biotin complex solution (Vector Laboratories) for 30 minutes at room temperature. The slides were washed four times in PBS-T for 5 minutes per wash. The slides were then incubated with a peroxidase substrate (Diaminobenzidine (DAB); Sigma) until the desired intensity developed. The slides were rinsed in water, coverslipped, and viewed.
  • As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, which show sections of spinal cord stained with EGFR antibodies, phosphorylated EGFR levels were increased in the SOD mice, as compared to the control mice. This observation shows that EGFR kinase inhibition may be beneficial in the treatment of ALS in vivo.
  • Immunohistochemical studies of SOD1 samples were also carried out. Slides were warmed to room temperature, outlined with an ImmEdge pen, hydrated by 2×10 minute washes in PBS at room temperature, and washed for 2×10 minutes in PBSTx at room temperature. Antibody blocking was carried out for 1-2 hours at room temperature (5% BSA, 0.3% Tx in PBS; (25 mg BSA in 500 ml PBS+1.5 ml 10% Tx)). Samples were incubated with primary antibodies overnight at 4° C. in 1% BSA, 0.3% Tx in PBS (NF (mouse, Millipore) 1:200; SMI32 (mouse, Covance) 1:300)). Samples were washed after primary antibody incubation 4×10 minutes in PBSTx (0.1%) at room temperature. Secondary antibodies were applied (Molecular Probes, Alexa conjugated; Donkey anti-Mouse Alexa-488; diluted 1:500 in 1% BSA, 0.3% Tx in PBS) and samples were incubated for 2 hours at room temperature. Samples were washed after secondary antibody incubation 2×10 minutes in PBSTx, and 2×10 minutes PBS. Optionally, nuclear counterstaining was carried out during the second wash by application of DAPI at 1:10,000 in PBS. Mounting was carried out with Vectashield mounting medium (Vector Labs).
  • FIG. 29 shows pEGFR remaining in axons in the SOD ALS model. As shown in the figure, axon number decreases in SOD1-tg spinal cord, and pEGFR partially co-localizes with axons in SOD1-tg animals. Thus, axons are lost in SOD1 transgenic mice as compared to non-transgenic controls, and many of the remaining exons are immunoreactive for pEGFR.
    • Example 8
  • Protection of Cerebellar Granule Neurons from Serum Deprivation/KCl Reduction-Induced Degeneration
  • Kinase inhibitors (inhibitors of GSK3, JNK, EGFR, p38, and CaMKK) were tested for their capacity to protect cultured cerebellar granule neurons (CGNs) following serum deprivation/KCl reduction. Briefly, CGNs isolated from P7 mouse brain were cultured on PDL- and laminin-coated 96-well tissue culture dishes in medium containing serum and potassium (Basal Medium Eagles including 29 mM KCl and 10% FBS) at 37° C. After 24 hours in culture, cells were switched to “deprivation” medium (Basal Medium Eagles including 5 mM KCl), alone or in combination with various small molecule inhibitors as shown in Table 8. After a further 24 hours in culture, the neurons were fixed with 4% paraformaldehyde and stained with a neuronal marker (anti-class III β-Tubulin, Covance). Image acquisition was performed using the ImageXpress automated imaging system (Molecular Devices). The plate set-up used is summarized in Table 8.
  • TABLE 8
    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
    A Positive Control 5 mM KCl + 1 μM Positive Control 5 mM KCl + 1 μM
    (29 KCl + serum) EGFR kinase (29 mM KCl + serum) EGFR kinase
    inhibitor inhibitor
    B Negative Control 5 mM KCl + 10 μM Negative Control 5 mM KCl + 10 μM
    (5 mM KCl) EGFR kinase (5 mM KCl) EGFR kinase
    inhibitor inhibitor
    C 5 mM KCl + 5 μM 5 mM KCl + 30 μM 5 mM KCl + 5 μM 5 mM KCl + 30 μM
    JNK inhibitor EGFR kinase JNK inhibitor EGFR inhibitor
    inhibitor
    D 5 mM KCl + 10 μM 5 mM KCl + 5 μM 5 mM KCl + 10 μM 5 mM KCl + 5 μM
    JNK inhibitor p38 inhibitor JNK inhibitor p38 inhibitor
    E 5 mM KCl + 20 μM 5 mM KCl + 10 μM 5 mM KCl + 20 μM 5 mM KCl + 10 μM
    JNK inhibitor p38 inhibitor JNK inhibitor p38 inhibitor
    F 5 mM KCl + 5 μM 5 mM KCl + 30 μM 5 mM KCl + 5 μM 5 mM KCl + 30 μM
    CAMKK inhibitor p38 inhibitor CAMKK inhibitor p38 inhibitor
    G 5 mM KCl + 15 μM 5 mM KCl + 10 μM 5 mM KCl + 15 μM 5 mM KCl + 10 μM
    CAMKK inhibitor GSK3 inhibitor CAMKK inhibitor GSK3 inhibitor
    H 5 mM KCl + 30 μM 5 mM KCl + 30 μM 5 mM KCl + 30 μM 5 mM KCl + 30 μM
    CAMKK inhibitor GSK3 inhibitor CAMKK inhibitor GSK3 inhibitor
    JNK inhibitor = SP600125
    CAMKK inhibitor = STO-609
    EGFR inhibitor = AG 555
    P38 inhibitor = SB 239063
    GSK3 inhibitor = SB 415286
    Columns 1-6: cell density = 5 × 104/well
    Columns 7-12: cell density = 2.5 × 104/well
  • As shown in FIG. 30, the kinase inhibitors were found to be effective at protecting the CGNs from degeneration, similar to the findings in Examples 2 and 3 for DRGs.
    • Example 9
  • Protection of Hippocampal Neurons from Rotenone-Induced Degeneration
  • Kinase inhibitors (inhibitors of GSK3, JNK, EGFR, p38, and CaMKK) were tested for their capacity to protect hippocampal neurons from rotenone-dependent degeneration. The assay was performed as follows. First, hippocampal neurons were dissected. Briefly, E18-E19 embryos were removed from anesthetized pregnant rats, placed in Petri dishes containing cold HBSS (see above), and washed in fresh, cold HBSS. Embryos were removed from their sacs and placed in fresh, cold HBSS, and the brains were isolated and placed in fresh, cold HBSS using standard techniques. The hippocampus and cortex were isolated from each embryo, and the brains were cut sagitally in half to separate the hemispheres. Remaining cerebellum/brain stem, olfactory bulbs, non-cortex ventral underlying tissue, and the meninges were removed. The hippocampi were removed from the remaining tissue and transferred to a 1.5 ml tube on ice. The cortical tissues were removed to a separate 1.5 ml tube on ice. As much HBSS as possible was removed, and 1% Trypsin (Hyclone)/0.1% DNase (Sigma) in HBSS was added to the remaining tissue in each tube. The tissues were each broken up using a fire-polished pipette. The tissues were incubated for ten minutes at 37° C., with tapping of the tubes every two minutes. As much solution as possible was removed from the tissues, and the tissues were each washed with 0.05% DNase (Sigma) solution. The samples were triturated in 0.05% DNase (Sigma) about 20× with each of the following (1) fire polished pipette at ⅔ bore, and (2) fire polished pipette at ⅓ bore. The samples were permitted to settle for five minutes, after which the supernatants were collected (the debris settled and the supernatant was removed with a pipette) and the cells were counted on a hemocytometer.
  • Nucleofection was performed on the isolated hippocampal neurons. Briefly, the desired number of cells (0.5-1×106 cells per nucleofection) were isolated by centrifugation. As much of the supernatant solution as possible was removed and the pelleted cells from each tube were re-suspended in 20 μl room temperature nucleofection solution (Amaxa). Each resuspension was added to pre-aliquoted β-actin—GFP “pCAGGS-AFP”DNA (400 ng per run) and tapped gently. The mixtures were transferred to nucleocuvette wells of a 96 well shuttle plate, and the plate was inserted into the nucleofector device. Neurons were nucleofected using a preset Amaxa program, CU110. Immediately following nucleofection, 100 μl pre-warmed CNBM (10 ml B27 (serum-free supplement; Invitrogen), 5 mls 100× Pen-Strep, 5 mls 100× Glutamax, 480 mls NBM (neurobasal medium; Invitrogen)) was added, and the cells were subsequently plated at a density of 70,000 cells/well in 8-well PDL-coated chamber slides. Neurons were grown for 5-14 days before rotenone addition, with changes of medium every 3-5 days.
  • Ten μM rotenone (resuspended in DMSO; VWR) was added to neurons in the presence or absence of vehicle or experimental compounds. 17-18 hours after rotenone addition, neurons were fixed in a solution of 4% paraformaldehyde/15% sucrose for 40 minutes at room temperature. Neurons were washed once with PBS and mouse anti-Tuja antibody (Covance) was added at a dilution of 1:1000 (in PBS, 0.1% Triton X-100, 2% goat serum) for an overnight incubation at 4° C. Neurons were washed 4× with PBS and goat anti-mouse antibody conjugated to Alexa-568 (Alexa) was added at a dilution of 1:200 (in PBS, 2% goat serum) for 30 minutes. Neurons were again washed 4× with PBS and mounted on slides in Vectashield mounting medium (Vector Labs). All neurons were visualized with Tuj1, and individual neurons were visualized with GFP.
  • As shown in FIG. 31, the kinase inhibitors were found to protect hippocampal neurons from rotenone-dependent degeneration. Similar studies were carried out with cortical neurons, and showed that cortical neurons are also protected from rotenone-dependent degeneration by kinase inhibitors (FIG. 32).
    • Example 10
  • Visualization of ErbB Receptor on Axons
  • To visualize ErbB receptor expression on axons, DRGs were cultured as described above for the screen. After 24 hours of growth, cells were fixed by adding 8% PFA/30% sucrose to culture medium at a 1:1 ratio for 30 minutes and washed 1× with PBS. Fixed cells were incubated in 5% BSA and 0.2% TritonX100 in PBS for 30 minutes, and then incubated overnight in 2% BSA in PBS at 4° C. with the following antibodies: (1) 50 μg/ml anti-EGFR (D1-5, Genentech), (2) 1:500 anti-ErbB2 (Abcam), (3) 24 μg/ml anti-ErbB3 (57.88, Genentech), and (4) 1:500 ErbB4 (Abcam). Cells were washed 1× with PBS, followed by incubation with a fluorescently conjugated secondary antibody (1:200, Invitrogen) at room temperature for 30 minutes, washed 1× with PBS containing Hoechst 33258 (1 μg/ml, Invitrogen), followed by a final PBS wash, and coverslipped with 250 μl of Fluoromount G (Electron Microscopy Sciences). As shown in FIG. 33, ErbBs are detected on axons by immunocytochemistry.
    • Example 11
  • Characterization of EGFR Expressed on Axons by Use of EGFR Ligands
  • Experiments were carried out to assess the effects of activation of EGFR by ligands, including EGF.
  • Materials and Methods
  • Dorsal Root Ganglia (DRG) immunoblots were prepared as follows. Primary cells used in the experiments were Charles River CD-1 E13 Dorsal Root Ganglia (DRG). The cells were maintained in N3/F12 (+25 ng/ml NGF) medium (Ham's F12 (23 ml), N3 supplement (1 ml), glucose (1 ml of 1 M glucose stock), 25 ng/ml Nerve Growth Factor 2.5 S, mouse (Roche 11362348001) in Ham's F12 (stock: 50 μg/ml −80° C.), which was filter-sterilized prior to use). The experiments also employed Triton lysis buffer (20 mM Tris pH 7.5, 150 mM NaCl, 0.1% Triton-X100, 100× Phosphatase inhibitor cocktail I (added fresh), 100× Phosphatase inhibitor cocktail II (added fresh), 1 tablet/10 ml Protease inhibitor tablet (added fresh)).
  • DRG explants were prepared on Day 0. Embryo dissections were carried out in L15 medium (dissection tools were soaked in 70% isopropanol, and dishes were set up on ice: 10 cm dishes (4 embryos per dish) and one 6 cm dish for spinal cords). E13.5 spinal cords were extracted into DMEM+10% FBS. 5×20 DRGs were detached from the spinal cord. 8 well slides were filled with 250 μl N3/F12 (25 ng/ml NGF)+7 μM cytosine arabinoside. Approximately 20 DRGs were placed in each well (five total), and attachment was allowed for about 10 minutes at room temperature. On day 2, media was changed to N3/F12+25 ng/ml NGF. On day 3, ErbB ligands were added (1000×; 100 μg/ml; dilute in SQ water 1:10) for 30 minutes to 1 hour (SQ water (control); EGF (ErbB1); Neuregulin-1 (ErbB3); Beta-cellulin (ErbB1/4); Epiregulin (ErbB1/4); Anti-NGF (25 μg/ml)) and slides were shaken slightly.
  • Immunobloting was carried out by aspiration of media with a pipette tip, washing twice with ice-cold sterile PBS, and removal of all PBS using an aspirator with a pipette tip or kimwipes. Cells were lysed with 40 μl Triton lysis buffer on ice. Lysate was collected, rotated for 30 minutes at 4° C., spun for 5 minutes at top speed, and supernatant was kept (stop: −80° C.). About 20 μl of sample was loaded. The sample was prepared by adding 1×SDS sample buffer and NuPAGE reducing agent (10×), and the lysate was boiled. Samples were fractionated by 10% SDS-PAGE (at 120 Volts)(run for two membranes) with standards (1 μl MWM; 1 μl and 2 μl spinal cord lysate). The gels were blotted using the iBlot program 3 (Nitrocellulose), and the blot was cut at 98 kDa. The top membrane was blocked in 5% BSA in TBST for 1 hour. Primary antibody was placed into 2 ml 5% BSA in TBST for 1 hour (Calbiochem anti-P-tyrosine HRP conjugate (PY20) 1:10,000). The blot was washed with TBST for 3×5 minutes and developed with ECL. The bottom membrane was blocked in 5% milk for one hour in PBS. Primary antibodies were placed in 2 ml 5% BSA in TBST 4° C. for two days in vacuum bag. The antibodies used were CS anti-P-Erk rabbit (42/44 kDa) 1:1000; C anti-TUJ1 rabbit (55 kDa) 1:5000 (on a separate membrane), and SC anti-Erk1 rabbit (42/44 kDa) 1:1000 (on a separate membrane). The blot was washed in TBST for 3×5 minutes. Secondary antibody was added into 10 ml 5% milk in TBST 1:5000 and incubated for 1 hour at room temperature (Red (680) anti-rabbit). The blots were washed with TBST for 3×5 minutes, and scanned in PBS with Odyssey. Quantification was carried out by choosing a background method and standard bands that minimize negative/counter-intuitive values: i.e., top/bottom, right/left, user-defined (user-defined). The lower the intensity of the concentration standard, the fewer negative values.
  • Results
  • The goal of these experiments was to see if activation of EGFR by EGF would be sufficient to drive degeneration. As shown in FIG. 34, EGFR is expressed on axons. FIG. 35 shows that EGF added to neurons maintained in NGF does not cause degeneration. To ensure that EGF is capable of activating EGFR/ErbBs in the neuronal cultures used in these assays, ERK activation was assessed (ERK is a downstream target of EGFR). As shown in the graph in FIG. 35, adding EGF increased ERK activity, as determined by Western blot. These data show that activating EGFR is not sufficient to drive degeneration.
    • Example 12
  • Characterization of EGFR Expressed on Axons by Use of EGFR Ectodomains
  • Experiments were carried out to assess the effects of EGFR ectodomains on activation of EGFR.
  • Materials and Methods
  • Materials used in these studies include BD Biocoat PDL/Laminin coated glass 8 well chamber slides (BD 354688); L15 medium (Invitrogen 11415114); albumin from bovine serum (BSA) (Sigma A7906-500g); fetal bovine serum (Sigma F2442-100 ml); N3 supplement (see above); Fluoromount G (Electron Microscopy Sciences 17984-25); 24×60 mm No. 1 coverslips (VWR 48393 106); monoclonal anti-neuronal class III beta-tubulin (Covance MMS-435P); Nerve Growth Factor 2.5 S, mouse (Roche 11362348001) in Ham's F12; and Triton X-100 (Sigma T8787-100 ml). Solutions used in these experiments include 25 ml N3/F12 medium (23 ml of Ham's F12; 1 ml of N3 supplement; 1 ml of 1M glucose; 25 ng/ml of NGF) and 30% Sucrose/8% PFA (see above).
  • Ectodomains (R&D Systems) were resuspended in sterile filtered 0.1% BSA in PBS to 1 mg/ml. Mouse E13.5 embryos were dissected out and place into L15 medium. Using forceps, the ventral region of the embryo was opened, organs removed, ribs cut away, and spinal cord dissected out with DRGs attached. The spinal cords with DRGs attached were placed into L15 medium +5% goat serum on ice. DRGs were removed with a tungsten needle and the remaining spinal cord was disposed of. 8 well slides were filled with N3-F12 plus 25 ng/ml NGF. DRGs were sectioned into halves. Sectioned DRGs were placed in the centers of each well of an 8-chamber slide and DRGs were allowed to attach at room temperature for 5-10 minutes. Ectodomain was added to a final concentration of 50 μg/ml in the top row. Slides were placed in a 37° C. incubator overnight. Ectodomain was added to the bottom row to a final concentration of 50 μg/ml. Anti-NGF antibody was added to the wells at a concentration of 25 μg/ml. EGFR inhibitor AG555 was added at a concentration of 10 μM as a positive control.
  • After 24 hours of anti-NGF antibody treatment, 8% PFA/30% sucrose was added directly to the culture medium at a 1:1 dilution for 30 minutes. The Teflon divider was removed after the first 15 minutes, and slides were washed once with PBS.
  • Slides were blocked in 5% BSA/0.2% Triton for 30 minutes, and incubated with primary antibodies (Tuj1 (1:1,000)) overnight in 2% BSA. Slides were washed with PBS once and secondary antibody (Goat anti-mouse 488; 1:200) was added. Slides were incubated for 1 hour at room temperature, washed 2× with PBS, coverslipped with 250 μl of fluoromount G, and stored at 4° C.
  • Results
  • In addition to EGF, there are many ligands that can activate EGFR. To test whether EGFR activation during degeneration is ligand dependent, EGFR ectodomain from R&D Systems was added at a concentration of 50 μg/ml, which should be sufficient to bind any free ligands that may activate EGFR. The EGFR ectodomain, added either 24 hours prior to, or at the same time as adding anti-NGF, does not block degeneration. This suggests EGFR activation during degeneration is likely ligand-independent.
    • Example 13
  • The dorsal spinal cord (DSC) explant is another model of neurodegeneration. DSCs grow out axons over a period of days, but if they are not rescued with the addition of a survival factor, they will eventually degenerate. As shown in FIG. 37, Tarceva® (Erlotinib) can delay this degeneration program.
    • Example 14
  • A. Inhibition of Dual Leucine Zipper-Bearing Kinase
  • Materials and Methods
  • DLK Transfection in 293 Cell Line
  • 293 cells were plated at 30% confluence into 3 wells of a 6-well plate. Cells were transfected with either control plasmid DNA, a DNA construct expressing wild type DLK, or two plasmids, with one expressing wild type DLK and the other expressing a DLK in which threonine 277 has been mutated to alanine (T278A), creating a form of the protein without activity (Fugene 6, Roche). Twenty-four hours after transfection, cells were washed with PBS, scraped off each plate, and transferred to an eppendorf tube. Cells were then spun down and excess media was removed. Pelleted cells were lysed in 20 mM Tris, 150 mM NaCl, 0.1% Triton X-100, and placed at 4° C. for 30 minutes. Samples were then spun to remove insoluble particles and tested for protein concentration in a bicinchoninic acid (BCA) assay (Promega).
  • Samples were run on a 10% polyacrylamide gel (Invitrogen) and transferred using an iBlot device (Invitrogen) according to the manufacturer's specifications. Blots were blocked for 1 hour in TBST (Tris-buffered saline+1% Tween 20) with 5% bovine serum albumin (BSA). After blocking, blots were incubated overnight in primary antibodies directed against JNK (Cell Signaling Technologies) or the phosphorylated form of JNK (Cell Signaling Technologies) in TBST+1% BSA. After incubation, blots were washed 3 times in TBST and then incubated with HRP-conjugated anti-rabbit secondary antibodies for 1 hour at room temperature. Blots were once again washed three times and then incubated with ECL (Promega) for 1 minute. Blots were then exposed on film and analyzed.
  • Degeneration in DRGs after DLK siRNA
  • Mouse E13.5 embryos were dissected and placed into L15 medium (Invitrogen). The spinal cord was dissected out from the embryos with DRGs attached. The spinal cords with DRGs attached were placed into L15 medium+5% goat serum (Gibco) on ice. The DRGs were removed using a tungsten needle and the remaining spinal cord was disposed. Eight-well slides were filled with N3-F12 solution (23 ml of Ham's F12, 1 ml of N3 supplement, and 1 ml of 1 M glucose) to which was added 25 ng/ml NGF (Roche). (N3 supplement was made by dilution of N3 100× concentrate, which was made by mixing the following ingredients, in the following order: 5.0 ml Hank's buffered saline solution (HBSS; Ca, Mg free; Invitrogen), 1.0 ml bovine serum albumin (10 mg/ml in HBSS=150 μm), 2.0 ml Transferrin (T1147-1G, human, 100 mg/ml in HBSS=1.1 mM), 1.0 ml sodium selenite (S9133-1MG, 0.01 mg/ml in HBSS=58 μM), 0.4 ml putrescine dihydrochloride (P5780-5G, 80 mg/ml in HBSS=500 mM), 0.2 ml progesterone (P8783-5G, 0.125 mg/ml in absolute ethanol=400 μM), 0.02 ml corticosterone (C2505-500MG, 2 mg/ml in absolute ethanol=5.8 mM), 0.1 ml triiodothyonine, sodium salt (T6397-100MG, 0.2 mg/ml in 0.01 N NaOH=300 μM), 0.4 ml insulin (16634-250MG, bovine pancreas, 241 U/mg, 25 mg/ml in 20 mM HCl=4.4 mM), for a total volume of 10.02 ml (can be stored at −20° C.)). An N3 supplement stock was made by combining the following: 10 ml Pen/Strep (100×, Gibco), 10 ml glutamine (200 mM, Gibco), 10 ml MEM vitamins (100×, Gibco), 10 ml N3 concentrate (100×, see above), for a total volume of 40 ml. The mixture was filter sterilized using a 0.22 μm filter, and 1-2 ml aliquots were stored at −20° C.
  • Neurons were trypsinized using 0.05% trypsin-EDTA (Gibco) at 37° C. for 30 minutes, spun down and counted. Two hundred thousand cells were electroporated using an Amaxa 96-well nucleofector with 400 ng control of DLK siRNA (program DC100), then split equally onto two wells of an 8-chamber slide (BD Biocoat PDL/Laminin coated glass, Becton Dickinson). Neurons were permitted to attach to the slide at room temperature for 5-10 minutes, followed by incubation for 3 days at 37° C. The anti-NGF antibodies were then added to the right half of the slide (4 wells) at a concentration of 25 μg/ml. After incubation for 20 hours at 37° C., the slides were fixed with 30% sucrose/8% paraformaldehyde (PFA) by adding 250 μl of the fix solution directly to the 250 μl of culture medium. (To make the 30% sucrose/8% PFA solution, the following ingredients were added to a 600 ml beaker including a stir bar: 250 ml 16% PFA (cat#15710-S, Electron Microscopy Sciences), 50 ml 10×PBS pH 7.4, and 150 g sucrose. The solution was mixed under low heat until dissolved. Then 6-8 drops of 1 M NaOH were added to bring the pH to 7.4. The volume was then brought to 500 ml with water in graduated cylinder. The solution was mixed well, placed in aliquots, and frozen).
  • The slides were fixed for 30 minutes, followed by washing three times with PBS. All cells were labeled with a neuron specific β-tubulin antibody (Tuj1 (1:1000) in 2% BSA, 0.1% Triton) at 4° C. overnight. The primary antibody was removed and the slides were washed three times with PBS. Slides were incubated with goat Alexa 488 anti-rabbit secondary antibody (1:500) for one hour followed by three washes in PBS, and then coverslipped with 130 μl of mounting medium (Fluoromount G; Electron Microscopy Sciences) and 24×60 mm No. 1 coverslips (VWR).
  • Quantitative PCR (qPCR) for DLK
  • E13.5 DRGs were dissected, electroporated with control siRNAs or siRNAs directed against DLK, and cultured as described above for a period of five days. RNA from neurons was then isolated using Purify Total RNA by Qiagen RNeasy Mini kit, according to the manufacturer's protocols. 10 ng of total RNA from cells treated with control and DLK siRNAs were run in triplicate in quantitative PCR experiments (Qiagen Quantifect SYBR Green RT-PCR) using DNA primers specific for DLK and GAPDH (control) (CATCATCTGGGTGTGGGAAG (forward primer) and AGTTGCAGCATGAGGGCATTC (reverse primer); SEQ ID NOs: 16 and 17). Amplification curves were analyzed and relative RNA concentrations of each sample were calculated relative to controls.
  • Results
  • The results of these experiments are shown in FIG. 38. Transient transfection of 293 cells with a plasmid encoding wild type DLK resulted in the phosphorylation and activation of JNK, showing that DLK is a kinase upstream of JNK in a signaling cascade. Co-transfection of a plasmid encoding a kinase-dead DLK reduced the levels of JNK phosphorylation. Knockdown of DLK expression via siRNA resulted in protection of neurons against degeneration as did inhibition of the downstream kinase JNK. In experiments using cultured neurons transfected with siRNAs directed against DLK (Dharmicon), neurons transfected with control siRNAs (as visualized by actin staining) underwent significant degeneration upon NGF withdrawal as visualized by TuJI staining (FIGS. 38 and 39). In contrast, in neurons transfected with siRNAs targeted against DLK, axon integrity was maintained upon NGF withdrawal. Knockdown of DLK expression in these experiments was confirmed using quantitative PCR with primers specific to DLK.
  • B. DLK Knockdown Protects Against Toxin-Induced Neuronal Cell Death
  • Experiments were performed to assess whether the above-observed protective effect of DLK inhibition is more generally protective against axon degeneration/neuronal apoptosis caused by other insults, such as toxin exposure. Isolated neurons were exposed to vincristine, a mitotic inhibitor, in the presence or absence of siRNA specific for DLK.
  • Cortical neurons were isolated using the following procedure. Rat E18 cortices devoid of meninges were dissected into ice-cold neurobasal media (Invitrogen). Cortices were dissociated in a final concentration of 0.1% trypsin/PBS (Worthington) for 30 minutes at 37° C. A final concentration of 0.1% DNase (Roche) was added to the tube and tissue was incubated at room temperature for 1 minute. Tissue was washed once with warm neurobasal media and the tissue was allowed to settle in the tube before 1 mL of neurobasal media containing 2% B27 supplement (Invitrogen) was added. Tissue was dissociated by trituration with a P1000 pipet (Rainin). The cells were counted and, for some experiments, transfected with siRNAs using a Biosystem 96-well nucleofector (Amaxa).
  • Cells were plated in 6- or 8-well chambers or 96-well poly-D-lysine coated dishes (BD Biosciences) at plated cell densitites of 2×106 cells/well, 1.25-2×105 cells/well, or 1×104 cells/well, respectively, for siRNA experiments (densities that allow for some cell death normally associated with the electroporation process). Neurons were mixed with 20 μL of nucleofection solution (Amaxa) and 600 ng of siRNA (Qiagen or Dharmacon). Gene silencing was assayed 3-4 days after plating by quantitative reverse transcriptase polymerase chain reaction (qRT-PCR). Briefly, RNA was isolated from transfected neurons using an RNeasy mini kit (Qiagen). Each reaction containing 10 ng of RNA was run in triplicate using the Quantifect SYBR Green RT-PCR kit (Qiagen) with DLK-, JNK1-, JNK2-, or JNK3-specific primers. Primers for the housekeeping gene, GAPDH, were used as controls. (All primers were purchased from Qiagen.) Amplification curves were analyzed for relative RNA concentrations in each sample using ΔCT.
  • Cortical neurons plated for 3-4 days were treated with 300 nM vincristine, a microtubule destabilizer, for 6-72 hours. NGF withdrawal-induced apoptosis and degeneration were assayed between 4-36 hours after the final treatment. Apoptosis and degeneration were assayed using both the MTT assay and the lactate dehydrogenase assay. The MTT (3-(4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyltetrazolium bromide) assay measures cell viability based on mitochondrial function. MTT was added to a total of one tenth of the culture volume to each well and incubated at 37° C. with 5% CO2 for 90-120 minutes. The MTT-containing culture media was aspirated and the cells were resuspended in an equal volume of solubilization solution (10% triton X-100, 1 drop HCl, 50 mL isopropanol). Absorbance (570 and 690 nm) was read using a spectrophotometer. Lactate dehydrogenase (LDH) levels were assayed using a CytoTox non-radioactive LDH assay kit (Promega) to assess the amount of cell death in assays. Fifty μL of media from different treatment conditions were used according to the manufacturer's instructions. For both the MTT and the LDH assays, cell survival/cell death was normalized to positive controls.
  • The results are shown in Table 9. As previously observed in the above-described DLK knockdown, NGF withdrawal experiments, knockdown of DLK expression was also protective against vincristine-induced cortical neuron death in two different assay systems. This finding indicates that DLK knockdown may be generally protective against stress-induced neuronal cell death in a number of different neuron types.
  • TABLE 9
    Effect of DLK Knockdown on Cortical Neuron Survival
    upon Vincristine Challenge as Measured by LDH Assay
    Condition
    % cell death (normalized)
    Control (no treatment) 0
    20 hour vincristine treatment 100
    DLK siRNA (no treatment) 0
    DLK siRNA (20 hour vincristine) 11
    % Viability (normalized)
    Control (no treatment) 100
    12 hour vincristine treatment 77
    DLK siRNA (12 hr vincristine) 95
  • C. Effect of DLK Modulation in Sympathetic Neurons
  • The foregoing analyses demonstrate that DLK inhibition is protective against toxin-induced or growth factor starvation-induced axon degeneration/apoptosis in cortical neurons and dorsal root ganglion neurons. Further experiments were performed to assess the ability of DLK inhibition to protect sympathetic neurons from the apoptosis normally induced by these challenges.
  • Sympathetic cervical ganglia were dissected from postnatal day 1 Sprague-Dawley rats (Charles River Labs) and collected in a dish containing Ultraculture media (Lonza) with 5% fetal bovine serum (Invitrogen). Ganglia were washed twice with serum-free Ultraculture media, and a final concentration of 0.1% trypsin (Worthington) was added and incubated with the tissue at 37° C. for 30 minutes. One percent DNase (Roche) solution in PBS was added to the ganglia and incubated at room temperature for 1-2 minutes. Ganglia were washed with Ultraculture and allowed to settle to the bottom of the tube. All wash media were removed and 1 mL plating media containing Ultraculture, 5% rat serum, 1% penicillin-streptomycin, 1% glutamax, 7 μM cytosine arabinoside (Sigma), and 50 ng/mL nerve growth factor (2.5S, Cedarlane Laboratory) was added to the tube. Ganglia were dissociated by trituration using a pipet (Rainin). The cell slurry was filtered over a 0.45 μm cell strainer (Falcon) and cell number was counted. Sympathetic neurons were plated at a density of 5000-7500 cells/well (96-well dish), 200,000 cells/well (6-well plate), or 100,000 cells/well (8-well chamber slide) and grown for 4-5 days in 5% CO2 at 37° C.
  • Every other day neurons were fed with fresh plating media containing 5-10 ng/mL NGF.
  • NGF withdrawal assays were performed as described in Example 14A. Vincristine treatments, MTT assays, and LDH assays were performed as described in Example 14B.
  • Lentivirus experiments were performed using two lentivirus vectors: GCMV-MCS-IRES-eGFP and GCMV-MCS-IRES-dsRed. Both vectors are HIV1 strains that lack the structural viral genes gag, pol, env, rev, tat, vpr, vif, vpu, and nef. In addition, there is a partial deletion of the promoter/enhancer sequences within the 3′ LTR that renders the 5′ LTR/promoter self-inactivating following integration. The genes provided in trans for both vectors are the structural viral proteins Gag, Pol, Rev, and Tat (via plasmid Delta8.9) and the envelope protein VSV-G. These plasmids are introduced into HEK293-T cells by co-transfection, and transiently express the different viral proteins required to generate viral particles. The potential for generating wild type or pathogenic lentivirus is extremely low, because it would require multiple recombination events amongst three plasmids. In addition, the virulence factors (vpr, vif, vpu, and nef) have been completely deleted from both vectors.
  • Neurons were infected either immediately at the time of plating or 3-5 days after plating by adding virus into cell culture media containing 5 μg/mL polybrene. The next day the virus-containing media is removed and replaced with fresh media. Cells are allowed to express the virus for 48 hours before experimentation.
  • Similar to the protective effect of DLK knockdown on cortical neurons and DRG, knockdown of DLK protected sympathetic neurons from NGF withdrawal-induced apoptosis (FIGS. 40A-40B and Table 10) and toxin-induced apoptosis (FIG. 41 and Table 11).
  • TABLE 10
    DLK Knockdown Protects Sympathetic Neurons
    from NGF Withdrawal Stress (MTT assay)
    Condition % viability (normalized)
    Control (with NGF) 100
    NGF removed 24 hours 46
    DLK siRNA control 133
    DLK siRNA NGF removed 93
  • TABLE 11
    DLK Knockdown Protects Sympathetic Neurons
    from Toxin-Induced Degeneration (MTT assay)
    Condition % viability (normalized)
    Control (no treatment) 100
    24 hour vincristine treatment 28
    24 hour camptothecin treatment 79
    DLK siRNA (24 hour vincristine) 47
    DLK siRNA (24 hour camptothecin) 106
  • Notably, introduction of an excess of kinase-dead DLK was similarly protective against NGF withdrawal-induced apoptosis in sympathetic neurons (FIG. 42 and Table 12).
  • TABLE 12
    Dominant Negative DLK was Protective Against NGF Withdrawal-
    Induced Degeneration in Sympathetic Neurons (MTT assay)
    Condition % viability (normalized)
    GFP virus control (with NGF) 77
    GFP virus -- NGF removed 36
    DLK virus control (with NGF) 62
    DLK virus - NGF removed 22
    DLK DN virus control (with NGF) 104
    DLK DN virus - NGF removed 60
  • This finding was consistent with the finding in Example 15 that kinase-dead DLK introduced into 293 cells inhibited JNK phosphorylation in those cells. One non-limiting possibility is that kinase-dead DLK may prevent normal DLK dimerization and self-phosphorylation. This finding suggests that inhibition of DLK's JNK-phosphorylating capabilities, either through reduction of DLK expression or through introduction of a DLK variant lacking kinase activity, protects many types of neurons against axon degeneration and apoptosis in response to toxin exposure or growth factor withdrawal.
    • Example 15
  • Having determined that RNA silencing of DLK and introduction of kinase-dead DLK were each protective against NGF withdrawal-triggered or toxin-induced degeneration of cultured neurons, further experiments were performed to identify the role of DLK in neuronal degeneration pathways. DLK is a MAP kinase kinase kinase in the multiple lineage kinase (MLK) family. In contrast to other members of the MLK family, the expression of DLK is restricted to the nervous system (Gallo et al., Nat. Rev. Mol. Cell Biol. 3(9):663-672, 2002; Bisson et al., Cell Cycle 7(7):909-916, 2008; Holzman et al., J. Bio. Chem. 269(49):30808-30817, 1994). DLK is a member of a signal transduction pathway activating JNK1-3 and cJun that results in apoptosis/inflammation under certain conditions. Increased JNK/cJun activity has been linked to a variety of neural disorders, including Parkinson's disease, glaucoma, Alzheimer's disease, ALS, stroke, and Huntington's disease through examination of patient samples or experiments in animal models of disease (Oo et al., J. Neurochem. 72(2):557-564, 1999; Ries et al., J. Neurochem. 107(6):1578-1588, 2008; Vlug et al., Eur. J. Neurosci. 22(8):1881-1894, 2005; Morfini et al., Nat. Neurosci. 12(7):864-781, 2009; Perrin et al., Exp. Neurol. 215(1):191-200, 2009; Levkovitch-Verbin et al., Eye Res. 80(5):663-670, 2005; Tezel et al., Brain Res. 996(2):202-212, 2004; Kuan et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 100(25):15184-15189, 2003; Yang et al., Nature 389(6653):865-870, 1997; Hunot et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 101(2):665-670, 2004; Thakur et al., J. Neurosci. Res. 85(8):1668-1673, 2007). Potential correlation of DLK to neural disorders and the involvement of one or more JNK/cJun activation pathways was investigated.
  • A. Antibodies Specific for Phosphorylated DLK
  • DLK is a MAP kinase and, like other MAP kinases, it is phosphorylated within the activation loop in its activated state. In order to be able to distinguish readily between activated and resting (non-activated) DLK, antibodies were generated that are specific for the phosphorylated form of DLK (“p-DLK”). To do this, specific residues in the active site were mutated to alanine, which cannot be phosphorylated. These constructs were then transfected into 293 cells using the same protocol as described in Example 14, part A (above), and tested for their abilities to phosphorylate the downstream kinase JNK (FIG. 43C). This analysis confirmed that threonine 278 (T278) and serine 281 (S281) were required for activity. Antibodies were generated against peptides in the activation loop of the DLK protein that contained these residues using standard in vivo immunization techniques in rabbits. The peptide sequences used for immunization were CKELSDKSpTKMpSFAG (SEQ ID NO: 13) for antibodies 317 and 318, and KMpSFAGTVAWMAKKC (SEQ ID NO: 14) for antibodies 319 and 320, and CGTSKELSDKSpTKM (SEQ ID NO: 15) for antibodies 321 and 322. The procedure was performed at Yenzym, using the “p-site” protocol, which includes purification on columns of phosphorylated and unphosphorylated peptide to generate selectivity. Polyclonal antibodies from six immunized rabbits were isolated and screened for binding to DLK and p-DLK.
  • Six of the obtained polyclonal antibodies were subjected to Western blot and immunohistochemistry analyses to determine their abilities to detect p-DLK, and to distinguish it from non-phosphorylated DLK or other phosphorylated kinases and phosphorylated MLK3. For cultured cells, the media was removed and the cells were washed once with ice-cold PBS. Cells were scraped in cold PBS and were transferred to an eppendorf tube on ice. Cells were quickly pelleted and excess buffer was removed. The pellets were either snap-frozen on dry ice and stored at −80° C., or were immediately lysed in fresh lysis buffer (20 mM Tris, 150 mM NaCl, 0.1% Triton X-100) containing phosphatase (Sigma P5726 and P2850) and protease inhibitors (Roche 11836153001). Cells were lysed on a rotator at 4° C. for 30 minutes and then pelleted at 4° C. Protein concentrations were determined using a BCA assay (Pierce).
  • Protein lysates were mixed with sample buffer (Invitrogen), boiled for 5 minutes, and then loaded onto a denaturing 4-12% gradient gel (Invitrogen). Samples were transferred onto nitrocellulose (Invitrogen) and blocked in 5% milk/TBST blocking solution (Tris-buffered saline+0.05% Triton X-100) for 1 hour. The blot was incubated with a phospho-DLK antibody at a dilution of 1:1000 in TBST with 5% BSA on a shaking platform overnight at 4° C. Blots were washed three times for 5 minutes with TBST, and incubated with a rabbit secondary horseradish peroxidase (HRP)-conjugated antibody (Jackson Labs, 1:5000) for 1-2 hours at room temperature. Membranes were washed three times in TBST and developed with Westdura chemiluminescent substrate (Pierce).
  • 293T cells were plated onto coverslips contained in a 12-well culture dish for immunostaining. The cells were then transfected with either mDLK or mMLK3 as previously described and then fixed with 4% PFA, 30% sucrose 24 hours after transfection. Cells were blocked and permeabilized with 5% BSA, 0.3% Triton X-100 for an hour, and then incubated with the primary antibody at 1:500 concentration in 1% BSA overnight. Next the cells were gently rinsed with PBS three times and conjugated with Alexa488 anti-rabbit secondary antibody for 1 hour. This step was followed by three PBS washes, with the final wash containing DAPI (1:5000) to stain nuclei. The coverslip was then carefully lifted out of the culture and mounted onto a slide with the surface with cells facing down on the slide, and the slides were visualized using fluorescence microscopy.
  • Antibodies 318, 319, 320, 321, and 322 each detected p-DLK and p-DLK/DN-DLK with no (antibodies 318 and 319) or very limited ( antibodies 320, 321, and 322) binding to phosphorylated MLK3 (FIG. 43A). In contrast, antibody 317 recognized all three proteins. Antibodies 318 and 319 showed the strongest binding to p-DLK, coupled with minimal p-MLK3 binding, and thus were used for further analysis.
  • The antibodies were also able to specifically bind to p-DLK in the context of a cell, as measured by immunohistochemistry. Both antibodies 318 and 319 stained DLK-transfected 293T cells, with significantly reduced binding observed in MLK3-transfected 293T cells (FIG. 43B). This binding is significantly reduced in 293 cells that have been transfected with DLK mutants having a mutation that results in a near complete lack of kinase activity (FIG. 43C). As DLK, like other mixed lineage kinases, is thought to dimerize and autophosphorylate when transfected in heterologous systems, these data further confirm that these antibodies indeed recognize the phosphorylated form of DLK.
  • B. Activation of DLK During Vincristine-Induced Degeneration of Cortical Neurons
  • The antibodies generated as described above were then tested to assess whether DLK phosphorylation and activity were increased in cortical neurons that had been stressed with vincristine. This would be expected, as knockdown of DLK activity promoted survival. When grown as described above and treated with vincristine for 1 hour, levels of phosphorylated-DLK were elevated as compared to control cultures when analyzed by Western blot (same protocol as described above) using antibodies 318, 319, and 320 (FIG. 43D). This provided further validation that levels of phosphorylated DLK correlate with activity and are increased under conditions of neuronal stress.
  • C. Expression and Activity of DLK in Neuronal Disease Models
  • Immunohistochemistry assays were performed as follows. SOD1 transgenic animals were perfused with 4% paraformaldehyde and the spinal cords were carefully removed from the vertebral column and post-fixed overnight at 4° C. The cords were then equilibrated in 30% sucrose/PBS before embedding in OCT for cryosectioning. Coronal sections (20 μm thick) were cut and mounted on cold slides and kept at −80° C. Sections were hydrated in PBS and blocked for endogenous peroxidase activity with H2O2 (0.3% in PBS) for 10 minutes, followed by rinsing twice with PBST (0.1% Triton X-100). The sections were blocked in 5% BSA, 0.3% Triton X-100 in PBS for 1 hour, and then incubated with primary antibody in p-DLK in 1% BSA, 0.3% Triton X-100 in PBS at 4° C. overnight. Slides were washed three times in PBST and then labeled with biotinylated secondary antibody (1:300) in PBS containing 1% BSA, 0.3% Triton X-100 for 1 hour. The slides were rinsed with PBST followed by a 30-minute incubation with avidin DH containing ABS reagent (Vector labs), and finally incubated in peroxidase substrate (0.05% di-amino bendizine in 10 mM Tris, 150 mM NaCl, pH 7.6 to which 30% H2O2 was added just before use) in the dark for 10-15 minutes. The reaction was stopped by rinsing with water, and the sections were mounted on glass slides and coverslipped. Alzheimer's patient tissue was purchased from US Biological. Tissue lysate from hippocampi of Alzheimer's patients and age-matched controls were used for this analysis. Analysis was conducted by Western blot using the same protocols as described above.
  • The results in FIG. 44A demonstrate that the levels of phosphorylated-DLK (p-DLK) were highly elevated in the SOD1 mouse of ALS relative to wild type mice late in the course of disease. Evidence of p-DLK was evident in tissue samples as early as 14 weeks (FIG. 44B), which is prior to the onset of ALS-like symptoms in these animals.
  • Similar results were observed in human Alzheimer's patient samples. The levels of p-DLK in cortex samples in Alzheimer's disease patients were increased relative to control samples (FIG. 44C). The levels of phosphorylated JNK and phosphorylated cJun63 levels were also increased in Alzheimer's disease patients relative to control samples (FIG. 44C). Thus, DLK is activated in a recognized mouse model of ALS, both prior to the onset of symptoms and at the end stage of disease, and also in cortical samples from human Alzheimer's patients.
  • D. Signaling Contributing to Observed DLK Inhibition Effect
  • 1. Molecular Effect of DLK Silencing
  • As evidenced above in Example 14, DLK silencing protects neurons from degradation in response to toxin exposure or growth factor withdrawal, and DLK kinase activity is involved directly or indirectly in JNK phosphorylation. Experiments were performed to assess JNK and cJun expression and activity under NGF withdrawal stress and toxin-dependent stress conditions. The experimental protocols used to decrease the expression of DLK (siRNA) and for immunoblotting were the same as those described above.
  • Silencing of DLK did not change baseline JNK protein levels or JNK activity in DRGs or cortical neurons (FIG. 45). DLK knockdown however decreased p-cJun levels after either NGF withdrawal or vincristine-dependent stress in cortical neurons, DRGS, and sympathetic ganglia neurons (FIG. 45). DLK knockdown also decreased p-JNK levels after either NGF withdrawal or vincristine-dependent stress in cortical neurons and DRG (FIG. 45). It should be noted that the p-JNK antibody recognizes the phosphorylated forms of each of JNK1, JNK2, and JNK3. JNK1 phosphorylation does not correlate with stress induction or phosphorylation of cJun. DLK knockdown silences stress-induced phosphorylation of JNK2 and JNK3. The background signal observed in the control samples in these data is likely due to baseline phosphorylated JNK1. The results show that DLK silencing or other inhibition does not cause degradation of JNK or cJun, but does result in a lesser degree of stress-induced phosphorylation (and thus lack of activation) of those molecules.
  • If DLK inhibition protects neurons from degeneration through limiting the phosphorylation of JNK2 and JNK3, then inhibitors of JNK2 or JNK3 should also protect neurons from cell death and axon degeneration. The ability of direct JNK inhibition to protect neurons against NGF withdrawal-dependent degeneration was also assessed. DRG explants were treated with anti-NGF and either pan-JNK inhibitor JNKV or JNKVIII, prior to assessment in the NGF withdrawal assay described above. Both inhibitors were able to protect DRG explants from NGF-dependent degeneration (FIG. 46): JNKV (Calbiochem) was most protective at a concentration of 5 μM, and JNKVIII (Calbiochem) at a concentration of 4 μM.
  • To identify which JNK(s) were involved in the observed protective effect, further knockdown experiments were performed using the same methodology as described above. Silencing RNAs specific for JNK1 alone were not able to replicate the effects observed with the pan-JNK inhibitors (FIG. 47). Inhibitory RNAs (siRNAs) for JNK2 or JNK3 alone were not able to protect DRG against axon degeneration upon NGF withdrawal (FIG. 47). The most effective protection was observed in the presence of silencing of both JNK2 and JNK3, though even this protection was not the same extent as siDLK alone (FIG. 47).
  • JNK1 is a constitutively active molecule, known to be responsible for axon maintenance and synapse maturation, whereas JNK2 and JNK3 are known to be stress-induced and involved in cJun activation and apoptosis/axon degeneration (Coffey et al., J. Neurosci. 22(11):4335-4345, 2002; Coffey et al., J. Neurosci. 20(20):7602-7613, 2000). The fact that DLK inhibition results in a larger neuroprotective effect than JNK1/2/3 inhibition strongly suggests that DLK is inhibitory to one or more mechanisms of neuron growth and/or survival in addition to its role in the JNK/cJUN pathway.
  • E. Trophic Effects of DLK
  • A previous study has suggested that a dominant negative kinase-dead mutant form of DLK (K152A) causes trophic effects in dopaminergic neurons of the substantia nigra pars compacta, whereas a dominant negative form of DLK containing only the leucine zipper domain does not cause such effects (Chen et al., J. Neurosci. 28(3):672-680, 2008). Notably, however, trophism in this study was defined by an increased number of DLK (K152A) infected neurons expressing a particular marker rather than any functional or morphological differences between infected and non-infected neurons. The impact of DLK silencing was accordingly investigated in cortical neurons and DRGs. The protocols used for these studies were the same as those described above.
  • DLK knockdown was shown to have pronounced trophic effects in both cortical neurons and sympathetic neurons (observed increase in number of cells) (FIGS. 48A and 48B). Specifically, DRG, cortical, and sympathetic neurons showed increased growth/survival in culture when treated with siRNA directed against DLK (observed increase in growth) (Table 13).
  • TABLE 13
    Increased Growth of Multiple Types of Neurons
    in Culture after DLK Knockdown (MTT assay)
    Condition % viability (normalized)
    Cortical neurons control 100
    Cortical neurons + DLK siRNA 137
    Sympathetic neurons control 100
    Sympathetic neurons + DLK siRNA 139
    DRG neurons 100
    DRG neurons + DLK siRNA 147
  • To further examine the role of DLK in neuronal growth, the levels of MAP2, were measured, a microtubule associated protein that is specifically localized to dendrites. MAP2 expression in cultured neurons is reflective of neuronal maturation and expression, and is often increased under pro-growth conditions. Inhibition of DLK activity using either a dominant-negative leucine zipper form of DLK or a dominant negative kinase-dead form of DLK in neurons resulted in induction of MAP2 protein production. The induction of MAP2 expression indicates that neuronal growth and maturation are taking place, and further confirms that DLK knockdown indeed has a functional trophic effect on neurons.
    • Example 16
  • The assays described herein identified several inhibitors of G-proteins and G-protein coupled receptors (GPCRs) that decrease degeneration in neurons. Experiments were performed in DRGs to verify the role of G-proteins and GPCRs in degeneration pathways. The experimental protocols used in these experiments are the same as those described in Example 14. Pertussis toxin and SCH 202676 were purchased from Tocris Bioscience.
  • The data demonstrate that SCH 202676, a sulphydryl-reactive compound that inhibits agonist and antagonist binding to G protein-coupled receptors, decreases NGF withdrawal-induced degeneration in DRGs (FIGS. 49 and 50). Pertussis toxin, another inhibitor of G-protein signaling, also decreases degeneration in neurons following NGF withdrawal (FIG. 51). These data indicate that G-proteins and G-protein coupled receptors play a role in neuron degeneration.
    • Example 17
  • Additional cellular targets, identified in the assays described herein, and which play a role in degeneration pathways, are members of the beta-catenin signaling pathway and its downstream targets (e.g., transcription factor 4, TCF4). Experiments were performed in hippocampal neurons to verify the role of beta-catenin and TCF4 in neuron degeneration. The experimental protocols used in these experiments are the same as those described in Example 14.
  • The data show that expression of a constitutively active GSK3, which can result in loss of beta-catenin, mediates a decrease in neuron viability (FIG. 52; top right panel). The expression of a dominant negative form of TCF4 also mediates a decrease in neuron viability (FIG. 52, bottom right panel). These data indicate that the beta-catenin signaling pathway is important for the maintenance of neuron viability. Inhibitors that target the beta-catenin signaling pathway can be used to promote neuron degeneration (e.g., inhibitors of beta-catenin expression and inhibitors of TCF4 activity.) Conversely, activators or beta-catenin and TCF4 signaling may prevent axon degeneration and neuronal cell death.
    • Other Embodiments
  • All publications and patents cited in this specification are herein incorporated by reference as if each individual publication or patent were specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference. Use of singular forms herein, such as “a” and “the,” does not exclude indication of the corresponding plural form, unless the context indicates to the contrary. Although the invention has been described in some detail by way of illustration and example for purposes of clarity of understanding, it will be readily apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art in light of the teachings of the invention that certain changes and modifications may be made thereto without departing from the spirit or scope of the appended claims.

Claims (7)

What is claimed is:
1. A method of identifying an agent for use in inhibiting degeneration of a neuron or portion thereof, the method comprising contacting a neuron or portion thereof with a candidate agent in an assay of axon or neuron degeneration, wherein detection of reduced degeneration of the neuron or portion thereof in the presence of the candidate agent, relative to a control, indicates the identification of an agent for use in inhibiting degeneration of a neuron or portion thereof.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the assay of axon or neuron degeneration is selected from the group consisting of anti-nerve growth factor (NGF) antibodies, serum deprivation/KCl reduction, and rotenone treatment.
3. The method of claim 1, wherein the candidate agent is selected from the group consisting of an antibody, polypeptide, peptide, peptibody, nucleic acid molecule, short interfering RNA (siRNA), polynucleotide, aptamer, small molecule, and polysaccharide.
4. A method for activating degeneration of a neuron or a portion thereof, the method comprising administering to a neuron or portion thereof an agent that modulates: (i) the activity or expression of a target protein in the neuron or portion thereof, or (ii) a process in the neuron or portion thereof.
5. The method of claim 4, wherein the target protein is selected from the group consisting of dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase (DLK), glycogen synthase kinase 3β (GSK3β), p38 mitogen-activated protein kinase (p38 MAPK), epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR), phosphoinositide 3-kinase (PI3K), cyclin-dependent kinase 5 (cdk5), adenylyl cyclase, c-Jun N-terminal kinase (JNK), BCL2-associated X protein (Bax), Ih channel, calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase (CaMKK), a G-protein, a G-protein coupled receptor, transcription factor 4 (TCF4), and β-catenin; or
the process is transcription or protein synthesis.
6. The method of claim 4, wherein the agent is an activator of the target protein or process.
7. The method of claim 4, wherein said modulation of a target protein is an increase in the activity or expression of GSK3β, a decrease in the activity or expression of β-catenin, and/or a decrease in the activity or expression of TCF4.
US15/908,024 2008-10-22 2018-02-28 Modulation of axon degeneration Abandoned US20180325992A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US15/908,024 US20180325992A1 (en) 2008-10-22 2018-02-28 Modulation of axon degeneration

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US19705108P 2008-10-22 2008-10-22
PCT/US2009/061733 WO2010048446A2 (en) 2008-10-22 2009-10-22 Modulation of axon degeneration
US201113125333A 2011-06-22 2011-06-22
US14/822,711 US9937224B2 (en) 2008-10-22 2015-08-10 Modulation of axon degeneration
US15/908,024 US20180325992A1 (en) 2008-10-22 2018-02-28 Modulation of axon degeneration

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/822,711 Division US9937224B2 (en) 2008-10-22 2015-08-10 Modulation of axon degeneration

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20180325992A1 true US20180325992A1 (en) 2018-11-15

Family

ID=42119989

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/125,333 Expired - Fee Related US9101645B2 (en) 2008-10-22 2009-10-22 Modulation of axon degeneration
US14/755,809 Abandoned US20160279190A1 (en) 2008-10-22 2015-06-30 Modulation of axon degeneration
US14/822,711 Expired - Fee Related US9937224B2 (en) 2008-10-22 2015-08-10 Modulation of axon degeneration
US15/908,024 Abandoned US20180325992A1 (en) 2008-10-22 2018-02-28 Modulation of axon degeneration

Family Applications Before (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/125,333 Expired - Fee Related US9101645B2 (en) 2008-10-22 2009-10-22 Modulation of axon degeneration
US14/755,809 Abandoned US20160279190A1 (en) 2008-10-22 2015-06-30 Modulation of axon degeneration
US14/822,711 Expired - Fee Related US9937224B2 (en) 2008-10-22 2015-08-10 Modulation of axon degeneration

Country Status (13)

Country Link
US (4) US9101645B2 (en)
EP (1) EP2340040B1 (en)
JP (2) JP5851838B2 (en)
KR (1) KR20110081862A (en)
CN (2) CN104689316A (en)
AU (1) AU2009308293B2 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0919564A2 (en)
CA (1) CA2741089A1 (en)
HK (2) HK1163519A1 (en)
IL (1) IL212411A0 (en)
MX (1) MX2011004306A (en)
SG (1) SG195557A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2010048446A2 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021092166A1 (en) * 2019-11-05 2021-05-14 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Methods of treating neurodegenerative diseases caused by g4c2 expansion in c90rf72
US12083114B2 (en) 2018-12-19 2024-09-10 Disarm Therapeutics, Inc. Inhibitors of SARM1 in combination with neuro-protective agents

Families Citing this family (58)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8361067B2 (en) 2002-09-30 2013-01-29 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Methods of therapeutically heating a vertebral body to treat back pain
US6907884B2 (en) 2002-09-30 2005-06-21 Depay Acromed, Inc. Method of straddling an intraosseous nerve
US7258690B2 (en) 2003-03-28 2007-08-21 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Windowed thermal ablation probe
AR069501A1 (en) 2007-11-30 2010-01-27 Genentech Inc ANTI-VEGF ANTIBODIES (VASCULAR ENDOTELIAL GROWTH FACTOR)
US10028753B2 (en) 2008-09-26 2018-07-24 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Spine treatment kits
JP5688022B2 (en) 2008-09-26 2015-03-25 リリーバント メドシステムズ、インコーポレイテッド System and method for guiding an instrument through the interior of a bone
EP2340040B1 (en) 2008-10-22 2019-01-16 F.Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Modulation of axon degeneration
US9962368B2 (en) 2009-01-09 2018-05-08 Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Pro-neurogenic compounds
US9162980B2 (en) 2009-01-09 2015-10-20 Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Anti-depression compounds
US8362277B2 (en) 2009-01-09 2013-01-29 Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Pro-neurogenic compounds
EP2385829B1 (en) 2009-01-09 2018-08-01 Board of Regents of the University of Texas System Pro-neurogenic compounds
CN102573855A (en) * 2009-10-22 2012-07-11 霍夫曼-拉罗奇有限公司 Modulation of axon degeneration
CN107337734A (en) * 2009-12-04 2017-11-10 弗·哈夫曼-拉罗切有限公司 Multi-specificity antibody, antibody analog, composition and method
AU2011274787B2 (en) 2010-07-07 2016-06-16 Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Pro-neurogenic compounds
US9783602B2 (en) 2010-12-01 2017-10-10 Alderbio Holdings Llc Anti-NGF compositions and use thereof
US11214610B2 (en) 2010-12-01 2022-01-04 H. Lundbeck A/S High-purity production of multi-subunit proteins such as antibodies in transformed microbes such as Pichia pastoris
US9078878B2 (en) 2010-12-01 2015-07-14 Alderbio Holdings Llc Anti-NGF antibodies that selectively inhibit the association of NGF with TrkA, without affecting the association of NGF with p75
US9539324B2 (en) 2010-12-01 2017-01-10 Alderbio Holdings, Llc Methods of preventing inflammation and treating pain using anti-NGF compositions
US9067988B2 (en) 2010-12-01 2015-06-30 Alderbio Holdings Llc Methods of preventing or treating pain using anti-NGF antibodies
US9884909B2 (en) 2010-12-01 2018-02-06 Alderbio Holdings Llc Anti-NGF compositions and use thereof
WO2012103282A2 (en) * 2011-01-26 2012-08-02 Zhong Yi Methods and compositions for treating alzheimer's disease
US9084793B2 (en) 2011-01-26 2015-07-21 Bejing Joekai Biotechnology LLC Methods for treating Alzheimer's disease by administering certain synthetic compounds
WO2013101772A1 (en) 2011-12-30 2013-07-04 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Systems and methods for treating back pain
CN102703508A (en) * 2012-05-18 2012-10-03 边红 Targeted GSK3beta (glycogen synthesis kinase 3beta) gene RNA interference recombinant slow virus carriers and constructing, screening methods thereof
US9701676B2 (en) 2012-08-24 2017-07-11 Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Pro-neurogenic compounds
US10588691B2 (en) 2012-09-12 2020-03-17 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Radiofrequency ablation of tissue within a vertebral body
US20140080787A1 (en) * 2012-09-18 2014-03-20 National Institutes of Health, US Dept of Health and Human Services Method for the Treatment of Neuropathies Associated with Charcot-Marie-Tooth 1A (CMT1A) Disease
CA2889478C (en) 2012-11-05 2020-11-24 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Systems and methods for creating curved paths through bone and modulating nerves within the bone
BR112015013849A2 (en) * 2012-12-21 2017-07-11 Sykehuset Soerlandet Hf egfr targeted therapy of neurological disorders and pain
JP6382232B2 (en) * 2013-02-21 2018-08-29 ユニバ−シティ オブ ロチェスタ− Methods for assessing paravascular pathways throughout the brain for waste clearance function and methods for treating neurodegenerative disorders based thereon
MX2015011128A (en) * 2013-02-28 2015-11-11 Genentech Inc Methods of modulating dlk stability.
WO2014152207A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-25 Mylan Laboratories, Inc. Hot melt granulation formulations of poorly water-soluble active agents
US9878021B2 (en) 2013-05-30 2018-01-30 Mor Research Applications Ltd. Compositions and methods for treatment of retinal degenerative diseases
US9724151B2 (en) 2013-08-08 2017-08-08 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Modulating nerves within bone using bone fasteners
WO2015070237A1 (en) 2013-11-11 2015-05-14 Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Neuroprotective chemicals and methods for identifying and using same
EP3068388A4 (en) 2013-11-11 2017-04-12 Board of Regents of the University of Texas System Neuroprotective compounds and use thereof
US10597660B2 (en) 2014-11-14 2020-03-24 Voyager Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods of treating amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS)
ES2878451T3 (en) 2014-11-14 2021-11-18 Voyager Therapeutics Inc Modulating polynucleotides
EP3226883B1 (en) * 2014-12-03 2023-11-22 Mor Research Applications Ltd. Compositions for treatment of retinal degenerative diseases
US11951121B2 (en) 2016-05-18 2024-04-09 Voyager Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating Huntington's disease
KR20240056729A (en) 2016-05-18 2024-04-30 보이저 테라퓨틱스, 인크. Modulatory polynucleotides
KR101796684B1 (en) * 2016-05-19 2017-11-10 건국대학교 산학협력단 Pharmaceutical composition for prevention or treatment of age-related mascular degeneration comprising inhibitor of Keratin 8 phosphorylation and screening method of therapeutic agents for the same
WO2018009896A1 (en) * 2016-07-08 2018-01-11 Metastat, Inc. Methods and compositions for anticancer therapies that target mena protein isoforms kinases
US10208098B2 (en) * 2016-09-15 2019-02-19 Council Of Scientific & Industrial Research Recombinant protein-based method for the delivery of silencer RNA to target the brain
CN106474549B (en) 2016-11-21 2019-05-03 南通大学 The novel tissue tissue-engineered nerve of MicroRNA gene mediated constructs and its in the application for repairing neurologic defect
BR112019020754A2 (en) * 2017-04-04 2020-04-28 Strekin Ag methods of prevention or treatment of eye diseases
CN111108198A (en) 2017-05-05 2020-05-05 沃雅戈治疗公司 Compositions and methods for treating huntington's disease
CA3061652A1 (en) 2017-05-05 2018-11-08 Voyager Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods of treating amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (als)
GB201714316D0 (en) * 2017-09-06 2017-10-18 Benevolentai Ltd Treatement of neurodegenerative diseases
TWI804518B (en) 2017-10-16 2023-06-11 美商航海家醫療公司 Treatment of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (als)
US20200237799A1 (en) 2017-10-16 2020-07-30 Voyager Therapeutics, Inc. Treatment of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (als)
KR20200118422A (en) 2017-12-31 2020-10-15 에버그린 바이오사이언시즈 Composition for cryopreservation and method of use thereof
WO2019204399A1 (en) * 2018-04-17 2019-10-24 The University Of Chicago Methods and compositions for treating cancer
EP3924470A4 (en) * 2019-02-15 2022-12-14 Exhaura, Ltd. Dual leucine zipper kinase inhibitors for gene therapy
CN110151997A (en) * 2019-05-08 2019-08-23 苏州大学 A kind of application of p53 activator in preparation treatment neurotrosis drug
CA3150339A1 (en) 2019-09-12 2021-03-18 Brian W. Donovan Systems and methods for tissue modulation
US12082876B1 (en) 2020-09-28 2024-09-10 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Introducer drill
AU2021409967A1 (en) 2020-12-22 2023-08-03 Relievant Medsystems, Inc. Prediction of candidates for spinal neuromodulation

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060235083A1 (en) * 2005-03-31 2006-10-19 Jorge Heller PEG-poly(ortho ester) graft copolymers and pharmaceutical compositions

Family Cites Families (76)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US30985A (en) 1860-12-18 Thomas l
US3773919A (en) 1969-10-23 1973-11-20 Du Pont Polylactide-drug mixtures
US4179337A (en) 1973-07-20 1979-12-18 Davis Frank F Non-immunogenic polypeptides
JPS6023084B2 (en) 1979-07-11 1985-06-05 味の素株式会社 blood substitute
IE52535B1 (en) 1981-02-16 1987-12-09 Ici Plc Continuous release pharmaceutical compositions
US4485045A (en) 1981-07-06 1984-11-27 Research Corporation Synthetic phosphatidyl cholines useful in forming liposomes
US4640835A (en) 1981-10-30 1987-02-03 Nippon Chemiphar Company, Ltd. Plasminogen activator derivatives
EP0102324A3 (en) 1982-07-29 1984-11-07 Ciba-Geigy Ag Lipids and surfactants in an aqueous medium
US4560655A (en) 1982-12-16 1985-12-24 Immunex Corporation Serum-free cell culture medium and process for making same
US4657866A (en) 1982-12-21 1987-04-14 Sudhir Kumar Serum-free, synthetic, completely chemically defined tissue culture media
US4816567A (en) 1983-04-08 1989-03-28 Genentech, Inc. Recombinant immunoglobin preparations
DD266710A3 (en) 1983-06-06 1989-04-12 Ve Forschungszentrum Biotechnologie Process for the biotechnical production of alkaline phosphatase
US4544545A (en) 1983-06-20 1985-10-01 Trustees University Of Massachusetts Liposomes containing modified cholesterol for organ targeting
HUT35524A (en) 1983-08-02 1985-07-29 Hoechst Ag Process for preparing pharmaceutical compositions containing regulatory /regulative/ peptides providing for the retarded release of the active substance
US4767704A (en) 1983-10-07 1988-08-30 Columbia University In The City Of New York Protein-free culture medium
US4496689A (en) 1983-12-27 1985-01-29 Miles Laboratories, Inc. Covalently attached complex of alpha-1-proteinase inhibitor with a water soluble polymer
US4879231A (en) 1984-10-30 1989-11-07 Phillips Petroleum Company Transformation of yeasts of the genus pichia
DE3675588D1 (en) 1985-06-19 1990-12-20 Ajinomoto Kk HAEMOGLOBIN TIED TO A POLY (ALKENYLENE OXIDE).
GB8516415D0 (en) 1985-06-28 1985-07-31 Celltech Ltd Culture of animal cells
US4676980A (en) 1985-09-23 1987-06-30 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Department Of Health And Human Services Target specific cross-linked heteroantibodies
GB8607679D0 (en) 1986-03-27 1986-04-30 Winter G P Recombinant dna product
US4927762A (en) 1986-04-01 1990-05-22 Cell Enterprises, Inc. Cell culture medium with antioxidant
GB8610600D0 (en) 1986-04-30 1986-06-04 Novo Industri As Transformation of trichoderma
US4791192A (en) 1986-06-26 1988-12-13 Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd. Chemically modified protein with polyethyleneglycol
US5004697A (en) 1987-08-17 1991-04-02 Univ. Of Ca Cationized antibodies for delivery through the blood-brain barrier
ATE135397T1 (en) 1988-09-23 1996-03-15 Cetus Oncology Corp CELL CULTIVATION MEDIUM FOR INCREASED CELL GROWTH, TO INCREASE THE LONGEVITY AND EXPRESSION OF THE PRODUCTS
EP0402226A1 (en) 1989-06-06 1990-12-12 Institut National De La Recherche Agronomique Transformation vectors for yeast yarrowia
ATE144793T1 (en) 1989-06-29 1996-11-15 Medarex Inc BISPECIFIC REAGENTS FOR AIDS THERAPY
US5112596A (en) 1990-04-23 1992-05-12 Alkermes, Inc. Method for increasing blood-brain barrier permeability by administering a bradykinin agonist of blood-brain barrier permeability
US5268164A (en) 1990-04-23 1993-12-07 Alkermes, Inc. Increasing blood-brain barrier permeability with permeabilizer peptides
ATE318832T1 (en) 1990-06-11 2006-03-15 Gilead Sciences Inc METHOD FOR USING NUCLEIC ACID LIGANDS
AU8295491A (en) 1990-06-29 1992-01-23 Biosource Technologies Incorporated Melanin production by transformed microorganisms
US5122469A (en) 1990-10-03 1992-06-16 Genentech, Inc. Method for culturing Chinese hamster ovary cells to improve production of recombinant proteins
EP0586515B1 (en) 1991-04-30 1997-09-17 Eukarion, Inc. Cationized antibodies against intracellular proteins
WO1993008829A1 (en) 1991-11-04 1993-05-13 The Regents Of The University Of California Compositions that mediate killing of hiv-infected cells
CA2372813A1 (en) 1992-02-06 1993-08-19 L.L. Houston Biosynthetic binding protein for cancer marker
CA2137558A1 (en) 1992-07-17 1994-02-03 Wayne A. Marasco Method of intracellular binding of target molecules
CA2141216A1 (en) 1992-07-27 1994-02-03 Michael J. Micklus Targeting of liposomes to the blood-brain barrier
EP0656064B1 (en) 1992-08-17 1997-03-05 Genentech, Inc. Bispecific immunoadhesins
US5534615A (en) 1994-04-25 1996-07-09 Genentech, Inc. Cardiac hypertrophy factor and uses therefor
US5731168A (en) 1995-03-01 1998-03-24 Genentech, Inc. Method for making heteromultimeric polypeptides
US6811992B1 (en) * 1998-05-14 2004-11-02 Ya Fang Liu Method for identifying MLK inhibitors for the treatment of neurological conditions
ATE293254T1 (en) 1998-08-26 2005-04-15 Cephalon Inc MODULATION OF MLK (MULTIPLE LINEAGE KINASE) PROTEINS
US6514221B2 (en) 2000-07-27 2003-02-04 Brigham And Women's Hospital, Inc. Blood-brain barrier opening
US20020065259A1 (en) 2000-08-30 2002-05-30 Schatzberg Alan F. Glucocorticoid blocking agents for increasing blood-brain barrier permeability
US7034036B2 (en) 2000-10-30 2006-04-25 Pain Therapeutics, Inc. Inhibitors of ABC drug transporters at the blood-brain barrier
US20030083299A1 (en) 2000-11-04 2003-05-01 Ferguson Ian A. Non-invasive delivery of polypeptides through the blood-brain barrier
AU2002338446A1 (en) 2001-01-23 2002-11-05 University Of Rochester Medical Center Methods of producing or identifying intrabodies in eukaryotic cells
SE0100569D0 (en) 2001-02-20 2001-02-20 Astrazeneca Ab New compounds
DE10121982B4 (en) 2001-05-05 2008-01-24 Lts Lohmann Therapie-Systeme Ag Nanoparticles of protein with coupled apolipoprotein E to overcome the blood-brain barrier and process for their preparation
DE60234057D1 (en) 2001-07-25 2009-11-26 Raptor Pharmaceutical Inc COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS FOR MODULATING TRANSPORT BY THE BLOOD-BRAIN BARRIER
US20030162695A1 (en) 2002-02-27 2003-08-28 Schatzberg Alan F. Glucocorticoid blocking agents for increasing blood-brain barrier permeability
AU2003217961B2 (en) 2002-03-08 2008-02-28 Signal Pharmaceuticals, Llc Combination therapy for treating, preventing or managing proliferative disorders and cancers
WO2003077945A1 (en) 2002-03-14 2003-09-25 Medical Research Council Intracellular antibodies
EP1513879B1 (en) 2002-06-03 2018-08-22 Genentech, Inc. Synthetic antibody phage libraries
US6927303B2 (en) * 2002-06-19 2005-08-09 Neurotech Co., Ltd. Tetrafluorobenzyl derivatives and pharmaceutical composition for preventing and treating acute and chronic neurodegenerative diseases in central nervous system containing the same
WO2004002532A1 (en) 2002-06-28 2004-01-08 Celestar Lexico-Sciences,Inc. Mkk7 activation inhibitor
KR101186210B1 (en) 2002-12-03 2012-10-08 블랜체트 록펠러 뉴로사이언시즈 인스티튜트 Artificial low-density lipoprotein carriers for transport of substances across the blood-brain barrier
AU2003300522A1 (en) 2002-12-27 2004-07-22 Bayer Healthcare Ag 4-phenyl-pyrimido (4,5-b) indole derivatives
WO2005000200A2 (en) 2003-05-09 2005-01-06 Sugen, Inc. Novel kinases
WO2005003762A2 (en) 2003-06-17 2005-01-13 Bayer Healthcare Ag Diagnostics and therapeutics for diseases associated with sensory neuron-specific g protein-coupled receptor 2 (snsr2)
TWI343806B (en) * 2003-07-01 2011-06-21 Nat Health Research Institutes Methods of inhibiting neurodegenerative disease
WO2005023186A2 (en) * 2003-09-04 2005-03-17 Immusol Inc. Methods of identifying agents that inhibit the growth of cancer cells
EP1663239A4 (en) 2003-09-10 2008-07-23 Cedars Sinai Medical Center Potassium channel mediated delivery of agents through the blood-brain barrier
US7241779B2 (en) 2003-12-23 2007-07-10 Cephalon, Inc. Fused pyrrolocarbazoles
US7169802B2 (en) 2003-12-23 2007-01-30 Cephalon, Inc. Fused pyrrolocarbazoles
UA87829C2 (en) * 2003-12-23 2009-08-25 Сефалон, Инк. Fused pyrrolocarbazoles
EP1741792B1 (en) 2004-04-27 2010-11-03 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Novel ligand of g-protein-conjugated receptor protein and use thereof
EP1752536A4 (en) * 2004-05-11 2008-04-16 Alphagen Co Ltd Polynucleotide causing rna interfere and method of regulating gene expression with the use of the same
US7449442B2 (en) * 2005-07-12 2008-11-11 Children's Medical Center Corporation EGFR inhibitors promote axon regeneration
ES2322881B1 (en) 2005-12-26 2010-04-22 Consejo Superior Investig. Cientificas USE OF AGONIST COMPOUNDS OF PI3K ACTIVITY IN THE PREPARATION OF PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS, SUCH PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS AND ITS APPLICATIONS IN THE TREATMENT OF NEURODEGENERATIVE DISEASES.
US20080051319A1 (en) * 2006-08-22 2008-02-28 Children's Medical Center Corporation Inhibiting JNK Signaling Promotes CNS Axon Regeneration
WO2008024776A1 (en) 2006-08-22 2008-02-28 Children's Medical Center Corporation Inhibiting jnk signaling promotes cns axon regeneration
WO2009143865A1 (en) 2008-05-30 2009-12-03 Xigen S.A. Use of cell-permeable peptide inhibitors of the jnk signal transduction pathway for the treatment of various diseases
US20100056609A1 (en) 2008-08-26 2010-03-04 Washington University Methods and compositions for inhibition of axonal degeneration by modulation of the dlk/jnk pathway
EP2340040B1 (en) 2008-10-22 2019-01-16 F.Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Modulation of axon degeneration

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060235083A1 (en) * 2005-03-31 2006-10-19 Jorge Heller PEG-poly(ortho ester) graft copolymers and pharmaceutical compositions

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Maggirwar "HIV-1 Tat-Mediated Activation of Glycogen Synthase Kinase- 3b Contributes to Tat-Mediated Neurotoxicity" J neurochem 73:578-586 (Year: 1999) *
RDsystems "Human VEGF R1/Flt-1 Antibody" excerpt accessed from rndsystems.com on 2019-03-17 (Year: 2019) *
Rockland "TNF alpha antibody" excerpt accessed from rockland-inc.com on 2019-03-17 (Year: 2019) *

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US12083114B2 (en) 2018-12-19 2024-09-10 Disarm Therapeutics, Inc. Inhibitors of SARM1 in combination with neuro-protective agents
WO2021092166A1 (en) * 2019-11-05 2021-05-14 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Methods of treating neurodegenerative diseases caused by g4c2 expansion in c90rf72

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN102307593B (en) 2016-04-13
US9937224B2 (en) 2018-04-10
EP2340040B1 (en) 2019-01-16
HK1163519A1 (en) 2012-09-14
IL212411A0 (en) 2011-06-30
WO2010048446A2 (en) 2010-04-29
EP2340040A2 (en) 2011-07-06
WO2010048446A3 (en) 2010-09-10
MX2011004306A (en) 2011-07-28
JP5851838B2 (en) 2016-02-03
SG195557A1 (en) 2013-12-30
US20160279190A1 (en) 2016-09-29
EP2340040A4 (en) 2012-04-04
US20160161470A1 (en) 2016-06-09
US9101645B2 (en) 2015-08-11
JP2015134781A (en) 2015-07-27
CA2741089A1 (en) 2010-04-29
HK1208369A1 (en) 2016-03-04
AU2009308293B2 (en) 2015-02-05
AU2009308293A1 (en) 2010-04-29
US20110256150A1 (en) 2011-10-20
KR20110081862A (en) 2011-07-14
BRPI0919564A2 (en) 2019-09-24
CN102307593A (en) 2012-01-04
JP2012506452A (en) 2012-03-15
CN104689316A (en) 2015-06-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9937224B2 (en) Modulation of axon degeneration
US20160199457A1 (en) Modulation of axon degeneration
US20170202910A1 (en) Differentiation marker and differentiation control of eye cell
WO2009140361A1 (en) ANTI-PirB ANTIBODIES
US20090285803A1 (en) ANTI-PirB ANTIBODIES
EP3054942A1 (en) Treatments for proliferative vitreoretinopathy
AU2015202365B2 (en) Modulation of axon degeneration
AU2016253677A1 (en) Modulation of axon degeneration
US20160206591A1 (en) Treatments for fibrotic diseases

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION